space furniture by Ahmed Alsehli

Uniclass L811

EPIC Q12

CI/SfB (90.7)

Street Furniture Product Selector

L a n d s c a p e H o u s e , Pre m i e r Wa y, Lo w f i e l d s B u s i n e s s Pa r k , E l l a n d H X 5 9 H T. U. K . Te l e p h o n e : 0 8 7 0 6 0 0 2 4 2 5 Fa x : 0 8 7 0 6 0 0 2 4 2 6 E m a i l : m s f. s a l e s @ m a r s h a l l s. c o. u k w w w. m a r s h a l l s. c o. u k / s t re e t f u r n i t u re A Subsidiary of Marshalls plc R e g i s t e re d O f f i c e M a r s h a l l s p l c, B i r k b y G r a n g e , B i r k b y H a l l R o a d, B i r k b y, H u d d e r s f i e l d, H D 2 2 YA . ÂŠ MA R S H A L L S 2 0 0 8

Street Furniture Product Selector www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

How to use this Product Selector This brochure has been specifically designed to work in conjunction with our new website. Together they form an integrated way of exploring everything that Marshalls Street Furniture has to offer. The website can help you access the information you Contact details Contact details are clearly listed at the top of each page.

require quickly and easily. And because we’re constantly updating our site, you’ll always have the latest access to the very latest information at your fingertips.

PS3+ Quick Find Select the Product Search Tab on the website and enter this code into Quick Find to instantly down load the page as a PDF or to find out more about the product.

Coordinating Items Coordinating products in ranges are listed at the top of each product page.

NBS Plus Choose the Product Search Tab on the website and choose this code to easily download the full NBS Specification.*

Colour Coding Each of our categories is colour coded so you can quickly flick through to the product category you need.

Photography There are hundreds of new project images both in the brochure and on the website. Visit the new website to download and print high quality photographs of products and case studies.

1910

560

Drawings Drawings detailing outline dimensions of standard specifications. 430

Swatches We’ve improved the product swatches, go online if you need to see a closer view.

Product Tables Clear concise product information, including optional extras, to assist in your specification. *Specifications will be fully complete from the August 2008 update, please note NBS is a live database and classification codes are subject to change.

How to use www.marshalls.co.uk/street furniture On the website, to go directly to the product information that you are looking for, simply choose the Product Search Tab and use Quick Find Function. Marshalls Specialists Direct access to Marshalls specialist business areas.

My Basket Store any PDF or photograph until you’re ready to download or print. Just pop them in your basket, there’s no lengthy registration process.

Brochures Download or order the very latest product brochures

Product Range Search the entire library for PDFs, project photography, case studies and even product swatches. The search engine is fully integrated with the brochure so everything is simple to find.

Product Page Fast access to all the latest information about a specific product or range.

Link Click here to quickly link through to your specialist business website

Product Search Search by product category or by material. Find a product quickly by using the PS3+ number. Access photography, swatches, literature and NBS Specifications.

Quick Find To find a PDF from the catalogue quickly, just enter the PS3+ number at the top of the page and you’ll instantly get the PDF version.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Contents Introduction Bollards Seating Litter Bins Cycle Parking Planters Tree Protection Notice Boards Signage and Lamp Columns Protective Barriers Post and Rail Bandstands, Gazebos and Pavillions Traffic Management Material Specifications Installation Information

3-30 31-82 83-156 157-194 195-204 205-232 233-250 251-264 265-280 281-290 291-312 313-328 329-344 345-356 357-366 2

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Marshalls Street Furniture Marshalls Street Furniture specialise in the design, manufacture and sourcing of street furniture. We have used our expertise to bring together an extensive portfolio of street furniture brands so you can create distinctive and unique landscape transformations. The product range is available in a wide variety of designs, materials, textures and colours, which can be used to complement and enhance the external environment. We offer furniture to meet the budgets, functional requirements and aesthetics of almost any project or scheme. The Portfolio Marshalls Street Furniture are unique as a street furniture supplier in that we have manufacturing capabilities in a wide variety of materials including concrete, natural stone, cast iron, steel, stainless steel and polyurethane. Products and ranges in each of these materials are presented within the brands Monoscape, Geoform, Imperial, Ollerton and Ferrocast速. For more information on these brands please refer to pages 13 to 28. Widely specified in retail parks, car dealerships and retail and industrial units Rhino Perimeter Protection products offer security and peace of mind. Bollards and hoop barriers are available in specifications from standard to reinforced and anti-ram. An introduction to Rhino Perimeter Protection can be found on pages 23 to 24. Our portfolio is further enhanced by long term partnerships with leading European street furniture manufacturers enabling us to supply prestigious, design-led ranges. Bellitalia offer a collection of beautifully formed concrete pieces from Italy and

Sineu Graff, one of the foremost French manufacturers of street furniture provide innovative concepts and stylish, functional pieces. Learn more about Bellitalia and Sineu Graff on pages 15 to 16 and 25 to 26. In 2008 we are delighted to begin our exclusive partnership with Intruplas an award winning manufacturer who specialises in making products from recycled plastic composite. The recycling process and the benefits of recycled plastic composite are shown on page 29. With this varied portfolio we offer architects and specifiers choice, allowing them to select and coordinate street furniture to make strong statements within their schemes. Design and Innovation Working with industry designers we commission inspirational new concepts and ranges to enhance the built environment. Aiming to pre-empt customer needs, we develop new products to comply with regulations and guidelines such as D.D.A., B.S.I. and RoSPA. Design Service for Bespoke Commissions Where architects and specifiers wish to commission bespoke pieces we offer a full technical advice and design service, helping to take a creative concept through to final production. We have some excellent examples of projects where our engineers have worked along side architects to create truly unique schemes.

Manufacturing Standards To ensure that products meet the requirements and specifications of our customers, Marshalls Street Furniture has established a quality system confirmed by registration under BS EN ISO 9001:2000. All sites have gained accreditation and this covers processes that include the design, manufacture, supply and installation of street furniture. Through continued assessment of our quality procedures, Marshalls Street Furniture continually improve all aspects of product quality, performance and customer service. In 2007 The Royal Society for Prevention of Accidents presented Marshalls Street Furniture the Silver Award for Occupational Health and Safety. Granted in recognition of the achievement of satisfactory health and safety management, systems and culture, the award took into account, amongst other criteria, improved compliance with control measures for principal risks and action on health issues. Site Survey and Installation Service Marshalls Street Furniture has fully experienced in-house specialists that can help at any stage in a project. For large projects pre-design and pre-construction site appraisals are recommended. Our project managers will liaise closely with architects, contractors and site managers to ensure the best specification and plans are created. We also have fully qualified, experienced installation teams who can be commissioned to undertake the entire installation project. Ex Stock Marshalls Street Furniture are committed to offering the best lead times possible, products marked Ex Stock are held in stock and are available for delivery within 3 days. Standard specifications only are held. Subject to availability.

Marshalls Street Furniture receive ROSPA silver award

STOCK

Specialist Businesses Marshalls Street Furniture also encompasses two specialist businesses; Urban Engineering and Woodhouse. Urban Engineering specialise in the design and installation of canopies, walkways and shelters, including smoking and cycle shelters. Urban Engineering shelters are often specified in conjunction with Marshalls Street Furniture. Woodhouse offer premium ranges of exterior lighting and coordinated street furniture. Further details for Urban Engineering can be found on page 11 and for Woodhouse on page 12.

Production at North Shields factory, hand finishing

Urban Engineering Gullwing Canopy used to cover Sheffield Cycle Stands

www.marshalls.co.uk/select Sales Office: 0845 302 0600 Literature Request: 0870 241 2463

Marshalls Commercial Landscaping Marshalls plc is the UKs leading manufacturer of superior concrete and natural stone products which transform landscapes and redefine the built enviroment. With more than 120 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience, Marshalls expertise in materials, sourcing, manufacturing, distribution, technical advice and customer service is respected within the industry, making us the preferred supplier for prestigious projects. Marshalls Commercial Landscaping comprises seven specialist business areas, their combined expertise in practise can provide fully intergrated landscape solutions Marshalls Specialist Businesses n Paving n Block Paving n Water Management n Kerb n Street Furniture n Traffic Management n Walling.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0845 302 0600 Literature Request: 0870 241 2463

How our specialists work together Marshalls specialists provide high quality products and expertise from project conception and design, to installation and maintenance to help redefine the built environment. Marshalls seven specialist areas bring expertise to every part of the landscape, with products ranging from street furniture and traffic management solutions to high capacity land drainage, innovative SUD solutions and our extensive block and flag paving ranges.

Case Study Blackwood Pedestrian Link, South Wales Marshalls used its combined expertise in paving, kerb, water management, traffic management and street furniture to assist the design team in formulating a hard landscaping and street furniture solution for the project. Products: Tegula Traditional Setts Special Conservation Kerbs Saxon Buff Paving, coarse textured Mistral Silver Grey Paving Birco Landscape Drain

Sineu Graff Series 9600 Stainless Steel Guardrail Rhino RS001 Bollard Ollerton M3 Seat RS004 Bollard

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Sustainability Sustainability is not just about the environment. At Marshalls we believe that Sustainability must be at the heart of our business and it must balance the social, the environmental and the economic. We call this our triple bottom line: n Social progress which recognises the needs of everyone. n Effective protection of the environment. n Maintenance of stable levels of economic growth. Achieving our goal of Sustainability involves judging the long term merits of our business decisions against this triple bottom line. We are currently the only company in the hard landscaping industry to belong to the Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI), a diverse alliance of retailers, brands, trade unions and NGOs working collectively to tackle the complex questions posed by ethical trade. We are also working closely and in conjunction with the communities in which we operate to deliver constructive projects in a number of areas such as schools, sports associations and government backed incentives. From an environmental perspective we are committed to reducing the amount of carbon produced as a result of our operations. This involves researching, developing and implementing new environmentally friendlier innovative mix designs used in the manufacture of our leading product range; plus concerted action in sourcing our materials, and reviewing our manufacturing, logistical and administration processes. Environmental impact also includes issues such as waste reduction, recycling and re-use. In this area we continue to achieve significant measurable reductions yearon-year in areas such as water management and packaging. As a mark of our work in the area of biodiversity, our Maltby site is the first active manufacturing site in the UK to be accredited the Wildlife Trustsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; Biodiversity Benchmark for Land Management. The third element of Sustainability, the economic, is built upon the way Marshalls specialists do business. At the end of 2006 over 80% of our production tonnage was covered by an Integrated Management System to PAS 99 covering ISO 9000 for Quality Management, ISO 14001 for Environmental Management and ISO 18001 for Safety Management. Finally, we believe we cannot maximise long term profits by exploiting workers, destroying the environment and abusing our economic power â&#x20AC;&#x201C; it is simply not sustainable. Operating our business in a sustainable manner means that we must not only make a profit but also take a proactive stance on our corporate social responsibilities measured against our triple bottom line.

Land restoration at Marshalls Eaglescliffe Works

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Corporate Social Responsibility We believe in conducting business in a manner which achieves sustainable growth whilst demonstrating a high degree of social responsibility. We believe that this approach creates a source of competitive advantage for our business. Our responsibility encompasses interaction with: n Our marketplace. n Our environment. n Our community. n Our people. Demonstrating our commitment to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is a journey, in the course of which we aim to align our business values, purpose and strategy with the social and economic needs of our stakeholders, whilst embedding responsible, ethical business policies and practices into everything we do. By working together with all our stakeholders and embracing CSR, we open doors to new markets, opportunities and relationships, increasing competitiveness and profitability, and demonstrating our continued commitment to sustainable development. Marshalls is committed to the following CSR principles: n We manage our business with pride and integrity. n We are committed to full legal compliance in all that we do. n We aim to provide a safe, fulfilling and rewarding career for all our employees. n W e will continue to develop community programmes which support our brand values and further promote our recognition as an active contributor to local community development. n We actively assess and manage the environmental impacts of all our operations. n W e will further develop our standing as a responsible business in the community. n W e will benchmark and evaluate what we do in order to constantly improve our competitive edge in the marketplace. n W e will continually benchmark and evaluate what we do in order to improve our CSR performance.

Marshalls volunteers installing an Intruplas Recycled Plastic Composite Bench in Halifax

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI)

Marshalls natural Sandstone supplierâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s factory, India

Marshalls is very conscious of its Corporate Ethical Responsibilities in trading with developing nations such as China and India. We have conducted a rigorous screening process to ensure that our imported natural stone is manufactured and supplied to the highest ethical standards. In December 2005, Marshalls plc became a member of the Ethical Trade Initiative (ETI). The ETI is a unique organisation that brings global companies such as GAP, Inditex, Tesco, Marks & Spencer, trade union organisations and NGOs together to work out the solutions to ethical trade and then implement them. Members commit to adopting the ETI Base Code on a progressive basis throughout their supply chains. The Code is based on ILO conventions and as such is widely acknowledged as a model code of labour practice. It contains provisions based on the following principles: ETI Base Code: n Employment is freely chosen. Marshalls is funding Hadoti Hast Shlip Sansthan (HHSS), an NGO that helps migrant workers

n Freedom of association and the right to collective bargaining are respected. n Working conditions are safe and hygienic. n Child labour shall not be used. n Living wages are paid. n Working hours are not excessive. n No discrimination is practised.

Marshalls Indian Sandstone suppliers, independently audited, certificate of compliance to the ETI Base Code

n Regular employment is provided. n No harsh or inhumane treatment is allowed.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) As well as adopting the ETI Base Code, members also commit to: n Monitoring and independent verification of their supply chains. n Reporting annually to ETI on their progress. n Awareness-raising and training. n Driving year-on-year improvements. n Assessing the impact of their core business activities on labour standards. n Participating in ETI projects. Marshalls has employed independent organisations such as SGS to audit both our Chinese Granite suppliers and our sole Indian Sandstone supplier for their compliance with the ETI Base Code. Our granite supplier in China and our natural stone supplier in India have both achieved full compliance. The audits that we have undertaken, using these independent experts, have clearly shown that: n There is no use of child labour in our supply chain. n O ur supply chain produces the best possible working conditions within the quarrying environment, together with provisions for both safety and hygiene. n O ur supply chain provides regular employment, fair rates of pay and reasonable hours of working. n T he granite factories visited were operating 3 x 8 hour shifts (7 days/week) and provided accommodation on site for the workers (and the workersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; families), together with hot meals. The operatives typically work 1 x 8 hour shift, 6 days per week.

An example of workers at Sandstone quarries in India

n T he Indian sandstone factories visited were operating a single 9 hour shift for an average 5-6 days a week depending on the time of year/seasonal weather conditions. n Our suppliers carry out a controlled quality audit at all stages of production. We believe it is our duty to be able to demonstrate the highest ethical standards. We will continue to undertake regular screening and auditing to ensure that the highest standards are maintained at all times. As a company, we only work with reputable and reliable suppliers who meet our own stringent requirements and those within our industry. In China and India, our supplier partners have both achieved ISO 9002 Quality Assurance accreditation.

Marshalls Sandstone supplier workers

www.urbanengineering.co.uk Sales Office: 01704 540 405 Literature Request: 0870 200 7979

Urban Engineering

Gullwing Canopy used to cover cycle storage

Urban Engineering, a specialist business within the Marshalls Street Furniture Division provide an extensive range of stylish and cost effective canopy and shelter products, comprising: n Canopies and Walkways n Cycle Storage n Youth Shelters n Smoking Shelters n Waiting Shelters Urban Engineering offer a complete turn-key service package; from initial client consultation and site visit, through to the manufacture and installation of the shelter or canopy. Urban Engineering offer a full UK wide installation service carried out by professional installation teams in accordance with health and safety guidelines. Offering complete peace of mind through a quality driven approach Urban Engineering serve a number of markets including the Education, Health, Transportation, Leisure, Retail and Commercial sectors.

Trolley Bay

www.woodhouse.co.uk Sales Office: 01926 314313 Literature Request: 0845 021 2214

Woodhouse

Oxford Street, London, Selux Genus 3 Lighting System

Urbis Centre, Manchester, GEO Asymmetrical Parklight

Woodhouse design and manufacture exterior lighting and street furniture to the highest international standards. Systems have been used on many of the most prestigious public and private sector projects in the UK and overseas, ranging from the award-winning reconstruction of Kensington High Street to the stunning new development of Dubai. Woodhouse specialise in coordinated systems: families of lighting, signs, seats, bollards and other street furniture sharing common design themes and materials. The Woodhouse philosophy is to help reduce street clutter and create visual links between public spaces. With extensive experience of project specific design, Woodhouse have both the engineering skills and the manufacturing resources needed to turn clientsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; concepts into functioning and practical reality. The Woodhouse website contains full specification details along with a project based image library and publication downloads. Coordinated systems: n AUBRILAM n CAMPUS n ESCOFET n GEO n MOTIS n SELUX n SPECIALS Selux Fiore Lantern, Park Central

Bespoke seating/bollards, Kingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Dock, Liverpool

Detail of Boulevard square planter

Monoscape Cubes, Leeds Valley Business Park

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Monoscape Monoscape Street Furniture is produced in high quality precast concrete. The high physical density of concrete makes pieces robust and durable and well suited to withstand the rigours of the toughest modern urban environment. Due to the natural weathering properties of concrete, pieces will require minimal maintenance and upkeep. By installing Monoscape street furniture you can be assured that you have invested in pieces that will have a long life span and deliver excellent value for money. Monoscape street furniture features designs from the simple and utilitarian as in the Boulevard and Strada ranges, to those which showcase German design from Stein and Design and are cast in more decorative forms as seen in Scala, Ovito and Riva. All are functional and are available in a number of shapes and sizes. Highly versatile, heavy duty pieces of concrete street furniture such as planters and bollards can be used effectively to guide the flow of pedestrians or traffic, limit vehicular access, prevent parking or act as ram raid deterrents. Other street furniture items such as seating and litter bins can be used not just for functional purposes but also to enhance the aesthetic appeal of a landscape.

Spherical 500 Bollards, Odeon Cinema and Leisure Complex, Tunbridge Wells

Each piece of street furniture can be used independently or specified together to create a fully coordinating scheme. Layouts can be created easily and where necessary, revisions can be effected simply and economically by moving, adding or interchanging products. This provides a vast amount of choice for pedestrianised and trafficked areas particularly in residential, retail, leisure, commercial and industrial sites. Communal public areas can be maximised by adding seating, cycle racks and functional or commemorative signage. Monoscape offers freedom and flexibility for Architects and Specifiers. Marshalls Street Furniture is able to work with Designers to make concepts a reality. Monoscape street furniture is available in four finishes; polished, ground, exposed and etched. Marshalls vast experience in concrete products means that we can offer a wide range of colours which complement and coordinate with our paving ranges. For full details on colours available please refer to the swatches on page 345. This unique offering allows Monoscape street furniture to be easily integrated into any scheme that features Marshalls paving products.

Boulevard 700 Bollards, Monkâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Cross Retail Park, York

Truro Bollards, Southport

Belluno Benches with natural stone inset, Classica Planters and Citta Litter Bin, Welsh Development Agency

Detail of Romana Curved Bench in Nero, Harbour Reach, Dorset

Estate Planter in Porfido, Penarth Marina, Cardiff

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Bellitalia A collection of Italian street furniture. In a balance between tradition and innovation, Bellitalia is manufactured from concrete, yet each piece is innovative and design led, resulting in strong sculptural forms that will make an architectural statement in any landscape. Bellitalia has been designed to demonstrate durability, functionality and style. The solidity provided by concrete is married with innovative features such as planters with self levelling systems and planters with integral seats which extend their use. In its simplest form furniture is cast using either high quality pozzolanic concrete or Portland Cement. A high quality finish and enhanced weathering protection are created by vibration, sandblasting and coating with a clear acrylic resin. A selection of planters, litter bins and bollards are also decorated with polished copper bands. Polished concrete furniture has a lustrous finish and is available in seven beautiful colourways. Each piece is cast using a fine marble aggregate mixed with concrete, a smooth finish is created by a rigorous polishing process, the piece is then coated with a protective varnish and further polished.

Belluno Bench, Rhino Cycle Stands and Ferrocast Post and Panels, Lancaster

Bellitalia also features products which are a fusion of concrete and metals. Concrete is imaginatively combined with steel or stainless steel to create street furniture with a unique appearance. In addition, selected pieces of furniture are combined with copper plating to provide a warm, lustrous finish. Furniture can be used in almost any type of landscape, however popular uses are retail, commercial, residential developments and harbour and coastal areas. Bellitalia provides the Architect and Specifiers with a fantastic choice of unique and individual products with which to create a scheme.

Saturnia Planter and Romana Benches in Nero, Harbour Reach, Dorset

Primavera Planter in Porfido, Penarth Marina, Cardiff

Stonelements Seat with Tapered Legs in Polished Black on Marshalls Conservation Paving in Silver Grey

Simply Stone Bollards

Simply Stone Bollards, detail

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Geoform Marshalls Street Furniture is proud to offer Geoform, which includes two ranges of distinctive street furniture, manufactured from Natural Stone. Marshalls Street Furniture commissioned award-winning designer Terence Woodgate to design a portfolio of street furniture from natural stone. The result is Stonelements; a unique collection of street furniture made from high quality, natural granite. Created from elements with smooth clean lines and rounded edges, Stonelements furniture allows you to introduce a purposeful, sophisticated aesthetic to your scheme. Simply Stone is a range of street furniture the design of which allows the quality of the granite to be the central focus. Based on simple, geometric shapes each piece comprises clean lines and angular edges. The simplicity of the designs combined with the natural beauty of granite makes Simply Stone street furniture a distinctive and attractive proposition. Simple 2000 Bench Both ranges are available in six stunning colourways, available in polished or fine picked textures to provide striking contrasts and finished effects. Polished granite enhances the natural beauty of the stone providing an elegant finish with advanced aesthetic. Fine picked granite yields a matt, textured finish with superior slip resistant properties. For colour and finish swatches please refer to page 97. Natural Stone street furniture offers ideal solutions for those landscapes and projects which require highest quality products combined with leading design. Stonelements and Simply Stone offer Architects and Specifiers a range of prestigious street furniture which be used to add individuality to their projects. All of Marshalls Street Furniture granite materials are sourced from the companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s principal Chinese supplier who complies with the ETI (Ethical Trading Initiative) Base Code and the Principles of Implementation.

Seat with conical legs in fine picked silver grey

Stool and oval bench with conical legs in polished black

Kingston Seat

Imperial Water Standpipe

Imperial Noticeboard, Edinburgh

Imperial Basket Bracket with motif

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Imperial Imperial features traditionally styled street furniture in cast iron or cast aluminium. Designs are reverent to more historical landscapes and ensure that Architects and Specifiers can specify street furniture that will retain the integrity of traditional landscapes ensuring that long-standing aesthetics are not compromised. Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full range of cast iron furniture including: seats, bins, bollards and tree grilles. Cast iron designs are unmistakably Victorian in origin with ornate styling and intricate embellishments. Each piece is created to complement streets and town centres that were styled in the Victorian era. Logos, dates, insignia and sponsorship plaques can be incorporated subject to design suitability. Imperial street furniture is ideal for the more traditional landscaping project. Larger pieces, such as finger posts and hanging basket containers are cast in aluminium. Also, our extensive range of cast iron bollards now includes the versatile Imperial Bollard which is cast in aluminium. The Imperial Bollard can be specified as a water standpipe bollard or an electrical supply bollard. The use of a high quality ductile cast iron or cast aluminium in the manufacturing process means that products can withstand the arduousness of todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s urban environments.

Imperial Hanging Basket Column, Malton

Heritage Seat, Bourne

M3 Seats and Tree Grille, Newby Primary School

Festival Curved Seat, Newgate Centre, Bishop Auckland

Festival Litter Bin and Seat, Wishaw Hospital, Glasgow

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Ollerton Ollerton street furniture is recognised as being versatile, functional and stylish. Modular seating systems allow configurations to be created that will maximise the functionality of public spaces. The stainless steel M3 and steel Festival seating systems have been specified in almost endless permutations such as circles, squares and sweeping serpentine curves. These retain the strength, safety and vandal resistant features of the individual straight seats and benches. Other seating designs include the Delta Festival which uses the contemporary design of the Festival range but is mounted on end castings with integral armrests and Buffalo which is offered in two colours to brighten school playgrounds and play areas in parks. Seating heights are compliant with the requirements of the Disability Discrimination Act. Armrests can be specified on certain models along with a full range of other optional extras. Coordinating items are also available including cycle stands, planters, tree protection signage and bollards. Furniture can be personalised with individual emblems. Seats can be customised with plaques, cast motifs and engraved slats or armrests. Tree guards and planters can be adorned with commemorative features. Hanging basket columns and notice boards can carry special dedications.

Festival Curved Seat, Queen Elizabeth School, Cumbria

Designed to a specification that will withstand the rigours of the modern urban landscape, furniture is always manufactured to the highest standards, providing confidence that it will have a long lifespan and will retain optimal appearance with only minimal maintenance. Ollerton also offer bandstands, pavilions and gazebos in traditional, oriental and modern octagonal designs. These structures are ideal to help create sheltered performance, rest and meeting areas for all types of landscapes. Gazebos and Pavilions also add a touch of charm to gardens. A performing arts structure has been added to the range, providing a versatile and modern bandstand system for the 21st century.

M3 Serpentine Bench, Litter Bin, Bollards and Curved Seat, Chichester College

Festival Seat, Birmingham

RS001 Bollards, with red Keycheck paving, Fort Retail Park, Manchester

RS001 Liftout and Lockable bollards with bespoke cycle stands, Crown Point, Denton

RS001 Bollard, Basingstoke

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Rhino Rhino Perimeter Protection provides strong, simple, cost effective security measures that are ideal for access control, ram raid deterrence and the creation of pedestrian walkways. A comprehensive selection of static bollards, telescopic bollards and hoop barriers is offered that will suit most needs and complement any scheme. Static bollards will add security to your landscape and are available in steel and stainless steel. As steel is exceptionally strong and will not shatter on impact it is a true deterrent. Static steel bollards are ideal for perimeter protection, they can be polyester powder coated in a colour of your choice to coordinate with a scheme or to communicate a corporate identity. Stainless steel bollards are also extremely strong, durable and require little maintenance. They provide a contemporary style and are popular for the creation of pedestrian walkways and protected parking. Static bollards are specified extensively in garage forecourts, car parks, retail and leisure parks and commercial centres. Rhino telescopic bollards provide a secure and cost effective method of protecting premises and vehicles while still allowing access when required. The Rhino telescopic bollard is simply raised vertically out of the ground and locked into the upright position.

RB105 Bollard, Galleon’s Reach, Becton

Certain Rhino telescopic bollards have been independently certified by the certified by the Home Office Sold Secure organisation and have been awarded the ‘Automotive Gold’ standard, they have also been accredited with the ‘Secured by Design’ award by the UK Police. Hoop barriers are an ideal way of securing large perimeters, allowing pedestrian access whilst denying vehicular entry. Hoop barriers may be static or detachable; these may be part lifted to act as a gate allowing quick vehicle access, or can be completely removed.

RT5 Telescope Bollard, Slough

RB75 Hoop Barrier, Stockport

Bicentenary Glasshouse, RHS Wisley

Garden City Seat, Chair and Low Table, Manchester

Optima 2 Seater Seats, Cheshire

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Sineu Graff Sineu Graff is an elegant and prestigious collection of French street furniture showcasing both contemporary and classic styles. Sineu Graff facilitates the integration of designs into the most varied of settings by offering ranges in a choice of materials from cast iron, steel, stainless steel and timber. Innovation is at the forefront of design and Sineu Graff work in consultation with designers, architects, town planners, and end users. Recognising the changing attitudes to the use of public spaces, Sineu Graff developed ranges to meet the modern lifestyle requirements of any environment. Their street furniture can be used to create social meeting places, areas of rest and relaxation and comfortable waiting areas. Fashioned to match urban architectures, Sineu Graff furniture installations can enhance any scheme whether modern, traditional or rustic. An innovative new concept in street furniture is â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Outdoor Living Roomsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;. Five collections of furniture that include seats, benches, individual chairs, footstools, low tables and even loungers. Pieces can be grouped together to create convivial spaces. Outdoor Living Rooms aim to promote the creation of public spaces that encourage social interaction and participation, ultimately building a better feeling of community.

Urban Trio Seat, Stainless Steel, Sunderland

Sineu Graff offer a large collection of street furniture including: seating, litter bins, tree grilles, bollards, and safety barriers. Furniture is of an exceptional quality and is always a good investment, with ranges including pieces that will suit any budget. Where full schemes are to be specified, coordinated items are offered. Individual pieces can also be specified in a colour of your choice from a full range of sable colours which provide a high quality lustrous, matt finish. A large range of standard RAL colours is also provided where a high gloss finish is preferred.

Stainless Steel machined top bollard, Sunderland

Wishbone Cycle Stand, Sunderland

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

FerrocastÂŽ Ferrocast is a polyurethane of an engineering grade specification which was developed from its use in the mining, quarrying and North Sea Oil Industries. These harsh environments were perfect testing conditions to prove that it would be an ideal material for manufacturing street furniture that would withstand the rigours of the urban environment. The durability of Ferrocast makes it a preferred material in the specification of street furniture. It has a longer, maintenance-free lifespan and helps to reduce ongoing maintenance costs. Ferrocast is an organic, plastic-like material which in raw state, is liquid. It is then mixed and poured around a steel core into the desired street furniture shape to form a solid, durable material. Originally Ferrocast was used to replicate Victorian cast iron street furniture that had perished or to create new items sympathetic to an existing scheme. Ferrocast is now used to create modern designs and today Ferrocast street furniture is specified to create both traditional landscapes and contemporary schemes.

Manchester Millenium Bollard, Exchange Square, Manchester

No other material can provide the variety of solutions required by todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s streetscape designers. The versatility of the material and the flexibility of the manufacturing process make it possible to offer standard products with customised detailing, including crests and logos. For larger projects, it is possible to commission bespoke pieces of Ferrocast street furniture with the minimum of capital investment due to Marshalls low-cost tooling system. Items can be made to your design and specifications or produced to your brief by in-house designers. Marshalls offer a full technical advice and design service to take creative concepts through to production. For post and rail systems, a full site survey and installation service is also offered. Benefits of Ferrocast Street Furniture Corrosion Resistance: Ferrocast will not rust or corrode as it is resistant to many chemicals including saline and uric acid. Impact and Abrasion Resistance: Ferrocast will not dent or scratch as the material has a hardness rating of 70 on the shore D scale. Maintains Optimum Appearance: Ferrocast polyurethane is through-coloured with a pigment that will match the eventual paint colour. Should any surface damage occur it will not be apparent.

Bespoke Seating, Leicester

Inherent Structural Strength: Ferrocast pieces cast around an internal steel core have increased structural strength. For bollards, an anti-ram specification is available. Reduced Weight: Ferrocast bollards are approximately one third the weight of cast iron. This reduces delivery and installation costs; no on site lifting is required and installation is quicker and easier. 1. Large WaterSide Bin, in profile, Blackpool. 2. Red Route Cycle Stand, Islington. 3. S8P Series Tree Grille, Leeds Valley Business Park. 4. Scarborough Post and Rail, Scarborough. 5. Reproduction Lamp Column, Wrexham. 6. Finger Post with Pointed Finial.

Bespoke seating, Torbay Post and Wire System, Waterside Bins, Torbay

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Intruplas Marshalls Street Furniture has an exclusive partnership agreement with Intruplas, a recycled plastic composite (RPC) manufacturer, to work together to develop and distribute street furniture made from recycled plastic and other recyclable materials. Intruplas has a very strong environmental ethos and contribute to helping develop a sustainable environment. Their core belief is that what is good for business can be good for the environment. In keeping with their ethos, Intruplas ensure that all electricity used on their site comes from renewable resources. Furthermore they are accredited by the Environment Agency as recyclers of plastic waste. All of Intruplasâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s hard work and commitment to the environment has not gone unnoticed as they have received awards for excellence including an award from former Prime Minister, Tony Blair. The award was presented to them for achieving all of the targets set out in Agenda 21. Additionally Intruplas were awarded with the Eco Design for Profit Award from the Environmental Business Network. Our RPC products are manufactured from 100% waste plastic material, no paint, preservation or surface treatments are added to the mix. Intruplas are also unique in the fact that they can process many forms of waste plastic including plastic which is deemed to be contaminated. Intruplas Recycling Process 1. Plastic waste arrives in a variety of sizes and formats, as a first step it is granulated to make it easier to handle. 2. Different types of plastic are blended together to create the correct mix for the composite. Using various plastics creates a high strength product that is very durable and will not sag over time. 3. The blended mix is melted, effectively resulting in a new material. 4. The material is then extruded into profiles. 5. Profiles are hand-finished then assembled into the complete finished piece of furniture. 6. Each piece of furniture can then be recycled itself!

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Bollards Concrete Bollards

Monoscape

Bellitalia: Concrete, concrete with metals and polished concrete

Natural Stone Bollards

Geoform: Simply Stone

Cast Iron and Aluminium Bollards

Imperial

Sineu Graff

Antony Gormley

Stainless Steel Bollards

Rhino

Ollerton

Sineu Graff

Steel Bollards

Rhino

Sineu Graff

Telescopic Bollards

Rhino

Rhino Hoop Barriers

Polyurethane Bollards

FerrocastÂŽ Bollards

Ferrocast Special Bollards

Plastic Bollards

Plastic Vergemarkers

Plastic Low Level Signage

Recycled Plastic Composite Bollards

Intruplas

Timber Bollards

Sineu Graff

â&#x20AC;š Deansgate Bollard with yellow reflective tape, Manchester

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Concrete Bollards Concrete bollards provide effective security and perimeter protection, whilst also being incredibly durable and cost effective. Our comprehensive range of concrete bollards contains numerous designs and finishes encompassing the purely utilitarian and those with contemporary styling, providing real choice in precincts, trafficked routes, residential and urban areas. All bollards are manufactured from high quality aggregates and are fully reinforced. Quality control cubes are tested in accordance with EN 12390-3:2001 at seven and 28 days to a minimum strength requirement of 30N/mm2 at 28 days. Colours and Finishes Bollards are available in a wide variety of colours, including mixes manufactured to coordinate with Marshalls concrete paving. Four finishes are available: polished, ground, exposed and etched. A bespoke specialist finish can be created to order whereby a surface is sandblasted to show a name, logo or pattern. The Beadalite finish is a highly reflective coating which is composed of glass micro beads that are applied to the product, acting like thousands of tiny cats’-eyes and making the bollard ‘light up’ when vehicle headlights are shone across them.

Colours Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

Spherical 700 Bollard

Smooth Grey

Smooth White

Exposed Silver Grey Exposed Cream

Exposed White

Exposed Black

Exposed Brown

Exposed Black/White Exposed River Gravel Etched Silver Grey

Etched Pale Buff

Beadalite

New mixes to co-ordinate with Marshalls Paving Conservation

Harvest Buff

Charcoal

Silver Grey

Buff

Charcoal

Red

Marigold

Ground

Exposed

Etched

Patterned

Saxon

Natural

Finishes

Spherical 500 Bollard in blue and Spherical 700 Bollard in blue with leaf pattern

Polished

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD01

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 207

Concrete Bollards Customised Products n Bollards and columns may be customised to receive a motif disc. Manufactured to special order the disc may convey instructions or provide information such as no entry, no parking, keep left or cycle path, alternatively they may hold commemorative plaques or corporate branding. n O ther options such as reflective bands and high visibility discs can be specified. Please contact our Sales Office for information on colours and sizes. n M arshalls continue to produce a large back catalogue and would be pleased to quote for products not shown here. Fixing n Bollards are root fixed.

Cubes in Silver Grey, Leeds Valley Business Park

SPHERICAL 500

SPHERICAL 700 700Ă&#x2DC; 500Ă&#x2DC;

100

275

200 4002 5962

CUBE

MARKER BOLLARD 250

705

660

600

450

WOODHOUSE

BRIDGFORD STOCK

STOCK

150Ø

150Ø 915

455

460 455

230Ø 270Ø

RICHMOND

WILMSLOW STOCK

990

535 305Ø 305Ø 455

460

COMPTON

TRURO

760

565 305Ø

380Ø 380 460

245Ø

BOULEVARD 500

BOULEVARD 700

RICHMOND.eps 152kg

730

495

260Ø

280Ø

247

365

Shown with reflective band

WEXHAM

WEXHAM MAJOR STOCK

STOCK

760

750 330Ø

460

450

230Ø

CAMBRIDGE

MILLBANK WITH RIBBED TOP

1000

800

245Ø 230Ø 450 460 Shown with beadalite band

OVITO BOLLARD STOCK

Ex Stock products are available in standard colours and finishes only

260

900

300

Ovito Bollard is available in grey granite, white green and anthracite basalt (black) as shown.

Product Diameter Length HAG Weight Standard Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish/Colour Boulevard 500 Bollard* Boulevard 700 Bollard Bridgford Bollard Cambridge Bollard Compton Bollard Cube Marker Bollard Millbank Bollard Richmond Bollard Spherical 500 Bollard Spherical 700 Bollard Truro Bollard Wexham Bollard Wexham Major Bollard Wilmslow Bollard Woodhouse Bollard Ovito Bollard

260Ø 280Ø 270Ø 245Ø 245Ø 6602 250 230Ø 305Ø 500Ø 700Ø 380Ø 230Ø 330Ø 305Ø 230Ø 260Ø

742 1095 1370 1250 945 670 1155 1460 990 775 1000 1220 1220 1200 1450 915 1200

495 730 915 800 565 600 705 1000 535 500 700 760 760 750 990 455 900

93 152 102 138 114 350 91 140 152 166+69 444+165 305 102 200 253 57 95

Reflective Discs

OPTIONS Hazard Banding

Exposed Black Brown n Exposed Black Brown n Smooth Grey n Exposed River Gravel n Smooth Grey Etched Top/Siver Grey Sides n Exposed Siver Grey Exposed n Smooth Grey Exposed Silver Grey Exposed Silver Grey Smooth Grey Exposed Silver Grey Exposed Silver Grey Smooth Grey Smooth Grey White Green

Lift Out Removable

n n

*Also available as 300ø or 900ø sizes

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD02

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 90 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 161 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 198

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Bollards

Concrete, concrete with metals and polished concrete

Alto Tipo and Basso Castrocaro Bollards are steel reinforced bollards manufactured in white or grey granite concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected using an acrylic resin coating. The Alto Tipo Bollard consists of two elements linked by a threaded stainless steel bar and divided by a decorative copper band. Each bollard is fitted with a lifting hook for ease of installation. To install, simply place in the required position. Alto and Low Copper Bollards are manufactured from steel-reinforced precast concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected with a natural copper coating to a thickness of 1mm. Bollards are formed from a copper shell filled with concrete and internally resin bonded, reinforced with a single hot dip galvanised steel rod 48mm in diameter. The Alto 33 is a removable system using floor socket fixings. Drill a 350mm deep, 120mm wide hole and set the bollardâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s floor socket in the hole in a cement bed. The bollard may be fixed permanently by drilling a 300mm deep, 100mm wide hole and setting the base directly in the hole in a cement bed. The bollard is also available with a key-operated floor socket system to open and close access routes. Polished Concrete Bollards are manufactured from a marble aggregate with a maximum particle size of 25mm, finished smooth and treated with a protective varnish to create an elegant polished effect. The upper level features a 40mm diameter brass plate. To facilitate moving, the Titano bollard framework consists of a hook and axle box complete with eyebolt, the Plutone has a threaded steel bar anchored to an axle box and eyebolt. To install either bollard, simply place in the desired position. The Sfera consists of a pipe and steel stirrups anchored to two axle boxes at each end of the bollard, and an eyebolt is screwed into the top axle box. To install, drill a hole, place the bollard vertically with the tang in the hole, fix with liquid cement then restore the paving. Basso Castrocaro Bollard

BASSO CASTROCARO BOLLARD

450

720

ALTO TIPO BOLLARD WITH COPPER BAND

406

500

ALTO COPPER BOLLARD 33

LOW COPPER BOLLARD 15 210Ă&#x2DC;

310

915 1165

305

TITANO

SFERA 300

283

394

214

637

497

515

294

500

SFERA 400

SFERA 500 294

494

470 827

637

377

283 470

260

827

357

260

214

377 637

497

394

494

497

394

283

294

PLUTONE

PLUTONE BOLLARD WITH ASHTRAY

685 750

400Ă&#x2DC; 400

Polished Concrete Colours Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

Rosso

Bianco

Giallo

Veneziano

Verde

Nero

Porfido

Product Colour Description

Diameter Width (mm)

Overall Length (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (mm)

Alto Tipo Bollard with Copper Band

White or Grey

500

720

200

Basso Castrocaro Bollard

White or Grey

406

450

116

Alto Copper Bollard 33

Copper

210

1165

915

Low Copper Bollard 15

Copper

305

310

Titano Bollard

See Swatch

500

515

200

Sfera Bollard (300)

See Swatch

294

497

283

Sfera Bollard (400)

See Swatch

394

637

377

Sfera Bollard (500)

See Swatch

494

827

470

190

Plutone Bollard

See Swatch

400

750

174

Plutone Bollard with Ashtray

See Swatch

400

685

168

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items BLLD03

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 97

Natural Stone Bollards

Riva Barioni Bench and Sphere Bollard

Simply Stone is a range of functional and flexible pieces. Basic bollard shapes such as a cube, a sphere and a monolith are complemented by two angular benches, all will create clean and simple solutions for any urban space.

Colours

The Simply Stone range uses high quality granite, one of the hardest stones which can be used to create bollards that are strong, durable and enduring. Simply Stone is available in six beautiful, harmonising colourways and available in polished or fine picked textures to provide striking contrasts and finished effects.

Silver Grey

Designed to form an aesthetic option for boundary marking applications, the Simple 150 Monolith Bollard provides clean, elegant lines to enhance any architectural style. This contemporary bollard is designed to stand at 1000mm above ground, with a 300mm securing root.

Polished

At the forefront of design simplicity, the versatile and practical Simple 550 Cube is a dual purpose freestanding seat or bollard. For a smooth, comfortable finish, all corners and sides of the cube are chamfered and rounded off to eliminate angular edges. The unique base design allows the cube to be easily moved when required, using the appropriate equipment. Creating a calm and serene effect for urban schemes, the Simple 500/700 Spheres are elegantly rounded and available in 500mm and 700mm diameters, attaching to a fixing base via a spigot. All spheres are provided fully assembled for site installation. All Marshalls Street Furniture granite materials are sourced from the companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s principal supplier who complies to the ETI (Ethical Trading Initiative) Base Code and the Principles of Implementation. For details of the Simple 2000 contemporary and trestle benches refer to page 97. 39

Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations. Pink

Fine Picked

Mid Grey

Polished

Fine Picked

Light Beige

Fine Picked

Polished

Fine Picked

Dark Green

Black

Polished

Fine Picked

Polished

Fine Picked

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD03

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 97

Natural Stone Bollards Simply Stone

550

SIMPLE 550 CUBE

1000

SIMPLE 150 MONOLITH BOLLARD

550

300

550

150

SIMPLE 500 SPHERE

SIMPLE 700 SPHERE

70 355 122

100

238

50 300

Product Colour Description

400

Diameter Width (mm)

Length (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (mm)

Simple 150 Monolith Bollard

See Swatch

150

1300

1000

Simple 550 Cube

See Swatch

550

493

Simple 500 Sphere

See Swatch

500

500 + 100 plinth

600

214

Simple 700 Sphere

See Swatch

700

700 + 122 plinth

822

560

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Cast Iron and Aluminium Bollards

MSF 102 Cast Iron Bollard with white tape

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of traditional cast iron bollards which allow you to either create or preserve a Victorian look within your landscape. All of our cast iron bollards are manufactured from ductile iron. Ductile iron retains all of cast ironâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s qualities of machinability and corrosion resistance but has additional strength, toughness and ductility making it ideal for use as a bollard. All cast iron bollards are coated with a rust preventative primer and painted with a black gloss 9017 as standard. Bollards are also available in other RAL and BS colours as special order items. All our cast iron bollards are manufactured to BS EN 1563 1997. The following customised options are also available: Fixing Method: Root fixing is standard with the option of lift out and lockable fixing. Second Colour: Hand painted detailing and embellishments can be specified. Hazard Banding: Reflective tapes and discs can be added for increased visibility and safety. Crests, Logos and Coats of Arms: Marshalls can also personalise cast iron bollards with crests, logos and coats of arms on special request. These will be hand painted by our finishing team. The Imperial Bollard is cast in aluminium and can be coated in a colour of your choice. It is available as a standard bollard, a water standpipe and an electricity supply.

Imperial Water Standpipe

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD04

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 103 page 185 page 231 page 236

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 269 Bandstands.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 314

Cast Iron and Aluminium Bollards MSF 101

MSF 102 155Ø

160Ø

1200

170Ø

1000

200Ø

350

MSF 103

300

MSF 105 210Ø

125Ø

1000

800

185Ø

300 240Ø

MSF 108

325

MSF 114 150Ø

200Ø

1000

1100

200Ø

300

MSF 120

100Ø

200Ø

300

MSF 121

1000 1025

150Ø

300

155Ø

300

MSF 123

MSF 128

130Ø 950

765

160Ø

300

135Ø

MSF 131

130Ø 960

1702

300

IMPERIAL BOLLARD (ALUMINIUM) SHOWN AS WATER STANDPIPE

1025

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

1025

325

Overall Height HAG Weight Standard (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish

Door

325

Options Add Ons

Fixing Method Lift Out and Lockable

Hazard Banding

Chain Connectors

Dome Top Bollard with One Decorative Ring MSF 101 170 1550 1200 49

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Tapering Fluted MSF 102 200 1300 1000 42 Pillar and Two Decorative Rings

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Tapering Pillar MSF 103 185 1100 800 34 and One Decorative Ring

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Exposed Cannon Ball Top Robust Bollard MSF 105 240 1325 1000 68 with Two Decorative Rings

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Dome Top Robust Bollard with One MSF 108 200 1400 1100 68 Decorative Ring

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Rounded Top Bollard with Tapering MSF 114 200 1300 1000 53 Fluted Pillar

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Fluted Pillar MSF 120 150 1325 1025 60 and One Decorative Ring

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Exposed Cannon Ball Top Bollard with MSF 121 155 1300 1000 70 Tapering Pillar and Three Decorative Rings

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Cannon Ball Top Robust Bollard with MSF 123 160 1065 765 38 Tapering Pillar

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Dome Top Bollard with Two Slim Decorative Rings MSF 128 135 1250 950 65

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Cannon Ball Top Bollard with Circular Pillar MSF 131 170 1260 960 80 and Square Base

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Locking Socket for Cast Iron Bollard MSF 39A 221 - - 10

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Tapering Fluted Pillar and One Decorative Ring

Painted Black Gloss 9017

Imperial 200 1350 1025 31 (Aluminium)

Utility Options Water Standpipe

Electricity Supply

n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD05

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 105

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Cast Iron Bollards CLASSIC

CLASSIC 40 351

CLASSIC 40 352

1100

CLASSIC 40 353

800

600 110Ø

110Ø

STYLE

STYLE 40 341

STYLE 40 342

1100

STYLE 40 343

800

400 120Ø

120Ø

CONTEMPORARY

120Ø

CONTEMPORARY 40 335

CONTEMPORARY 40 336

600

800

140Ø 140Ø

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Options Fixing Method Overall Concealed Lift Out Height HAG Weight Standard Root Post Base and (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Fixing Fixing Plate Lockable

Classic

40.351

110

n/a

1100

Black Polyester Paint

40.352

110

n/a

800

Black Polyester Paint

40.353

110

n/a

600

Black Polyester Paint

Style

40.341

120

n/a

1100

Black Polyester Paint

40.342

120

n/a

800

Black Polyester Paint

40.343

120

n/a

400

Black Polyester Paint

Contemporary

40.335

140

n/a

800

Black Polyester Paint

40.336

140

n/a

600

Black Polyester Paint

n n n n n n

n n

n n n n n n n n

Add Ons Chain Connectors

n n n n n n n n 44

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Antony Gormley Bollards

Antony Gormley Bollards, Peckham High Street

In an exclusive arrangement Marshalls teamed up with Antony Gormley, creator of ‘Angel of the North’, to design four striking new cast iron bollards. Intended as functional pieces of urban design they have nevertheless also proved extremely popular with many landscape and garden designers. Speaking about the project Mr Gormley said, “I love cast iron for its strength and earthiness. I hope these simple forms will sit on the street confidently and be guardians of its two users, the pedestrian and the car. I look forward to them slowly popping up in the urban world like mushrooms in the night.” Each design stands at 1000mm above ground and weigh approximately 95 kilograms. Each piece is individually numbered before it leaves the foundry.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD06

Bollards

Q50 190

Bollards Antony Gormley

No. 1

No. 2 330

240

1300

No. 3

1300

No. 4 345

1300 1300

400

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Height Overall Height (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Antony Gormley

No. 1

240

1300

1000

Naturalised Cast Iron

Antony Gormley

No. 2

330

1300

1000

Naturalised Cast Iron

Antony Gormley

No. 3

345

1300

1000

Naturalised Cast Iron

Antony Gormley

No. 4

400

1300

1000

Naturalised Cast Iron

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Stainless Steel Bollards

RS 001 Stainless Steel Bollard, Basingstoke

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a contemporary range of stainless steel bollards that can add style and elegance to a wide range of landscapes. Rhino Stainless Steel Bollards are made from a carefully selected grade of 316L (1.4401) stainless steel. Exceptionally strong and requiring very low maintenance, they are ideal for protected parking and pedestrian walkways.

Anti Ram: Reinforced with two galvanised steel tubes to increase strength, intended to provide ram raid deterrence and preventing vehicles from penetrating beyond the bollard.

In addition, grade 316L (1.4401) has the following advantages:

Higher resistance to corrosion: Whilst stainless steel is corrosion resistant, the naturally forming chromium rich oxide film that protects it can be broken down by chlorine and chlorides. Grade 316L (1.4401) has a higher resistance to corrosion due to the increased levels of nickel in its alloy structure. This makes it highly advantageous when used in the areas mentioned above. Greater resistance to pitting and staining: When compared to other grades of stainless steel 316L (1.4401) is less susceptible to surface pitting. Low maintenance: Due to the quality of the steel and the reasons mentioned above, it requires very little maintenance. Grade 316L (1.4401) has attractive ‘life-cycle cost’ benefits over alternative materials such as carbon steels. Recyclable: Stainless steel is 100% recyclable. Around 90% of stainless steel is made from recycled scrap. Due to this excellent quality, stainless steel has less of an impact on the environment and scarce resources. As a result, it provides an all round “green” material for architects to specify. We offer a range of specification, fixing and customisation options including: Specification Options Standard: Ideal for demarcation purposes, standard bollards can be used to provide a visual separation between vehicles and pedestrians. Reinforced: Contains a galvanised steel tube to increase strength. Suitable for areas where there is a higher risk to pedestrians from moving vehicles. 47

Reinforced Anti Ram: Reinforced with three galvanised mild steel tubes. For areas requiring maximum protection.

Base Plate: Bollards can be supplied complete with an integral base fixing plate which is attached to the ground using bolts. Ideal for applications where root fixing is not possible. Lift Out and Lockable: Removable bollards allow temporary vehicle access and can be replaced when works are complete. Customisation Options Finish: Supplied as standard with a brushed satin finish, a bright polished finish is available for some models. Hazard Banding: for increased visibility and safety Chain Connectors: Allows chains to be fixed to the bollards to form sections that can be opened. Marshalls endeavour to meet the needs of all our clients and can offer bespoke solutions to meet specific requirements. Please contact our Sales Office on 0870600 2425.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD07

Bollards

Q50 190

Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . . page 330

Stainless Steel Bollards RS 001

RS 002 STOCK

1000

114Ø

500

RS 004

RS 005

1000

114Ø

500

RS 006

RS 007 90

Reflector set into bollard

1000

100 x 50

129Ø

500

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD08

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 118 page 166 page 199 page 221

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 241 page 254 page 268 page 297

Stainless Steel Bollards M3 FLAT TOP BOLLARD

M3 MITRE TOP BOLLARD

1000

114Ø 114Ø

250

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Height Overall Height HAG Weight Standard (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish

Semi Dome Top SS Bollard

RS001

101

1500

1000

Brushed Satin

RS001

114

1500

1000

Brushed Satin

RS001

129

1500

1000

RS001

154

1500

1000

Semi Dome Top Engraved Bollard

RS002

114

1500

1000

RS002

129

1500

1000

Mitre Top SS Bollard

RS004

101

1500

1000

RS004

114

1500

1000

RS004

129

1500

1000

RS004

154

1500

1000

Flat Top SS Bollard

RS005

114

1500

1000

RS005

168

1200

900

Curved Top Square Reflector SS Bollard RS006

100 x 50

1500

1000

Flat Top Matt Band SS Bollard

RS007

101

1500

1000

RS007

114

1500

1000

RS007

129

1500

1000

RS007

154

1500

1000

Ollerton M3 45 Mitre Top SS Bollard

1500

1000

114

1500

1000

168

1500

1000

M3 Flat Top SS Bollard

1500

1000

114

1500

1000

168

1500

1000

NB - Products in bold text are standard options.

Options Optional Height Specification Fixing Method Finish Length Length Lift Out 1250 1800 Reinforced Anti Base and Bright HAG 900 HAG 1200 Ram Plate Lockable Polish

n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n

Add Ons

Utility Options

Hazard Chain Water Electricity Banding Connectors Standpipe Supply

n n n n Brushed Satin n n Brushed Satin n n Brushed Satin n/a n Brushed Satin n/a n n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n/a n n Brushed Satin n/a n n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n/a n Brushed Satin n/a n Bright Polish n/a n Bright Polish n n Bright Polish n/a n Bright Polish n/a n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n n n Brushed Satin n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD09

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201

Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Stainless Steel Bollards MACHINED TOP 40.501

MACHINED TOP 40.502 STOCK

800

600

300 300 89Ø 89Ø

MACHINED TOP 40.503

MACHINED TOP 40.504

400

600

200 200 219Ø 219Ø

Options Fixing Method

Height Overall Product Product Diameter Height HAG Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Base Plate Finish

Sineu Graff Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard

40.501

1100

800

Polished Top/Shot Peened Body

Sineu Graff Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard

40.502

900

600

Polished Top/Shot Peened Body

Sineu Graff Wide Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard

40.503

219

800

600

Polished Top/Shot Peened Body

Sineu Graff Wide Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard

40.504

219

600

400

Polished Top/Shot Peened Body

n n n n

Lift Out and Lockable

n n n n 50

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Steel Bollards

RB105 Steel Bollards, on Natural and Buff Perfecta, Galleons Reach Retail Park, Becton, London

Steel is exceptionally strong making it ideal for ram-raid deterrence, protected parking and pedestrian walkways. All Rhino Steel Bollards are hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999) and our Sineu Graff range are zinc plated giving our products excellent weathering qualities. Steel bollards are polyester powder coated in black 9017 as standard. However, they do come with the option of colour matching to most British Standard or RAL colours. Specification Options Standard: Steel bollards are exceptionally strong and will not fracture on impact, they are ideal for protected parking and pedestrian walkways. Anti Ram: Reinforced with a steel joist to increase strength, intended to provide ram raid deterrence and preventing vehicles from penetrating beyond the bollard. Reinforced Anti Ram: For areas requiring maximum protection. The bollard is reinforced with an internal steel joist, during installation it is filled with concrete and finished with a separate cap.

Fixing Options Root fixing: 1000mm bollards are supplied as standard with a 500mm root to be placed into the ground and secured in place with concrete, a welded cross bar keys into the concrete and ensures that the bollard cannot be removed or twisted. Different height bollards will have other root lengths, specific lengths are available on request. Base Plate: Bollards can be supplied complete with an integral base fixing plate which is attached to the ground using bolts. Ideal for applications where root fixing is not possible. Lift Out and Lockable: Removable bollards allow temporary vehicle access and can be replaced when works are complete. Customisation Options Hazard Banding: for increased visibility and safety Chain Connectors: Allows chains to be fixed to the bollards to form sections that can be opened. Marshalls offer fully bespoke solutions manufactured to clientsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; specific needs. Please contact our Sales Office on 0870 600 2425.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD10

Bollards

Q50 190

Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . . page 330

Steel Bollards RB 101

RB 103 STOCK

Also available ex-stock 114 x 1500

1000

500

168Ø

RB 105

RB 109 28

50 1000

1000

500

168Ø

RB 111

RB 119 28 STOCK

STOCK

28 1000

1000

500

168Ø

RB 123

LEEDS BOLLARD

1000

500

168Ø

AQUARIUS WATER STANDPIPE BOLLARD

ACKROYD STUART ASHTRAY BOLLARD 154Ø

140Ø

152.5Ø

950

1000

350

The Aquarius Water Standpipe bollard has a lockable access door behind which is a stop valve in line with the external BSP tap with ¾” or ½” hose tail.

Overall Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Flat Top Plain Bollard

RB 101

114

1500

1000

RB 101

139

1500

1000

RB 101

168

1500

1000

RB 101

194

1500

1000

Semi Dome Top Single Ring Bollard

RB 103

114

1500

1000

RB 103

139

1500

1000

RB 103

168

1500

1000

RB 103

194

1500

1000

Semi Dome Top Double Ring Bollard

RB 105

114

1500

1000

RB 105

139

1500

1000

RB 105

168

1500

1000

RB 105

194

1500

1000

Semi Dome Single Groove Bollard

RB 109

114

1500

1000

RB 109

139

1500

1000

RB 109

168

1500

1000

RB 109

194

1500

1000

Semi Dome Double Groove Bollard

RB 111

114

1500

1000

RB 111

139

1500

1000

RB 111

168

1500

1000

RB 111

194

1500

1000

Flat Top Large Groove Bollard

RB 119

114

1500

1000

RB 119

139

1500

1000

RB 119

168

1500

1000

RB 119

194

1500

1000

Mitre Top Bollard

RB 123

114

1500

1000

RB 123

139

1500

1000

RB 123

168

1500

1000

RB 123

194

1500

1000

154

1350

1000

Ackroyd Stuart Ashtray Bollard

Aquarius Water Standpipe Bollard 140 1300 950 25 Leeds Bollard *Bold text indicates standard bollard

140

1300

1000

The Ackroyd Stuart Ashtray Bollard has a front filling cigarette end collector, stainless steel stubber plate and lockable hinged top to allow emptying. The bollard can have more than one stub plate and can also be used as anti-ram.

Options Optional Heights Spec Cap Fixing Method Finish Length 1250/ Length 1800/ HAG 1200 HAG 1200 Anti Flat Separate Base Lift Out Galv. (mm) (mm) Ram Cap Cap Plate & Lockable Only

n n n n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n n PC Black 9017 n n PC Black 9017 n Optional Colour n PC Black 9017

PC Black 9017

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

PC Finish

PC Grey 706

Add Ons Hazard Banding

Chain Connectors

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD11

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243 Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Steel Bollards CLASSIC TOP 40.211

CONTEMPORARY TOP 40.231

1000

300

89Ø

MODERN TOP 40.221

STAINLESS STEEL TOP 40.501A

800

1000

300

89Ø

Height

Options Fixing Method

Product Description

Standard Finish

Lift Out and Lockable

n n n n n n n n

Product Reference

Diameter (mm)

Overall Height (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Classic Top Bollard

40.211

1300

1000

8.5

PC Body Met Grey 900/Top 8019

40.218

1100

800

PC Body Met Grey 900/Top 8019

Modern Top Bollard

40.221

1300

1000

8.5

PC Body Met Grey 900/Top 6028

40.228

1100

800

PC Body Met Grey 900/Top 6028

Contemporary Top Bollard

40.231

1300

1000

8.5

PC Body Met Grey 900/Top 5011

40.238

1100

800

PC Body Met Grey 900/Top 5011

Stainless Steel Top Bollard

40.501A

1100

800

PC 600S Moss Green Body/Polished Stainless Steel Cap

40.502A

900

600

6.5

PC 600S Moss Green Body/Polished Stainless Steel Cap

NB. Classic, Contemporary and Modern tops are available in any standard Sable colour

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Telescopic Bollards

Rhino Static Bollard RB114, Birmingham

Rhino Telescopic Security Posts provide a simple, secure and cost effective method of protecting premises and vehicles. Rhino posts can be located in forecourts, car parks or shop fronts to provide superb perimeter protection. Fully retractable, the bollards can be lifted out of the ground in seconds and lowered just as easily. The bollards lock into their upright position with their integral high security push button lock. When the posts are not required they discreetly slide into their host tube below ground and the steel flap is closed flush. Rhino Telescopic Bollards are manufactured in steel, stainless steel and polymer. Steel bollards can be supplied in a galvanised or powder coated finish. All steel products are hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999). Powder coating is available in most RAL or British Standard colours. Our stainless steel range is manufactured in high quality 316 (1.4401) grade austenitic steel. Polyurethane products are made from Ferrocast®, a two part polymer set around a steel core. They are also supplied in a range of colours.

The Rhino range has the following benefits: Full Installation: Available on selected schemes. Repair or Full Service: Option available for all products. Overnight Service: Replacement of lost keys. Master Key Facilities: Locks can be keyed alike or to differ. Anti-tamper locking mechanism: Bollards feature a 10 pin ‘anti-drill’ push button lock. Security Caps: Additional locking cap available. Anti-ram. Range of Colours: RAL colours to match corporate colour schemes. Matching Posts available. All our telescopic bollards are precision manufactured by computer guided laser for greater accuracy. In addition, products are quality checked at each stage of manufacture to ensure they are always of the highest quality.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items BLLD12

Bollards

Q50 190

Trafic Management.. . . . . . . . . . page 330

Telescopic Bollards Domestic

n RT RD4: Telescopic round bollard is 500mm high with a diameter of 76mm. n D esigned for domestic installations, it is ideally used on driveways for restricting parking or protecting vehicles. n M anufactured from mild steel to BS 1449, galvanised to BSEN ISO 1461 (1999). Polyester powder coated in either RAL Black 9005 or Yellow 1021 as standard. n RT RD4 SS: Also available with a stainless steel post in grade 316 (1.4001) n Coordinating static posts are available.

RT RD4 SS Stainless Steel Domestic Telescopic Bollard

RT RD4 SS

RT RD4 STOCK

RS001 D4

STOCK

Steel lifting handle

10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock

76mm round section x 3mm gauge mild steel

76mm round section x 4mm gauge mild steel

76Ø

500

6mm gauge mild steel lid

RS D4

25mm x 10mm square bar reinforcement 100mm square section 4mm gauge mild steel 6mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

76Ø

500

6mm gauge mild steel lid 25mm x 10mm square bar reinforcement

1002 700

100mm square section 4mm gauge mild steel

1002 700

6mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

RT R5

RT SQ5

Steel lifting handle

10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock

10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock 90mm round section x 5mm gauge mild steel

90mm square section x 5mm gauge mild steel 670

670

90Ø

902

5mm gauge mild steel lid

RS PR8

5mm gauge mild steel lid

RSP SQ8

25mm x 10mm flat bar frame

25mm x 10mm flat bar frame 1202

120mm square section 3mm gauge mild steel high grade S355 5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

120mm square section 3mm gauge mild steel high grade S355

950

1202

5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

▼

Matching static post

RT R8 HD

Matching static post

RT SQ8 HD STOCK

STOCK

Steel lifting handle

10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock

90mm round section x 5mm gauge mild steel 76.1mm x 2mm gauge internal post sleeve reinforcement

RS PR8

950

90mm square section x 5mm gauge mild steel 670

76.1mm x 2mm gauge internal post sleeve reinforcement

90Ø

5mm gauge mild steel lid

RSP SQ8

670 902

5mm gauge mild steel lid 25mm x 10mm flat bar frame

25mm x 10mm flat bar frame 1202 120mm square section 3mm gauge mild steel high grade S355 5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

120mm square section 3mm gauge mild steel high grade S355

5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

▼

Matching static post

950

Matching static post

950

1202

n R T R5, is a telescopic round bollard with a diameter of 90mm. The RT SQ5 telescopic square bollard is 90mm2. Both are 670mm high. Posts are manufactured from 4mm gauge mild steel.

RT R14

n D esigned for commercial use these bollards are ideal for office car parks, driveways, shop fronts, restricted access to roads, footpaths, commercial road entrances and town centres.

Steel lifting handle 10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock

n M anufactured from mild steel to BS 1440, galvanised to BSEN ISO 1461 (1999). Supplied galvanised as standard bollards can be polyester powder coated to a RAL colour of your choice.

114mm round section x 5mm gauge mild steel

n R T R8 HD and RT SQ8 HD feature the same specification but are reinforced with an inner post sleeve 76.1mm high x 2mm thick for additional strength.

114Ø

n D esigned for areas that require a heavier duty product these bollards are ideal for: restricted road or driveway access, car dealerships and in front of roller shutters. n R T/R14 is a similar specification bollard to the RT R5 but is taller at 850mm and has a larger diameter of 114mm.

850

5mm mild steel lid

RB 114

25mm x 10mm flat bar frame

n R T/R14D is reinforced with an inner sleeve 114mm x 5mm thick. Weighing 22kg it is specified where to prevent anti-ram situations.

1402

n R T R8, RT SQ8, RT SS5, RT R14 have passed the Sold Secure Security Test Standard and are suitable for inclusion in the Sold Secure Approved Category List. (Category: Automotive – Gold).

140mm square section x 5mm gauge mild steel

n Bollards feature a 10 pin ‘anti-drill’ push button lock.

1110

5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

n Co-ordinating static posts are available.

▼

RT SS 5

Matching static post

RT R14 HD

Steel lifting handle 10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock

Stainless steel locking cylinder and lifting handle

114mm round section x 5mm gauge mild steel

10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock 88.9 x 4mm gauge internal post sleeve reinforcement 101mm diameter x 2mm wall 316 brushed stainless steel

SSB01

101 x 4mm gauge internal post sleeve reinforcement

710 101Ø

25mm x 10mm flat bar frame

25mm x 10mm flat bar frame 120mm square x 5mm gauge mild steel base post 5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

1402 1000

1202

140mm square section x 3mm gauge mild steel

1110

5mm gauge base plate with drainage holes

▼

Matching static post

114Ø

5mm mild steel lid

RB 114 AR

5mm gauge mild steel lid

850

Matching static post

RT SU5 SUNDERLAND TELESCOPIC BOLLARD (FERROCAST)

SUNDERLAND BOLLARD (FERROCAST)

780mm

730

135Ø 136mm

(1020mm below ground)

Fold Down Bollards FUSILIER BOLLARD

RT KEY OP 1 STOCK

1000

650 60.3Ø

Lift Out and Lockable Bollards RTL 80 STOCK

970

n R SP Vic 8 is a galvanised steel static post with an ornamental top and decorative surface trim plate around the bottom. The bollard is 710mm high and has a diameter of 90mm.

RSP VIC8

n D ecorative security covers serve two purposes: Firstly they provide an ornamental finish to a telescopic bollard, and secondly they create a further security measure covering the lock on the bollard and featuring a second lock. n The Ornamental Locking Top is suitable for use on the round RT R5 and RT R8 HD Bollards. It provides a traditional finish to a telescopic bollard. n The Square Security Cover can be used on the RT SQ5 and the RT SQ8 HD.

710

n The Ornamental Locking Top and Square Security Cover is available in black with gold detailing as standard, other RAL colours are available to special order.

90Ă&#x2DC;

(550mm below ground)

SQUARE SECURITY COVER

ORNAMENTAL LOCKING TOP

100 170Ă&#x2DC;

Options

Height Weight Product Product Diameter HAG HBG Weight Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)

Operating Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Telescopic Round 500mm

RT RD4

500

700

PC Black 9005 or Yellow 1021

Static Round 500mm

RS D4

500

300

n/a

Galvanised

Anti Ram

Powder Coating

Telescopic Round 500mm Stainless Steel RT RD4 SS

500

700

Stainless Steel

Static Round 500mm Stainless Steel

500

250

n/a

Stainless Steel

RS001 D4

Telescopic Round 670mm

RT R5

670

950

Galvanised

Telescopic Round 670mm Heavy Duty

RT R8 HD

670

700

Galvanised

Static Round 670mm

RS PR8

670

580

n/a

Galvanised

Telescopic Square 670mm

RT SQ5

90 x 90

670

950

Galvanised

Telescopic Square 670mm Heavy Duty

RT SQ8 HD

90 x 90

670

950

Galvanised

Static Square 670mm

RSP SQ8

90 x 90

670

580

n/a

Galvanised

Telescopic Round 710mm Stainless Steel RT SS5

101

710

1000

Static Round 710mm Stainless Steel

SSB 01 HD

101

710

540

n/a

Telescopic Round 850mm

RT R14

114

850

1110

Telescopic Round 850mm Heavy Duty

RT R14 HD

114

850

1110

Static Round 850mm

RB 114

114

850

650

n/a

Telescopic Round 730mm Ferrocast

RT SU 5

135

730

1020

Static Round 730mm Ferrocast

RCB 74

730

300

n/a

Fold Down 650mm

RT KEY OP 1 60

650

n/a

n n Galvanised n Galvanised n n Steel n Black 900S AS n Polymer n Yellow 1021 n

Fusilier Ferrocast

1000

n/a

Polymer

970

n/a

Galvanised

970

n n n n n n n n n n

Separate Locking Top

Ornamental Ornamental Ornamental Square Security Square Security

Stainless Steel

Lift Out 970mm

RTL 80

n n n n n n

Hazard Banding

n n n

AS = As Standard

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD13

Hoop Barriers

Q41 135

Rhino Hoop Barriers Removable and Permanent Hoop Barriers

Rhino RB60, Stockport

n R hino hoop barriers are an effective way of creating permanent or temporary barriers within many types of landscape. Popular uses are in retail and car showroom forecourts where effective perimeter protection is essential. Marshalls Street Furniture offer both permanent and removable barriers.

RDB60

1400 60.3Ă&#x2DC; x 4mm gauge Push button lock

500

400

n R DB60 and RDB76 HD are our range of removable hoop barriers. RDB60 is manufactured from 60mm diameter steel whilst RDB76 HD is manufactured from 76mm diameter steel. The steel is hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999) to protect it against rust and corrosion. Powder coating is available as an option. The roots of each barrier are locked into place using a push button lock which allows for quick and easy locking and unlocking. The root sockets come complete with a dust cover for when the barrier is not in use. n R B60, RB76 HD and RB90 HD are our range of permanent hoop barriers. RB60 has diameter of 60mm whilst RB76 HD is 76mm and RB90 HD is 90mm. Each is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which can be polyester powder coated as an option. Barriers are supplied ground fixing as standard, a base plate option is available on request.

RDB76/HD

n Varying lengths of barrier are available on request. n A full range of British Standard or RAL colours is available on all hoop barriers. 1400

76.1Ă&#x2DC; x 4mm gauge Push button lock

650

400

RB60

1400

500 60.3Ø x 4mm gauge

400

RB76/HD

1400

650 76.1Ø x 4mm gauge

400

RB90/HD

1400

650 88.9Ø x 4mm gauge

400

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Height Overall Height HAG Weight Standard (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish

Removable Hoop Barrier 60Ømm

RDB60

60Ø

900

500

Galvanised Steel

Removable Hoop Barrier 76Ømm

RDB76/HD

76Ø

1050

650

Galvanised Steel

Hoop Barrier 60Ømm

RB60

60Ø

900

500

Galvanised Steel

Hoop Barrier 76Ømm

RB76/HD

76Ø

1050

650

Galvanised Steel

Hoop Barrier 90Ømm

RB90/HD

90Ø

1050

650

Galvanised Steel

Ground Fixing

Options Fixing Method

Finish

Base Removable Plate

Powder Coated

n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n 62

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Polyurethane Bollards Ferrocast速 Bollards are an ideal way to increase security around your perimeter. Suitable for use in almost any situation and available in a number of styles to coordinate with most landscapes, whether traditional or contemporary. Manufactured from an engineering grade polyurethane which is cast around a steel core, Ferrocast is extremely strong and has a non-ferrous exterior, meaning it will not rust. This makes Ferrocast ideal in coastal areas where high levels of saline are present. Bollards are supplied with a black, two part polyurethane coating finish which chemically bonds itself to Ferrocast. This increases chip resistance and weathering characteristics making it ideal for heavily trafficked areas. A pigment is also added to Ferrocast to make it the same colour as its paint finish. This ensures that in the event of any damage to the exterior paint bollards still appear aesthetically pleasing. Fixing: Root fixing is offered as standard, but base plate fixing is available as an option on most bollards. Options: We offer a range of options on bollards to tailor them to your individual needs. These are all available on request and include reflective discs, a second colour and coats of arms, crests and logos. Anti-Ram Specification: Bollards can be manufactured to an anti-ram specification. Anti-ram bollards are moulded around several steel inner cores making them even stronger than standard bollards. Marshalls are an approved supplier to several major retailers who specify Ferrocast Anti-ram Bollards at superstores, retail parks and supermarkets. Bespoke Design: In addition to our standard range of bollards, Marshalls Street Furniture offer a bespoke design service whereby we can design and manufacture bollards to a specific brief to fit in with a project theme. For more details on this please contact our Sales Office. Dixon Anti-Ram Bollards, PC World, Lancaster

n T he Waterside Bollard, together with the Waterside seat, bench and bin form the Waterside Range.

WATERSIDE

n T he Waterside range is based around a unique elliptical form which results in a highly contemporary and functional design.

1000mm

n The range is available in silver as standard.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD14

Bollards

Q50 190

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 147 page 183 page 203 page 247 page 262

Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . .

page 271 page 283 page 299 page 330

Polyurethane Bollards

395mm

164mm

175mm

ASHBY

ALNWICK LARGE

900mm

ALNWICK MEDIUM

590mm

ALNWICK SMALL

1093mm

ABBEY

175mm

ASHTON

300mm

BARNSTAPLE

BELINDA

210mm

BIDEFORD

BILLY

920mm 197mm

1000mm

130mm

BERESFORD

910mm

BEAUMONT

190mm

983mm

150mm

1000mm

181mm

1295mm

785mm

900mm

STOCK

275mm

220mm

200mm

117mm

120mm

895mm 240mm

1000mm

CARRONADE

220mm

1050mm

1075mm 246mm

CARDIFF

900mm

CAPSTAN

CAPITAL

CHELTENHAM

1140mm

188mm

160mm

CAMDEN

1210mm

CAMBRIDGE

815mm

BURY

115mm

1220mm

200mm

BRISTOL

1130mm

BRADFORD

1134mm

BOROUGH

1034mm

BIRMINGHAM

200mm

165mm

CITY

950mm

1251mm 225mm

150mm

124mm

DEAL

125mm

DARLINGTON

1095mm

DAVENTRY

940mm

CORNWALL

1110mm

CONSERVATION

145mm

1095mm

136mm

CLAPHAM JUNCTION

1000mm

CHORLEY

1000mm

CHERTSEY

165mm

DEANSGATE

210mm

DELAVAL

DEWSBURY

120mm

115mm

920mm

800mm

1000mm

1140mm

STOCK

150mm

155mm

930mm

222mm

EAST SUSSEX

EALING

1005mm

DURHAM

1155mm

DUDLEY

1000mm

DIXON ANTI RAM

175mm

EASTBOURNE

200mm

GATESHEAD

HACKNEY

168mm

218mm

HARINGEY

970mm

845mm

915mm

1178mm

STOCK

172mm

HAVANT

155mm

HENDON

HEXHAM

167mm

180mm

147mm

917mm

900mm

947mm

1220mm

STOCK

175mm

KIER FLUTED

190mm

MAIDENHEAD

890mm

LEYTONSTONE

1000mm

140mm

134mm

310mm

LEICESTER HEAVY

1000mm

LEICESTER

1000mm

LARGE CANNON

200mm

917mm

170mm

LANGBAURGH

950mm

910mm

KENDAL

990mm

ISLINGTON

156mm

MANCHESTER

175mm

MANCHESTER MILLENNIUM

MELTON MOWBRAY

165mm

225mm

960mm

900mm

918mm

1000mm

STOCK

248mm

186mm

MIDDLETON

MORPETH

NEEDLE

NEWCASTLE

NORWICH

120mm

230mm

PUTNEY

1090mm

970mm

PONTEFRACT

168mm

1000mm

1100mm 190mm

PENARTH

965mm

OLDHAM

OLD CAMDEN

1075mm

168mm

OBAN

1000mm

NEWCASTLE FLUTED

120mm

1200mm

110mm

1242mm

180mm

225mm

1000mm

900mm

1000mm

STOCK

210mm

170mm

RADLETT

REDBRIDGE

REDROUTE

RENFREW

SEAHAM

150mm

900mm 150mm

SUNDERLAND LOW

1215mm

1005mm

180mm

110mm

STOCKPORT

1030mm

ST HELENS

750mm

SMALL CANNON

850mm

140mm

ST ANNES

160mm

SLOUGH

922mm

SANDWELL

151mm

965mm

197mm

190mm

780mm

180mm

202mm

950mm

915mm

900mm

STOCK

136mm

980mm

1075mm

700mm

185mm

MSF121P

1000mm

YORK

1000mm

900mm

114mm

WHITLEY

130mm

WOLVERHAMPTON

1010mm 140mm

WESTMINSTER

236mm

WILLIAM IV

195mm

157mm

WAKEFIELD

120mm

1150mm

900mm 128mm

VICTORIANA

TEIGNMOUTH

780mm

157mm

SWANSEA MEDIUM

1100mm

SUTTON REDROUTE

896mm

SUNDERLAND

160mm

158mm

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items BLLD15

Bollards

Q50 190

Polyurethane Bollards Special Bollards

n F errocast® is a highly versatile material which can be used to create bespoke bollards to fit in with any project themes. We are able to offer a full design service to ensure that clients get the product they require. This is particularly useful to designers and landscape architects who may be looking to create a special bollard to fit in with their concepts. n W e have a proven track record of working with local authorities, residents’ groups, artists and designers to produce many imaginative schemes. n N ottingham City Council: Billy and Belinda Bollards designed for ‘Safer Routes to School’ initiative. n Manchester City Council: Giant pencils to identify school crossing patrols.

Ferrocast Penguins

Billy Bollard, Nottingham

Giant Pencils, Manchester

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD14

Bollards

Q50 190

page 147 page 183 page 203 page 247 page 262

Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . .

page 271 page 283 page 299 page 330

Polyurethane Bollards Ferrocast速

Options

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Overall Length (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Abbey

BL000

164

1393

1093

Alnwick Small

BL008

175

695

395

Alnwick Medium

BL012

175

890

590

Alnwick Large

BL016

300

1200

900

Ashby

BL048

181

1085

785

Ashton

BL052

150

1200

900

Barnstaple

BL056

130

1283

983

Belinda Fixed Colour

BL062

210

1300

1000

Beaumont

BL070

190

1240

910

Beresford

BL068

197

1220

920

Bideford

BL072

275

1595

1295

Billy Fixed Colour

BL074

220

1300

1000

Birmingham

BL076

200

1334

1034

Borough

BL080

200

1434

1134

Bradford

BL084

115

1430

1130

Bristol

BL096

160

1195

895

Bury

BL100

188

1115

815

Cambridge

BL104

117

1510

1210

Camden

BL116

246

1375

1075

Capital

BL144

240

1350

1050

Capstan

BL150

120

1200

900

Cardiff

BL152

220

1300

1000

Carronade

BL156

200

1440

1140

Cheltenham

BL176

165

1520

1220

Chertsey

BL184

136

1300

1000

Chorley

BL188

225

1551

1251

City

BL196

145

1250

950

Clapham Junction

BL208

125

1300

1000

Conservation

BL224

150

1410

1110

Cornwall

BL228

124

1395

1095

Darlington

BL240

165

1395

1095

Daventry

BL248

210

1240

940

Deal

BL252

120

1300

1000

Deansgate

BL256

115

1440

1140

Delaval

BL260

150

1100

800

Dewsbury

BL268

150

1220

920

Dixon Anti-Ram

BL272

155

1300

1000

Dudley

BL280

222

1455

1155

Durham

BL284

175

1230

930

Ealing

BL288

200

1305

1005

East Sussex

BL296

168

1215

915

Eastbourne

BL304

218

1478

1178

Gateshead

BL344

172

1145

845

Hackney

BL348

155

1270

970

Fixing Method Base Plate

Anti Removable Ram

Add Ons Reflective Ballotini Tape Ring

Hand Signs Paint

Locking Socket

n n n n n n n n n n n n 14 n n n n n n 33 n n n n n 31 n n n n 27 n n n n n 16 n n n n n n n n 41 n n n n n 26 n n n n 27 60 n n n n 41 n n n n n 25 n n n n n n n 35 n n n n n n 19 n n n n n n n 23 n n n n n n n n 22 n n n n n n n n 22 n n n n 44 n n n 39 n n n n n 15 n n n n n n n n 22 n n n n n n n n 49 n n n n n n 20 n n n n n n n 21 n n n n n n n 31 n n n n n n 24 n n n n n n n n 15 n n n n n n n n 24 n n n n n n n 17 n n n n n n n 28 n n n n n 23 n n n n n n n 17 n n n n n n n n 21 n n n n n n n n 21 n n n n n n n 18 n n n n n n 34 n n n 60 n n n n 25 n n n n n n n 24 n n n n n n n n 17 n n n n n n n n 28 n n n n n 26 n n n n n 20 n n n n n n

Chain Connectors

n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Options

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Overall Length (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Haringey

BL352

167

1247

947

Havant

BL360

180

1520

1220

Hendon

BL368

147

1200

900

Hexham

BL372

175

1217

917

Islington

BL380

170

1290

990

Kendal

BL386

190

1210

910

Kier Fluted

BL388

200

1250

950

Langbaurgh

BL396

310

1190

890

Large Cannon

BL136

134

1300

1000

Leicester

BL400

140

1300

1000

Leicester Heavy

BL412

156

1300

1000

Leytonstone

BL416

175

1217

917

Maidenhead

BL420

165

1218

918

Manchester

BL432

225

1265

965

Manchester Millennium

BL424

248

1200

900

Melton Mowbray

BL440

186

1260

960

Middleton

BL442

180

1300

1000

Morpeth

BL452

110

1200

900

Needle

BL458

120

1300

1000

Newcastle

BL460

168

1300

1000

Newcastle Fluted

BL465

168

1300

1000

Norwich

BL468

120

1375

1075

Oban

BL470

190

1400

1100

Old Camden

BL472

230

1500

1200

Oldham

BL476

225

1265

965

Penarth

BL484

168

1270

970

Pontefract

BL496

210

1390

1090

Putney

BL512

170

1542

1242

Radlett

BL516

180

1200

900

Redbridge

BL518

197

1215

915

Redroute

BL520

151

1250

950

Renfrew

BL524

160

1050

750

Sandwell

BL526

140

1222

922

Seaham

BL528

150

1150

850

Slough

BL536

150

1200

900

Small Cannon

BL132

110

1265

965

St Annes

BL540

202

1305

1005

St Helens

BL544

180

1330

1030

Stockport

BL552

190

1515

1215

Sunderland Low

BL560

136

1080

780

Sunderland

BL556

157

1196

896

Sutton Redroute

BL564

128

1200

900

Swansea Medium

BL568

157

1300

1100

Teignmouth

BL572

195

1450

1150

Victoriana

BL580

120

1200

900

Wakefield

BL584

236

1000

700

Westminster

BL592

130

1375

1075

Whitley

BL596

185

1280

980

William IV

BL600

140

1310

1010

Wolverhampton

BL602

114

1300

1000

York

BL604

160

1080

780

MSF121P

BL682

158

1300

1000

Fixing Method Base Plate

Anti Removable Ram

Add Ons Reflective Ballotini Tape Ring

Hand Signs Paint

Locking Socket

n n n n n n n n n n n 25 n n n n n n n 22 n n n n n n n 20 n n n n n n n 20 n n n n n n n 41 n n 50 n 21 n n n n n n n n 15 n n n n n n n n 24 n n n n n n n n 22 n n n n n n 26 n n n n n n 21 n n n n n n n n 40 n n 32 n n n n 19 n n n n n n n n 12 n n n n n n n n 30 n n 26 n n n n n n 26 n n n n n 19 n n n n n n n n 19 n n n n n n n n 34 n n n n n n 21 n n n n n n n n 23 n n n n n 36 n n n n n n 40 n n n n n n 23 n n n n n n n n 25 n n n n n n 18 n n n n n n n n 16 n n n n n 14 n n n n 19 n n n n n n 23 n n n n n n n n 14 n n n n n n n 40 n n n n 22 n n n n n n n n 35 n n n n 16 n n n n n n n n 20 n n n n n n n n 20 n n n n n n n n 23 n n n n n n n n 42 n n n 10 n n n n n 36 n n n 27 n n n n n n 18 n n n n n n n n 20 n n n n 16 n n n n n 15 n n n n 18 n n n n n n n

Chain Connectors

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items BLLD16

Bollards

Q50 190

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186

Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . . page 330

Plastic Bollards Available in both traditional and modern styles plastic bollards are suitable for both decorative and highway applications. Plastic bollards and low level signage are ideal for a range of applications, including: • Traffic management and traffic calming schemes. • Separation of pedestrian cycle and vehicular routes. • Demarcation of parking spaces and pedestrian precincts. • Hazard marking and anti-ram application. • Verge control.

Heritage 150 Bollard

Plastic Bollards are manufactured from UV stabilised medium density moulded polyethylene (MDPE) which is extremely durable with outstanding impact, fracture and shatter resistance properties. Bollards and low level signage are virtually maintenance free. The solid body colour is permanently moulded in, eliminating the need for maintenance painting. Units are wear resistant and scratches and parking nudges are less evident. For a full material specification please see page 354. Eco option Made using a combination of 50% chipped bottles and 50% regular polymer Eco Bollards are available in the Heritage and Sentinel ranges. Eco Bollards are available in an attractive stone effect finish although, due the nature of the material used, an element of minor surface colour variation should be expected.

Regency 150 Bollard

Reflex option Bollards can incorporate a patented self-righting mechanism to withstand impact from any direction. Reflex bollards are designed to adapt to a wide range of environments and are ideal for vulnerable sites where conventional bollards require frequent replacement. The following bollards are available as a reflex option: Heritage, Sentinal, Regency, Woburn, Regency, Stirling and Edgeminder. Banding options Bollards are available with three banding options: Class Ref 1: Engineering grade, mostly used for signage and ‘contrast’ banding. Class Ref 2: High intensity primarily used for traffic safety applications. Decorative: Metal effect (gold/silver) banding used on most decorative bollards. Colour Options Choose from a range of Heritage and Modern colours, other colours can be made to order. The full range of colours can be found on page 354.

Sentinel 150 Bollard

Sentinel Reflex Bollard

Fixing Options For a choice of fixing options please see page 360.

Eco Bollard

HERITAGE 150

HERITAGE 150 VISIBOL 171mm

HERITAGE DECORATIVE

171mm

SENTINEL 150

SENTINEL 150 VISIBOL

SENTINEL DECORATIVE 166mm

REGENCY 75

REGENCY 150

926mm

1030mm

166mm

1030mm

166mm

921mm

1024mm

171mm

REGENCY DECORATIVE 166mm

166mm

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

910mm

955mm

1030mm

166mm

Options Height Fixing Method Banding Add Ons Overall Single or Height HAG Weight Standard Permanent Socketed Anti-Ram Surface Class Class Metallic Reflex Double (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Mount Ref 1 Ref 2 Option Sided Sign

Heritage 150

171

1024

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage 150 Visibol

171

1024

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage Decorative

171

921

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage Eco 150

171

1024

Mottle Slate Grey

Sentinel 150

166

1030

Any Modern Colour

Sentinel 150 Visibol

166

1030

Any Modern Colour

Sentinel Decorative

166

926

Any Modern Colour

Regency 75

166

955

Any Heritage Colour

Regency 150

166

1030

Any Heritage Colour

Regency Decorative

166

910

Any Heritage Colour

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n AS n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n AS n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n AS

n n n n n n n

AS = As Standard

WOBURN 75

MONARCH

STERLING

EDGEMINDER

WOBURN 75

WOBURN 150

STERLING

MONARCH

EDGEMINDER

185mm

170mm

510mm

800mm

1009mm

1084mm

130mm

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Woburn 75

185

1009

Any Heritage Colour

Woburn 150

185

1084

Any Heritage Colour

Sterling

170

800

Any Heritage Colour

Monarch

170

800

Any Modern Colour

Edgeminder

130

510

Any Heritage Colour

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD17

Bollards

Q50 190

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186

Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . . page 330

Plastic Bollards Vergemarkers

Reflex Vergemarker

n T he Reflex Vergemarker is the ideal reflective marker for high risk location; it withstands vehicle drive through and impact from any direction.

REFLEX VERGEMARKER

n T he Reflex Vergemarker eliminates the need for costly replacements of conventional marker posts.

125mm

n A patented â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;self rightingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; mechanism returns the Reflex Vergemarker to its original position. 938mm above ground

n M anufactured from UV stabilised polyethylene (PE) based material. Supplied in black with a white band and with aluminium backed shatterproof Class Ref 2 reflectors angled for improved reflectivity on bands.

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

Reflex Vergemarker

1260

125

938

Black and White

AS = As Standard

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD18

Bollards

Q50 190

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186

Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . . page 330

Plastic Bollards Low Level Signage â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Series 300

n V ersatile Traffic Management products, Series 300 comprises either Heritage or Sentinel Bollards with a sign with a face size of 300mm. n O ptions: Sign Options: A full range of sign options is available, including a double sided face. Reflective Banding: Class Ref 1 or 2 reflective banding can be supplied. Fully Reflective: Visibol Bollard option is available. Fixing Options: Please see page 360.

Sentinel Sign 300 Visibol

HERITAGE SIGN 300 VISIBOL

SENTINEL SIGN 300

364mm

1419mm

SENTINEL AND HERITAGE SIGN TOP OPTIONS

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

SENTINEL SIGN 300 VISIBOL

364mm

1419mm

364mm

1419mm

364mm

1419mm

HERITAGE SIGN 300

SIGN SUGGESTIONS

Heritage Sign 300

364

1419

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage Sign 300 Visibol

364

1419

Any Heritage Colour

Sentinel Sign 300

364

1419

Any Modern Colour

Sentinel Sign 300 Visibol

364

1419

Any Modern Colour

n n n n

n n n n n n

n n n n

n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD18

Bollards

Q50 190

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186

Traffic Management.. . . . . . . . . page 330

Plastic Bollards Low Level Signage â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Series 230

n A range of hard wearing and adaptable Low Level Signage Bollards, Series 230 comprises either Heritage or Sentinel Bollards with a sign with a face size of 230mm. n O ptions: Sign Options: A full range of sign options is available, including a double sided face. Reflective Banding: Class Ref 1 or 2 reflective banding can be supplied. Fully Reflective: Visibol Bollard option is available. Fixing Options: Please see page 360.

Sentinel Sign 230

HERITAGE SIGN 230 VISIBOL

SENTINEL SIGN 230

339mm

1352mm

SENTINEL AND HERITAGE SIGN TOP OPTIONS

Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

SENTINEL SIGN 230 VISIBOL

339mm

1352mm

339mm

1352mm

339mm

1352mm

HERITAGE SIGN 230

SIGN SUGGESTIONS

Heritage Sign 230

339

1352

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage Sign 230 Visibol

339

1352

Any Heritage Colour

Sentinel Sign 230

339

1352

Any Modern Colour

Sentinel Sign 230 Visibol

339

1352

Any Modern Colour

n n n n

n n n n n n

n n n n

n n n n n n

n n n n 80

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD19

Bollards

Q50 190

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 261

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 229

Recycled Plastic Composite Bollards n R ecycled Plastic Composite (RPC) Bollards are produced using plastic waste and manufactured using extruded techniques. n R PC is maintenance free, it is non-porous and therefore not subject to rot, algae or fungal growth, as such it is suitable for use in very wet or damp conditions. Also, as it is an extruded product, it is free from cracking and splintering, improving safety in public areas. n D ue to high strength and robust construction RPC furniture is vandal resistant to physical attack. It has an easy wipe clean surface and paint and marker pen can easily be removed with thinners without damaging the product. n B ollards have an extended product lifetime as RPC is less susceptible to degradation over time, the whole life cost can be a third of the cost of a traditional material. Options n Countersunk Reflective Bands: Either two or three bands may be specified. n C ountersunk Reflective Strip: One large reflective strip either 50mm or 80mm can be specified. n Reflectors: Reflective discs can also be added.

SQUARE BOLLARD CHAMFERED TOP

CIRCULAR BOLLARD ROUNDED TOP

LISMORE BOLLARD

1050

150Ø 400

Please Note: The Lismore Bollard is not manufactured using the Intruplas process LISMORE 3-RING.eps

Product Diameter Description (mm)

Height Overall Height (mm)

Hazard Banding HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Countersunk Banding

Reflective Strip

Reflectors

n n n n n n n

Square Bollard with Chamfered Top

100 x 100

1200

900

RPC Grain Effect

100 x 100

1500

1000

RPC Grain Effect

140 x 100

1200

900

RPC Grain Effect

Circular Bollard with Chamfered Top

100Ø

1200

900

RPC Grain Effect

100Ø

1500

1000

RPC Grain Effect

125Ø

1200

900

RPC Grain Effect

125Ø

1500

1000

RPC Grain Effect

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BLLD20

Bollards

Q50 190

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 225

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Timber Bollards Sineu Graff

n T imber Bollards are manufactured in hardwood and finished with a natural coloured protective treatment. n T he treatment provides UV resistance and protection against water, fungus and insect ingress. n C ast iron caps are treated against rust and have a polyester powder coated paint finish. n B ollards are supplied with three types of fixing: – Root fixing – Lift out and lockable (with ground socket and optional cover) – Ground anchor with fixing bolts.

40.305 Timber Bollard

TIMBER BOLLARD WITH CHAMFER TOP 40.301

TIMBER BOLLARD WITH CAST IRON TOP 40.305

1000

110 x 110

200

Product Description

Product Reference

Height

Diameter Height (mm) (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Fixing Method

Options Add Ons

Standard Finish

Base Plate

Lift Out and Lockable

Ground Anchor

n n

Square Hardwood Bollard

40.301

110 x 110

1200

1000

Treated Tropical Hardwood

Square Hardwood Bollard with Cast Iron Cap

40.305

110 x 110

1200

1000

Treated Tropical Hardwood

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Seating Concrete Seating

Monoscape: Boulevard, Riva, Scala

Monoscape: Bespoke Products and Special Commissions

Bellitalia: Concrete and Polished Concrete

Bellitalia: Zebra

Natural Stone Seating

Geoform: Simply Stone

Geoform: Stonelements

Cast Iron and Timber Seating

103

Imperial: Imperial

104

Sineu Graff: Contemporary

105

Sineu Graff: Classic

108

Sineu Graff: Outdoor Living Rooms

113

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating

117

Ollerton: M3

118

Ollerton: Festival

123

Ollerton: Delta Festival

128

Ollerton: Buffalo and Metropolitan

129

Ollerton: Bleasdale and Celebration

131

Sineu Graff: City

133

Sineu Graff: Outdoor Living Rooms

139

Sineu Graff: Urban

143

Polyurethane Seating

147

FerrocastÂŽ Seating

147

Timber Seating

151

Sineu Graff: Victoria and Rustic

151

Recycled Plastic Composite Seating

153

Intruplas: Recycled Plastic Seaing

153

Picnic Tables

155

Ollerton

155

Sineu Graff

156

â&#x20AC;š Ollerton M3 Serpentine Bench in Stainless Steel, Chichester College

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Concrete Seating

Belluno Concrete Bench

Marshalls Street Furniture offer concrete seating that will meet the demands of any landscape and will suit most budgetary requirements. Concrete seating is extremely durable and well withstands the rigours of modern environments. Robust and hardwearing it is ideal for urban areas where there will be frequent street cleaning or the threat of deliberate damage. Concrete seating weathers naturally and therefore will require minimal maintenance. Marshalls Street Furniture offer the following concrete seating: Monoscape: The Boulevard range is utilitarian and functional, the sturdy seat and bench are constructed from a concrete base with hardwood timber slats for comfort. Riva and Scala are two ranges of German design from Stein and Design that will provide a more sculptured aesthetic to an environment. Riva seating juxtaposes 85

defined lines in concrete with curves and is polished to emulate the fine shotblast finish of granite. Scala seating expresses clear lines and combines concrete with steel, stainless steel and wooden seating slats. Bellitalia concrete seating combines style with form and function. Innovative design features seats and benches from cast concrete, polished concrete that gives a beautiful marble lustre finish and concrete combined imaginatively with metals such as steel, stainless steel and copper. Marshalls Street Furniture are able to undertake bespoke commissions; we offer a full technical advice and design service to take creative concepts through to production. For colour swatches please see page 345.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT01

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 207

Concrete Seating Boulevard

Boulevard Seat

BOULEVARD SEAT

BOULEVARD BENCH

440

800 400 1400 2000

700

705 Supplied Fully Assembled

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Colour Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Fixing Method Free Surface Standing Mount

Boulevard Seat

FM670

2000

400

215

See Swatch

Treated Hardwood

Boulevard Bench

FM675

1400

440

474

See Swatch

Treated Hardwood

n n

n n 86

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT01

Benches

Q50 220

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 207

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159

Concrete Seating Riva

Riva: Barioni Bench and Appia Seat/Bollard

BARIONI BENCH

APPIA SEAT/BOLLARD

1700

500 430

2100 100

100

350

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Colour Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Barioni Bench

SD9044

2100

450

392

See Swatch

Fine Shotblast Ends*

Appia Bollard/Seat

SD9046

500

240

See Swatch

Fine Shotblast

*The Barioni bench features a ground polished top

500

350

n n

Free Standing

n n

Fixing Method Surface Mount

Ground Fixed

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT01

Benches

Q50 220

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 207

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159

Concrete Seating Scala

SCALA BENCH WITH STAINLESS STEEL SECTION

2000

500

450

250

Scala Bench (Stainless Steel Section)

SCALA BENCH WITH TIMBER SECTION

SCALA BENCH WITH STEEL SECTION

2000

500

2000

500

450

250

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight End End Section (mm) (kg) Colour Finish Finish

Scala Bench SS (Stainless Steel Section) SD9024

2000

450

200

See Swatch

Polished

Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Scala Bench (Timber Slats)

SD9024

2000

450

200

See Swatch

Polished

Treated Hardwood

Scala Bench (Steel Section)

SD9024

2000

450

200

See Swatch

Polished

PC RAL Colour

Free Standing

n n n

Fixing Method Surface Mount

n n n

Ground Fixed

n n n 88

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SEAT01

Benches

Q50 220

Concrete Seating Bespoke Products and Special Commissions

Bespoke Seats/Bollards, Kings Dock, Liverpool

Special commissions may be undertaken to create truly unique furniture. From one off pieces to match existing installations, to whole systems that will create a statement scheme. Bespoke pieces will be created in the design, colour and finish of your choice. Design elements from different materials such as steel, stainless steel or Ferrocast速 can be incorporated. Pieces can be commissioned in colours to contrast with or complement Marshalls paving to create a fully integrated appearance. Four standard finishes are available and text or detailing can be sandblasted onto the piece. Marshalls specialists will offer technical advice to take creative concepts to production. Design, manufacture, installation, scheduling and costs will be taken into account to ensure the process runs smoothly.

Monoscape Cube with sandblasted logo

Bespoke Seating, Kings Dock, Liverpool

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT01

Benches

Q50 220

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 161 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 198

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Seating Concrete Seating

Quadro Bench

Bellitalia Concrete Seating is stylish and functional, pieces are manufactured using steel-reinforced precast white or grey concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected using an acrylic resin coating. Pieces are supplied pre-assembled. The total weight of the benches mean that additional anchorage to the ground is not required. When installing, use the appropriate lifting techniques to lift and locate benches safely.

QUADRO BENCH

Quadro Bench: A modular monolithic bench featuring anatomically shaped seat for comfort, each modular element is produced in a single concrete pouring. Belluno Bench: Practical and excellent value. The rectangular precast concrete seat rests on two concrete legs which are firmly anchored to the seat via two threaded bars, locked using M16 nuts located in recesses in the undersides of each leg. Belluno Concrete Bench with Natural Stone Inset: The rectangular precast concrete seat features a natural stone inset plate (a range of stone finishes are available).

550

450

Menhir Bench: A robust bench featuring a semicircular section. The unit is manufactured in one single semicircular section and topped with a rectangular seat block with gently rounded corners. The bench rests on two small legs. Cosmoarredo Concrete Bench: The concrete bench is wrapped in a 1mm thick protective natural copper shell (produced by encasing the concrete in a natural copper shell and resin bonding the internal surfaces) and consists of a rectangular seat and two high bases which are attached using hot dip galvanised, steel threaded tie rods and nuts.

500

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Quadro Bench

500

450

BIAV5501

243

Clear Acrylic Resin

Fixing Method Free Standing

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SEAT02

Benches

Q50 220

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Seating Concrete Seating

BELLUNO BENCH

1500

400

500

880

385

Belluno Bench and Sheffield Cycle Stands, PC World, Lancaster

BELLUNO BENCH WITH NATURAL STONE INSET

500

880 Belluno Bench with Natural Stone Inset, Welsh Development Agency

423

23~

1500

385

MENHIR BENCH

500

2200

1360

480

Menhir Bench

COSMOARREDO BENCH WITH COPPER TOP

520

880

385

400

1655

Cosmoarredo Bench with Copper Top

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Belluno Bench

BI901844

1500

400

243

Clear Acrylic Resin

Belluno Bench with Natural Stone Inset

BI901804

1500

423

280

Granite/Clear Acrylic Resin

Menhir Bench

BI901801

2200

500

784

Clear Acrylic Resin

Cosmoarredo Bench with Copper Top

BIAP4600

1655

400

256

Copper/Clear Acrylic Resin

n n n n

Fixing Method Free Standing

n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SEAT02

Benches

Q50 220

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 38 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 162

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 217 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Seating Polished Concrete Seating

n A n elegant range of seating manufactured from a fine marble aggregate, polished with a unique technique to leave a smooth finish which is treated with a protective varnish to give a polished effect. n M anufactured from a fine marble aggregate with a maximum particle size of 25mm, finished smooth and treated with a protective varnish. The supporting feet are sandblasted and painted. Each side features a 40mm diameter brass plate. n T he Aurella Bench framework consists of steel stirrups anchored firmly to axle boxes. Threaded bars are used to secure the supporting feet. n All products are delivered to site pre-assembled.

Colours Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

Eraclea Bench, Rosso

ERACLEA BENCH

Rosso

Bianco

Nero

Porfido

Giallo

2200

610

400 450

Verde

AURELLA BENCH

1500

Rosso

Veneziano

Giallo

500

Romana Bench, Nero and Saturnia Planter, Harbour Reach, Dorset

ROMANA BENCH

ROMANA CURVED BENCH

560

430

1910

560

2109

45ยบ Verde

Porfido

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Width Weight Colours Standard Supplied (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Eraclea Bench

BIAP3630

2200

450

610

595

See Swatch

Polished Concrete

Aurella Bench

BIAP3620

1500

400

500

243

See Swatch

Polished Concrete

Romana Bench

BIAP3610

1910

430

560

490

See Swatch

Polished Concrete

Romana Curved Bench

BIAP3611

2109

430

560

530

See Swatch

Polished Concrete

n n n n

Fixing Method Free Standing

n n n n 94

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT02

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 161

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Seating Zebra Seating

n C ontemporary street furniture combining the contrasting textures and colours of concrete and metal. n H emispherical steel reinforced concrete bases are combined with steel or stainless steel seating. n Products require assembly on site. n Z ebra Seat on concrete feet consists of separate backrest and seat sections and features 17 (backrest) and 21 (seat) concentric bars with a 15mm circular cross section. The structure is held in place by two steel brackets, fastened to two hemispherical, steel-reinforced, precast concrete bases with brass nuts and bolts. The bases are vibrated, sandblasted and protected using a clear acrylic resin coating. n B ackrests and seat sections are available in zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel (RAL 7021), and AISI 316 stainless steel.

Zebra Seat: Stainless Steel on concrete feet

ZEBRA SEAT: STEEL ON CONCRETE FEET

ZEBRA FREESTANDING SEAT: STEEL

Also Available in Stainless Steel 1500

Ă&#x2DC;440

900

369

1500

634

729

729 433

240

489

264

433

Zebra Convex and Concave Seat: steel on concrete feet

ZEBRA CONVEX SEAT: STAINLESS STEEL ON CONCRETE FEET

ZEBRA CONCAVE SEAT: STAINLESS STEEL ON CONCRETE FEET

Also Available in Steel

1612 Ø440

369

433

240

433

729 240 2178 Internal radius: 2235 External radius: 2869

264

729

369

729 489

264

Also Available in Steel

2098

240 193

1692

Ø440 Internal radius: 2131 External radius: 2765

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Fixing Method Free Surface Standing Mount

Zebra Freestanding Seat in Steel

BIAP3033

1500

433

106

PC Basalt Grey RAL 7021

Zebra Seat: Steel on Concrete Feet

BIAP3030

1500

433

218

PC Basalt Grey RAL 7021

Zebra Seat: Stainless Steel on Concrete Feet

BIAP3050

1500

433

218

Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Zebra Convex Seat in Stainless Steel

BIAP3052

2098

433

250

Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Zebra Concave Seat in Stainless Steel

BIAP3051

2178

433

250

Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Zebra Convex Seat in Steel

BIAP3032

2098

433

250

PC Basalt Grey RAL 7021

Zebra Concave Seat in Steel

BIAP3031

2178

433

250

PC Basalt Grey RAL 7021

n n n n n n 96

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Natural Stone Seating

Stonelements Seat with Tapered Legs in Polished Black on Marshalls Conservation Paving in Silver Grey

Marshalls Street Furniture offer two ranges of natural granite furniture. Stonelements: A unique collection of street furniture made from a high quality, natural granite created by award winning designer Terence Woodgate. Created with smooth clean lines and rounded edges, Stonelements furniture allows you to introduce a purposeful, sophisticated, sculptural aesthetic for your scheme. Simply Stone: A range of functional and flexible pieces. The seating comprises two angular benches, contemporary and trestle, which create clean and simple solutions for any urban space.

Colours Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations. Mid Grey

Polished

Pink

Fine Picked

Polished

Fine Picked

Black

Silver Grey

All Marshalls Street Furniture granite materials are sourced from the companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s principal Chinese supplier who complies to the ETI (Ethical Trading Initiative) Base Code and the Principles of Implementation. Polished

Geoform ranges use high quality granite in beautiful, harmonising colourways, available in polished or fine picked textures to provide striking contrasts and finished effects. Polished granite enhances the natural beauty of the stone, providing an elegant finish with advanced aesthetic qualities. Fine picked yields a matt, textured finish with superior slip resistant qualities.

Polished

Fine Picked

Light Beige

Polished

Fine Picked

Dark Green

Fine Picked

Polished

Fine Picked

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT03

Benches

Q50 220

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 40

Natural Stone Seating Simply Stone

n T he Simple 2000 Bench provides simple, practical and attractive solutions for seating arrangements. The edges of the bench and the bench feet have been chamfered and rounded off smoothly. n G rade 316L stainless steel armrests can be located at any divisional point along the length of the seat. n Available in six colours and two finishes. n Delivered to site pre-assembled.

Simple 2000 Bench

SIMPLE 2000 BENCH TRESTLE STYLE

SIMPLE 2000 BENCH CONTEMPORARY STYLE

Armrest Option

490

2000

500

2000

Product Description

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Width (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard (mm) (kg) Finish

Fixing Method Free Standing

Simple 2000 Trestle Bench

2000

500

445

Polished or Fine Picked

Simple 2000 Contemporary Bench

2000

500

445

Polished or Fine Picked

n n 98

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT04

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Natural Stone Seating Stonelements

n D esigned by award winning designer Terence Woodgate and produced by Marshalls Street Furniture, Stonelements is a cutting edge range of contemporary urban furniture made from high quality, natural granite. n C omprising a selection of stunning pieces, the collection was inspired by the welcoming guidance and smoothness of Cairn stone stacks, plus the raw, sustained powerful aesthetics of Stonehenge. n L ike its inspiration, the Cairn, Stonelements celebrates the precariously exposed, simplistic relationship of the junction between the materials. This is then counteracted by the strong structural design principles supported by the mass, hardness and durability that natural granite commands. n O ffering the architect a myriad of tailor-made solutions, each individual item of Stonelements is custom made to create innovative and original pieces of street furniture. The range can be commissioned in six colours from black to pink and further complemented by a selection of bespoke finishes including highly polished and fine picked. n Limited assembly and some installation work will be required on site.

Seat with tapered legs in polished black

SEAT WITH TAPERED LEGS

2000mm

600mm

700mm

450mm

600mm 450mm

2000mm

450mm 250mm

BENCH WITH TAPERED LEGS

SEAT WITH BLOCK LEGS

450mm 250mm

600mm

700mm

2000mm

Bench with block legs in polished black

BENCH WITH BLOCK LEGS

CURVED BENCH WITH BLOCK LEGS

2242mm

Product Span Description (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

770mm

mm 600

450mm

600mm 450mm

2000mm

Seat Weight Standard (kg) Finish

Fixing Methods Ground Free Fixed Standing

n n n n n

Bench with Tapered Legs

2000

450

598

Polished or Fine Picked

Seat with Tapered Legs

2000

450

814

Polished or Fine Picked

Seat with Block Legs

2000

450

838

Polished or Fine Picked

Bench with Block Legs

2000

450

621

Polished or Fine Picked

Curved Bench with Block Legs

2242

450

642

Polished or Fine Picked

n n n n n 100

Bench with conical legs in fine picked silver grey

SEAT WITH CONICAL LEGS

2000mm

101

600mm

700mm

600mm

450mm

2000mm

450mm 250mm

BENCH WITH CONICAL LEGS

STOOL

OVAL BENCH WITH CONICAL LEGS

400mm

450

450mm

1500mm

Stool and oval bench with conical legs in polished black

Product Description

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard (mm) (kg) Finish

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

Bench with Conical Legs

2000

450

538

Polished or Fine Picked

Seat with Conical Legs

2000

450

754

Polished or Fine Picked

Stool

400

450

Polished or Fine Picked

Oval Bench with Conical Legs

1500

450

279

Polished or Fine Picked

n n n n 102

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Cast Iron and Timber Seating

Rendezvous Seats and Litter Bin on Buff Charnwood Paving, Royal Quays, Romford

Marshalls offer an extensive range of cast iron and timber seating that will enhance any landscape whether urban or rural. Our Imperial range features classic, traditional pieces. Sineu Graff cast iron and timber seating is presented in three main ranges: Contemporary, Classic and Outdoor Living Rooms. Ideal for the modern urban environment, Contemporary seating combines cast iron and timber with European style. The cast iron legs are formed to create streamlined, assertive lines, which are complemented by smooth shaped hardwood slats. Classic seating combines traditional design with simplicity to create a more timehonoured style. Outdoor Living Rooms present a new concept in street furniture. Armchairs, loungers, seats with two or three places, footstools and low tables allow multiple configurations, enabling the creation of convivial urban spaces and sustainable public environments. Ranges in cast iron and timber include Opera, CafĂŠ and Elite. Seating is offered with a variety of options including; armrests, engravings, motifs, plaques and various fixing methods. Cast iron and timber seating is available with frames and legs in a range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours. Please contact our Sales Office for further information.

Kingston Seat

103

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT05

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 41 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 185 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 231

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 236 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259 Signage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 269

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Imperial

n T he Imperial range of cast iron seating is styled to blend in with more traditional landscapes.

HERITAGE SEAT

n T he Heritage Seat: Cast iron and timber with ductile iron ends and feet which are painted in RAL 9017 Traffic Black to protect against corrosion. Seating sections and backrests are manufactured from hardwood which is certified as being from renewable resources. n Kingston and Commemorative Seats: Cast aluminium and timber. n Other RAL colours are available on request. n Litter bins and a full range of cast iron and aluminium bollards are also available.

1800

650

875 450

KINGSTON SEAT

COMMEMORATIVE SEAT

Also Available in Steel 1800 or 2000

632

1900

820

800

480

440

Product Description Product Ref

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

Heritage Seat

MSF 502

1800

450

Hardwood

Kingston Seat

OLCS101

1800

440

Hardwood

Kingston Seat

OLCS102

2000

440

Hardwood

Commemorative Seat

OLCS416

1900

480

106

Hardwood

n n n n

Free Standing

n n n n

Fixing Method Surface Mount

n n n n

Ground Fixed

n n n 104

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT06

Seats Benches

QSO 285 QSO 220

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 180

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Contemporary

n W ith its modern design and more assertive lines, the Contemporary Range features seats and benches constructed from cast iron or steel with hardwood. n S eats and backrests are made using hardwood from sustainable sources, treated with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. n L egs are either constructed from cast iron treated against rust and polyester powder coated, or from steel which is zinc plated and polyester powder coated. n T he standard colour for ends and frames is Grey 900 Sable. A full range of standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours is available. n End and/or intermediate armrests are available for certain models. n For further details on fixing type, please refer to page 361.

Metropolis Seat

METROPOLIS SEAT

METROPOLIS BENCH STOCK

Armrest Option 2000

625 2000

455

740 435

105

435

RENDEZVOUS SEAT STOCK

Armrest Option 1800

645

790 420

Rendezvous Seat on Marshalls Greenmoor Rustic Paving, Chepstow Town Centre, Gwent

RENDEZVOUS BENCH

RENDEZVOUS CIRCULAR BENCH STOCK

STOCK

1800

440

185 0

584

138

445

420

R1493

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Supplied Assembled

Metropolis Seat

10.0210E

2000

435

PC Grey 900 Sable

Metropolis Bench

10.0215E

2000

435

PC Grey 900 Sable

Rendezvous Seat

10.0200E

1800

420

117

PC Grey 900 Sable

Rendezvous Bench

10.0205E

1800

420

PC Grey 900 Sable

Rendezvous Circular Bench

10.0205CE

1850/1385

420

PC Grey 900 Sable

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n n

R1060

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

106

EXPRESSION SEAT

665

2000

840 400

Expression Seat

ATTITUDE SEAT

675

2030

810 410

Attitude Seat

Product Product Description Reference

107

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing

Expression Seat

10.0310E

2000

400

PC Grey 900 Sable

Attitude Seat

10.0320E

2030

410

PC Grey 900 Sable

n n

Surface Mount

n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT07

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 44

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Classic

Centaure Evolution Seat

n O ffering timeless designs, the Classic Range features seats and benches constructed from cast iron and hardwood that will provide comfort and style to any traditional landscape.

CENTAURE EVOLUTION SEAT

n S eats and backrests are made using hardwood from sustainable sources treated with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. n A ll seats and benches have cast iron legs which are treated against rust and polyester powder coated. The standard colour is RAL 9017 Traffic Black. n A full range of standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours is available.

615

1960

n For further details on fixing type, please refer to page 361. 740 430

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing

Surface Mount

Centuare Evolution Seat

10.0100E

1960

430

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

Fixing Type

Numbers Required

T or DT

108

Royal Seat

ROYAL SEAT

680

ESPLANADE BENCH

1960 850

900 410

109

1965

410

RELAX SEAT

680

1970

715 410

Relax Seat

ENTRACTE SEAT

585

2000

750 400

Entracte Seat

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing

Royal Seat

10.0050E

1960

410

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Esplanade Bench

10.0045E

1965

410

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Relax Seat

10.0007E

1970

410

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Entracte Seat

10.0330

2000

400

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

n n n

Surface Mount

n n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

110

Forum Seat

AVENUE SEAT

FORUM SEAT

2000

1970

645

685

810

845

450

452

Product Description

111

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Supplied Assembled

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n

Avenue Seat

10.0040E

2000

452

PC Grey 900 Sable

Forum Seat

10.0035E

1970

450

PC Grey 900 Sable

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n

Fixing Type

Numbers Required

T or DT

CONFORT 1 SEAT

CONFORT 2 SEAT

2000

615

2000

615

715 425

CONFORT 3 SEAT

INTERMEDE BENCH

2000

620

2000

400

810

410

420

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Supplied Assembled

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n n n

Confort 1 Seat

10.0002E

2000

425

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Confort 2 Seat

10.0003E

2000

425

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Confort 3 Seat

10.0021E

2000

425

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Intermede Bench

10.0009E

2000

410

RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n

Fixing Type

Numbers Required

T or DT

112

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SEAT08

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 44

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Outdoor Living Rooms

Opera Chair, two and three place seats

n O utdoor Living Rooms is a new concept in street furniture. Chairs, armchairs, loungers, seats with two or three places, benches, footstools, and low tables allow multiple configurations enabling the creation of convivial urban spaces. n T he restrained design of the Opera Range offers simplicity and elegance. Seats and backrests are made from hardwood from sustainable sources, treated with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. Cast iron legs are treated against rust and polyester powder coated as standard in Sable Textured Grey 900. n T he CafĂŠ range encourages conviviality and provides comfort with the cast iron legs incorporating an integral armrest. Slats are made from hardwood from sustainable sources treated with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. The cast iron is treated against rust and polyester powder coated as standard in Sable Textured Brown 650. n T he Elite range brings contemporary design with an original leg profile. Slats are made from hardwood from sustainable sources treated with a clear oak shade protective treatment. Contrasting white seating slats are also available. Cast iron legs are treated against rust and polyester powder coated as standard in Manganese Black. n T wo further ranges, Optima and Garden City are featured in the steel and stainless steel seating category. n For further details on fixing type, please refer to page 361. Cafe 2 place seat in special colour

113

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT08

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 44

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Outdoor Living Rooms: Opera

OPERA 2 PLACE SEAT

OPERA 3 PLACE SEAT

645

1165

645

1715

840 450

OPERA CHAIR

OPERA LOW TABLE

645

560 700

700

365

840 450

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing

Opera 2Pc Seat

J298.402E

1165

450

PC Textured Grey 900

Opera 3Pc Seat

J298.400E

1715

450

PC Textured Grey 900

Opera Chair

J298.405E

560

450

PC Textured Grey 900

Opera Low Table

10.0640E

700

365

PC Textured Grey 900

n n n n

Surface Mount

n n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

114

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT08

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 44

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Outdoor Living Rooms: Café

CAFÉ 2 PLACE SEAT

CAFÉ 3 PLACE SEAT

640

1830

640

1280

815

815 450

450

CAFÉ CHAIR

CAFÉ LOW TABLE

640

730 700

700 815 365

450

Product Product Description Reference

115

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing

Café 2Pc Seat

10.0420E

1280

450

PC Textured Brown 650

Café 3Pc Seat

10.0430E

1830

450

PC Textured Brown 650

Café Chair

10.0410E

730

450

PC Textured Brown 650

Café Low Table

10.0440E

700

365

PC Textured Brown 650

n n n n

Surface Mount

n n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT08

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 44

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Cast Iron and Timber Seating Outdoor Living Rooms: Elite

ELITE 2 PLACE SEAT

ELITE 3 PLACE SEAT

610

1220

610

1770

810

810 450

450

ELITE CHAIR

ELITE LOW TABLE

610

670 700

700 810 365 450

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing

Elite 2Pc seat

10.0620E

1220

450

Manganese Black

Elite 3Pc seat

10.0630E

1770

450

Manganese Black

Elite Chair

10.0610E

670

450

Manganese Black

Elite Low Table

10.0640E

700

365

Manganese Black

n n n n n

Surface Mount

n n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

116

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating

M3 Straight Seats and Festival Flared Top Litter Bin, Albert Dock, Liverpool

Ollerton and Sineu Graff offer a variety of seating styles and options providing solutions for almost any individual requirement. Ollerton is renowned for style, quality and value and offers six different ranges of steel and stainless steel seating. M3 Stainless Steel and Festival Steel Seating systems are possibly the most versatile and flexible available. The modularity of the systems enables seats and benches to be specified in a number of ways. Included in the Festival range is the Delta Festival, this is a contemporary range of seating which is mounted onto end castings with integral armrests. Buffalo Seating is constructed from mild steel which is galvanised and then powder coated to protect against corrosion. Seating can also be supplied in any RAL colour, seat slats and end sections can be in different colours if required. Sineu Graff â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;s prestigious collection of European Street Furniture showcases steel and stainless steel seating, which facilitates the integration of designs into the most varied of settings. Steel products can be supplied in a range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. The Sineu Graff steel and stainless steel ranges comprise City, Urban and Outdoor Living Rooms. 117

The City Range features contemporary designs with modern, clean lines in steel and stainless steel. City Seats and Benches offer function and durability with maximum style. Constructed from steel which is zinc-plated and polyester powder coated, they achieve a high quality, smooth and durable surface finish. Cast Iron legs are treated against rust and polyester powder coated, steel legs are zinc plated and polyester powder coated. The Urban Range has been designed as a full system for the enhancement of highly urbanised spaces, it is composed exclusively of individual seats that can be easily mixed and matched. Steel furniture is zinc-plated and powder coated to a high quality finish and is available in any RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. Stainless steel furniture is made from high quality 316L grade stainless steel and is shot peened to give a smooth matt finish. Arm rests are available on certain models. Outdoor Living Rooms range features Garden City and Optima. Garden City provides maximum solidity and comfort, together with a light transparent aesthetic. Seating is constructed from steel which is zinc plated and polyester powder coated as standard in Patagonia Green. Armrests are made from tropical hardwood tinted mahogany.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT09

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page221

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 241 page 254 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating M3

n M 3 Stainless Steel Seating is a stylish and versatile seating system. Straight and curved seats and benches can be designed to any length, any internal radii above 600mm and in any combination. M3 has been specified in circles, squares and sweeping serpentine curves to provide functional points to many designersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; schemes. n S eats are produced in numerous standard designs, including straight and back to back seats, plus inward and outward facing curved seat segments and circular seats. n A lmost endless permutations are possible that can retain the strength, safety and vandal resistant features of the individual straight seats and benches. n M aterial: Manufactured from 316L grade satin polished stainless steel the system is durable and low maintenance. n Seating is also available with Iroko hardwood slats from renewable sources. n O ptions: Arm rests can be provided at any position. Freestanding legs, surface trim plates, and demountable ground socket are also available. A preventative bar is available which stops people sitting on the back of the seat backrest. n C ustomisation: Engraved motifs can be commissioned for endcaps and armrests. Plaques may also be specified.

M3 Straight Seats with arm rests and Litter Bin

M3 STRAIGHT SEAT

M3 STRAIGHT BENCH STOCK

STOCK

Also Available with Wooden Slats

1800

525 1800

533

820

450 480

Surface Mount

Ground Fix

Options Length Fixing Method Seat Seat Standard Sub- Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted M3 Straight Seat with Stainless Steel Slats

OLSS105

1800

480

n/a

Stainless Steel

M3 Straight Seat with Hardwood Slats

OLSS106

1800

480

n/a

Iroko Hardwood 2000 or 2400

M3 Straight Bench with Stainless Steel Slats OLSB505

1800

450

n/a

Stainless Steel

M3 Straight Bench with Hardwood Slats

1800

450

n/a

Iroko Hardwood 2000 or 2400

OLSB506

2000, 2400 or 3000

2000 or 2400

n n n n

n n n n n n

520

Add Ons Demountable Surface Leg Ground Trim Diameter Socket Plates (mm)

Arm Rests

n n n n

70 70 70 70

118

M3 EXETER SEAT

2400

860 450

Shown with arm rest option M3 Exeter Seat with arm rests

M3 BACK TO BACK SEAT

820 480

1070

Shown with arm rest option M3 Back to Back Seat with arm rests, Blackwood, South Wales

119

450

n/a

110

Stainless Steel

M3 Back to Back Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS145

OLSS249

1800 x 2 480

n/a

140

Stainless Steel

2000 or 2400

M3 Back to Back Seat with Hardwood Slats

1800 x 2 480

n/a

Treated Hardwood

2000 or 2400

OLSS146

2400

n n

n n n

Add Ons Demountable Surface Leg Ground Trim Diameter Socket Plates (mm)

Arm Rests

n n n

70 70

M3 PEDESTAL SEAT

1600

820 480

Shown with arm rest option M3 Pedestal Seat with arm rests

480mm

820mm

M3 TREE SEAT

M3 Tree Seat and Curved Bench

OLSS441

1600

480

6500*

Stainless Steel

1800

M3 Tree Seat with Stainless Steel Slats

OLSS421

2250

480

2836*

212/280

Stainless Steel

2850 (span)

n n

Add Ons Demountable Surface Leg Ground Trim Diameter Socket Plates (mm)

Arm Rests

n n

*External radius **Internal diameter 1200/1800

120

M3 Curved Seat, Serpentine Bench, litter bins, tree grille and frame, bollards with white reflective tape, Chichester College

2228

M3 CURVED SEAT

1414

180

900R

2228

535

900R

820 480

1414 900R

Seat Product Product Span Description Reference (mm) M3 Curved Seat with Stainless Steel Slats

Options Length Fixing Method Standard Sub- Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Spigot Wall (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Mount Mounted

OLSS401

1885†/2970†† 480

900

70/93

Stainless Steel

Any Length

M3 Hockey Stick Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS411

3214†/4028†† 480

900

140

Stainless Steel

Any Length

Inward ††Outward

†

121

Seat Height (mm)

2228

n n

n n n

Add Ons Demountable Surface Legs Ground Trim Diameter Arm Socket Plates (mm) Rests

n n

70 or 140 70

n n

M3 Serpentine Bench with armrests

M3 CURVED BENCH

2228

525

450

1414

900R

Seat Product Product Span Description Reference (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Options 2228 Length Fixing Method Standard Sub- Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted

M3 Curved Bench with Stainless Steel Slats OLSB601

2238

450

900

52/69

Stainless Steel

Any Length

M3 Serpentine Bench with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS611

3626

450

900

140/186 Stainless Steel

Any length

M3 Tree Bench

2250

450

2836

158/207 Stainless Steel

2850 (span)

OLSB621

n n n

1414

n n n n 900R

Add Ons Demountable Surface Legs Ground Trim Diameter Arm Socket Plates (mm) Rests

n n n

70 70 70

n n n 122

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT10

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 52 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 167 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 221

page 239 page 255 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Festival

Festival Straight Seats

FESTIVAL SEAT STOCK

n F estival Steel Seating system is a versatile modular system that meets the demands of modern environments and enhances public spaces. Straight and curved seats and benches can be designed to any length, any internal radii above 600mm and in any combination. Festival Seating is popular in educational and healthcare establishments, and civic spaces. n S eats are produced in numerous standard designs, including straight and back to back seats, plus inward and outward facing curved seat segments and circular seats. n A lmost endless permutations are possible that can retain the strength, safety and vandal resistant features of the individual straight seats and benches. n Material: Mild steel, galvanised and polyester powder coated. n Colours: A full standard range of RAL colours is available.

Also Available with Timber Slats

1800

533

n O ptions: Arm rests can be provided at any position. Freestanding legs, surface trim plates, and demountable ground sockets are also available.

820 480 Surface Mount Ground Fix

123

n S eating Sections: Seating is also available with Iroko hardwood slats from renewable sources.

n C ustomisation: Engraved motifs can be commissioned for endcaps and arm rests. Plaques may also be required.

FESTIVAL EXETER SEAT

2400

860 450

Festival Exeter Seat

FESTIVAL BACK TO BACK SEAT

820 480

1070 Festival Back to Back Seat Options Length Fixing Method Seat Seat Standard Sub- Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted

n n

Festival Straight Seat with Steel Slats

OLFS101

1800

480

n/a

PC In Any RAL Colour

1800, 2000, 2400 or 3000

Festival Straight Seat with Hardwood Slats

OLFS106

1800

480

n/a

Iroko Hardwood

2000 or 2400

Festival Exeter Seat

OLFS249

2400

450

n/a

210

PC In Any RAL Colour

Festival Back to Back Seat with Steel Slats

OLFS145

1800 x 2 480

n/a

156

PC In Any RAL Colour

2000 or 2400

Festival Back to Back Seat with Hardwood Slats OLFS146

1800 x 2 480

n/a

PC In Any RAL Colour

2000 or 2400

n n

n n n n n

n n n n n n

Add Ons Demountable Surface Leg Ground Trim Diameter Socket Plates (mm)

Arm Rests

n n n n

n n n n n

n n n n

70 70

124

Festival Curved Seat, Cambridge

FESTIVAL CURVED SEAT 2228 535

820 480 1414 180

2970

900R 900R

2228

120º 1885

900 R 2228 1414 900R Options Length Fixing Method Seat Seat Standard Sub- Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted Festival Curved Seat with Steel Slats

1885†/2970†† 480

900

78/103

PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length

3214†/4028†† 480

900

156

PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length

Festival Pedestal Seat with Steel Slats

1600

6500

PC In Any RAL Colour

Inward

†

125

n n

OLFS401

Festival Hockey Stick Seat with Steel Slats OLFS411

Outward

††

OLFS441

480

n n n

n n n n

Add Ons Demountable Surface Leg Ground Trim Diameter Socket Plates (mm)

Arm Rests

n n

n n n

n n

70 or 140 70

Festival Curved Bench, Queen Elizabeth School

FESTIVAL CURVED BENCH 2238

525

450

90º 1414

2985

0R 90

120º 1885

900

61/84

Festival Serpentine Bench with Steel Slats OLFB611

Festival Curved Bench with Steel Slats

3626

450

900

122/168 PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length

Festival Tree Bench

2250

450

2850

188/252 PC In Any RAL Colour 2850 (span)

Inward

†

OLFB601

OLFB621

PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length

n n n

n n n n

Add Ons Demountable Surface Leg Ground Trim Diameter Socket Plates (mm)

Arm Rests

n n n

70 70 70

Outward

††

126

FESTIVAL STRAIGHT BENCH STOCK

525 1800

450 Surface Mount Ground Fix

520

Festival Straight Bench and Flared Top Litter Bin

FESTIVAL TREE SEAT

2850 or 2250

1200 or 1800

450

Festival Tree Seat and Curved Seat

Options Length Fixing Method Seat Seat Standard Sub- Demountable Surface Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall Ground Trim Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted Socket Plates Festival Straight Bench with Steel Slats

127

OLFB501

1500

450

n/a

PC In Any RAL Colour 1800, 2000, 2400 or 3000

Festival Straight Bench with Hardwood Slats OLFB502

1500

450

n/a

Iroko Hardwood

Festival Tree Seat with Steel Slats

2250

480

2850

253/310 PC In Any RAL Colour 2850 (span)

OLFS421

1800, 2000, 2400 or 3000

n n n

n n n n n

n n n

Add Ons Leg Diameter (mm) 70 70 70

Arm Rests

n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT10

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

page 239 page 255 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Delta Festival

n D elta Festival uses the contemporary design of the Festival Range, but mounted on end castings with integral armrests. n Standard seating and bench sizes are 1660mm and 1960mm. n S eats and benches are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then powder coated in a colour of your choice. n S eating sections are available in hot dip galvanised polyester powder coated steel or Iroko hardwood which is from renewable sources.

The Delta Festival Seat is also available with timber slats

Delta Festival Bench with timber slats, Birmingham

DELTA FESTIVAL SEAT

DELTA FESTIVAL BENCH

1960 520

1800

1960

525

1800 820 480

Product Product Description Reference Delta Festival Straight Seat with Steel Slats

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

450

Standard Radius Weight Standard (mm) (kg) Finish

Optional Length (mm)

OLDS101

1800

480

n/a

PC In Any RAL Colour

1500

Delta Festival Straight Seat with Hardwood Slats OLDS102

1800

480

n/a

Iroko Hardwood

1500

Delta Festival Straight Bench with Steel Slats

OLDB501

1800

480

n/a

PC In Any RAL Colour

1500

Delta Festival Straight Bench with Timber Slats

OLDB502

1800

480

n/a

Iroko Hardwood

1500

Surface Mount

n n n n

Fixing Method Sub-Surface Ground Mount Fixed

n n n n

620

Arm Rests

n n n n 128

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT11

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 169 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 256 Signage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 268

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Buffalo

BUFFALO BENCH WITH N SHAPE ENDS

Buffalo Seat, Durham

1960

476

1800

n S trong yet comfortable, Buffalo Seating is manufactured in mild steel, hot dip galvanised and coated in up to two colours of your choice. Slats are steel or Iroko hardwood, the latter from renewable resources.

668 475

n Coordinating litter bins are available.

BUFFALO SEAT

BUFFALO BENCH WITH U SHAPE ENDS

476

1960

1047

476

475 475 1960

Seat Seat Finish Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Hardwood Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Slats

129

Buffalo Seat with Steel Slats

OLBS105

1800

475

PC in Any RAL Colour

Buffalo ‘U’ Bench with Steel Slats

OLBS405

1800

475

PC in Any RAL Colour

Buffalo ‘N’ Bench with Steel Slats

OLBS415

1800

475

PC in Any RAL Colour

n n n

Surface Mount

Options Fixing Method Sub-Surface Ground Mount Fixed

n n n

Arm Rests

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT12

Seats

Q50 225

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Metropolitan

Metropolitan Seat with steel section

METROPOLITAN SEAT WITH WOODEN SLATS

METROPOLITAN SEAT WITH STEEL SECTION

Also available in stainless steel

Product Description

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Standard Supplied Free (mm) Finish Assembled Standing

Metropolitan Seat with Wooden Slats

1800

440

PC Steel/Hardwood

Metropolitan Seat with Steel Section

1800

440

PC Steel

n n

Fixing Method Surface Mount

Ground Fixed

n n 130

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT13

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 224

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Bleasdale

BLEASDALE SEAT

BLEASDALE FACETED BENCH

440

950

670

435

1850 470

2974mm length shown

EDINBURGH SEAT

670

FERGHANA SEAT

950 440

920

670 440

1755

1850 470

470

131

Product Description

Product Reference

Bleasdale Seat

OLES103

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Optional (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm)

Fixing Method Surface SubMount Surface

n n n n

1850

440

PC Any RAL Colour

2270 or 2948

Bleasdale Faceted Bench OLEB431

Any

435

n/a

PC Any RAL Colour

n/a

Edinburgh Seat

OLES313

1755

440

PC Any RAL Colour

2130

Ferghana Seat

OLES503

1850

440

PC Any RAL Colour

2270

n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT14

Seats

Q50 225

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Celebration

CELEBRATION BENCH

CELEBRATION SEAT

2140 or 1650

1200 or 750

440

950

670

440

40 Typ Frame

1715

470

CELEBRATION CHAISE LONGUE

CELEBRATION LOVE SEAT

594

500

1060

1380

950

Product Description

Product Reference

776

440

2080

Seat Span (mm)

440

Seat Height Weight Standard Optional (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm)

Fixing Method Surface SubMount Surface

n n n n

Celebration Bench

OLEB121

1650 (ext dia.)

440

PC Any RAL Colour

2140 (ext dia.)

Celebration Seat

OLWS303/OLES303

1715

485/440

PC White/PC Any RAL Colour

2130

Celebration Chaise Longue Seat

OLES737

2080

440

PC White/PC Any RAL Colour

n/a

Celebration Love Seat

OLES701

1380

440

PC White/PC Any RAL Colour

n/a

n n n n 132

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT15

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating City

n C itynox: The simple design and clean lines of the Citynox seating provide a light and contemporary aesthetic. n Constructed from Grade 304 polished stainless steel. n T he bend of the seating legs forms an integral armrest, guaranteeing maximum solidity and excellent comfort. n T he seat and bench are constructed using a combination of flat and round elements (45mm diameter tube and 8mm diameter welded rods for the legs). n R endezvous City: Features contemporary designs with modern clean lines in steel. City seats and benches offer functionality, solidity and durability with maximum style. n S eats and backrests are constructed from zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel. n L egs are manufactured from either cast iron treated against rust or steel which is zinc plated. Both cast iron and steel legs are polyester powder coated. n A full range of standard RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours are available. n For further details on fixing type, please refer to page 361. Citynox Seat

CITYNOX SEAT

CITYNOX BENCH

1800

Product Product Description Reference

133

Seat Span (mm)

440

590

850

1800

Seat Height Weight Seating Seating Standard Supplied Free (mm) (kg) Section Ends/Frames Finish Assembled Standing

Citynox Seat

130165

1800

440

Stainless Steel

Citynox Bench

130165B

1800

440

Stainless Steel

Surface Mount

Fixing Method Ground Fixing Fixed Type

n n

Number Required

T or DT

RENDEZVOUS CITY CURVED BENCH

1484

438

R1535

R1100

1120

Rendezvous City Seat and Bench

RENDEZVOUS CITY SEAT

RENDEZVOUS CITY BENCH

645

1800

440

1800

790 420

420

Seat Seat Product Product Span Height Weight Seating Seating Standard Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Section Ends/Frames Finish Rendezvous City Seat

13.0200

1800

420

100

Steel

Cast Iron

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Rendezvous City Bench

13.0205

1800

420

Steel

Cast Iron

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

1484

420

Steel

Cast Iron

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Rendezvous City Curved Bench 13.0205C

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixing Fixed Type

n n n

Number Required

T or DT

134

Citadelle Bench

CITADELLE SEAT

CITADELLE BENCH

2000

600 2000

455

740 430

430

135

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Seating Section

Seating Ends/Frames

Standard Finish

Free Standing

Surface Mount

Citadelle Seat

13.0005

2000

430

Steel

Cast Iron

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Citadelle Bench

13.0005B

2000

430

Steel

Cast Iron

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n

Fixing Type

Numbers Required

T or DT

CITY BENCH WALL TOP FIXING

2000

415

102

Orsay Seat

ORSAY SEAT

ORSAY BENCH

2000

655

2000

455

790

430

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Seating Section

Seating Ends/Frames

Standard Finish

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n

n n n

Orsay Seat

13.0172

2000

430

Steel

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Orsay Bench

13.0172B

2000

430

Steel

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

2000

n/a

32.5

Steel

n/a

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

City Bench Wall Top Fixing 13.0162BM

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

136

BERCY SEAT COMPOSITE

2135

635

820 415

Bercy Seat, Bercy Bench and City Litter Bin

BERCY SEAT

BERCY BENCH

635

2135

545

820

575

415

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Seating Section

Seating Ends/Frames

Standard Finish

Free Standing

Surface Mount

Bercy Seat

13.0162

2135

415

Steel

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Bercy Bench

13.0162B

2135

415

Steel

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

2135

415

Treated Hardwood

Steel

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

n n n

Bercy Seat Composite 13.0162CO

137

Fixing Method Ground Fixing Fixed Type

n n n

415

Number Required

T or DT

Beaubourg Bench, Seat and Diamond Point Elliptical Litter Bin

BEAUBOURG SEAT

BEAUBOURG BENCH

615

2135 545

2135

805 420

Product Description

575

408

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n

Beaubourg Seat

10.0160

2135

420

PC Grey 900 Sable

Beaubourg Bench

10.0162

2135

408

PC Grey 900 Sable

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

138

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT16

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Outdoor Living Rooms: Optima

n O ptima uses clean and elegant lines, with only the essentials retained to create an outdoor suite designed to be as uncluttered as possible. Legs are made from steel which is zinc plated and powder coated as standard in Sable Textured Grey 900. Slats are made from hardwood from sustainable sources treated with a solventfree, mahogany-coloured protective finish. A full range of standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available for the legs.

Optima 3 place seat, Manchester

OPTIMA 3 PLACE SEAT

565

OPTIMA 2 PLACE SEAT

565

1812

812

812 450

139

1212

450

OPTIMA CHAIR

OPTIMA BENCH

565

562 565

450

1812

812 450

OPTIMA LOW TABLE

OPTIMA HIGH TABLE

670

1816

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

700

370

660

Standard Finish

Supplied Assembled

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n n n n n

Optima 3Pc Seat

10.3030 EM

1812

450

PC Sable Textured Grey 900

Optima 2Pc Seat

10.3020 EM

1212

450

PC Sable Textured Grey 900

Optima Chair

10.3010 EM

562

450

PC Sable Textured Grey 900

Optima Bench

10.3060 EM

1812

450

PC Sable Textured Grey 900

Optima Low Table

10.3070 EM

670

370

PC Sable Textured Grey 900

Optima High Table

10.3080 EM

1816

700

PC Sable Textured Grey 900

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

T or DT

140

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT16

Seats

Q50 225

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 177

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Outdoor Living Rooms: Garden City

Garden City, Cheshire

GARDEN CITY 3 PLACE SEAT

GARDEN CITY 2 PLACE SEAT

670

1770

670

1220

900

900 420

141

420

GARDEN CITY CHAIR

GARDEN CITY LOUNGER

670

1450

670

900

850

420

300

GARDEN CITY LOW TABLE

GARDEN CITY FOOT STOOL

660

435

500

345

370

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Free Standing

Surface Mount

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

n n n n n n

Garden City 3Pc Seat

12.0230

1770

420

PC Patagonia Green

Garden City 2Pc Seat

12.0220

1220

420

PC Patagonia Green

Garden City Chair

12.0210

670

420

PC Patagonia Green

Garden City Lounger

12.0260

670

300

PC Patagonia Green

Garden City Low Table

12.0240

660

370

PC Patagonia Green

Garden City Foot Stool

12.0250

500

345

PC Patagonia Green

Fixing Type

Numbers Required

T or DT

142

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SEAT17

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page173

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating Urban

Trio Seat, Stainless Steel, Sunderland

n T he Urban range has been designed as a full system for the enhancement of highly urbanised spaces and transport systems. It is composed exclusively of individual seats that can be used independently or as a system. n S eating is available in either steel or stainless steel. Steel furniture is zinc-plated and powder coated to a high quality finish and is available in a range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. Stainless steel furniture is made from high quality 316L grade stainless steel and is shot peened to give a smooth matt finish. n Seats can include end and/or intermediate armrests. n A four or five seat configuration is also available. n Solo seating can be supplied with either a wall or wall top fixing. n Supplied with base plate or ground fixing with a standard root depth of 390mm. n Armrests can be supplied on request.

Trio Seat, Steel Green, Sunderland

143

TRIO SEAT

Also Available in Steel 1700

570

768 472

Solo Seat, Steel Green, Sunderland

DUO SEAT

SOLO SEAT

Also Available in Steel

1100

570

500

570

768

768 472

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

472

Seat Height Weight Standard (mm) (kg) Finish

Trio Seat

12.0183

1700

472

PC Steel/Stainless Steel

Duo Seat

12.0187

1100

472

PC Steel/Stainless Steel

Solo Seat

12.0180

500

472

PC Steel/Stainless Steel

Surface Mount

Fixing Method Ground Wall Fixed Mounted

Arm Rests

n n n

144

n S ineu Graff Mini and Urban ranges are ideal for seating solutions within transport systems such as bus or train stations and can be used in a number of different configurations.

MINI HIGH SEAT

n T he Sineu Graff Mini range comprises Mini Solo, Mini Duo and Mini High seats. Each seat features a unique curved seating section which provides maximum comfort to users. n U rban features Solo and Trio seats which can be used to create effective seating arrangements within your landscape. Urban also features a single and double stand up seat with optional backrests. n B oth Mini and Urban pieces are manufactured from zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel and are available in any RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours.

475

420

870

750

MINI SOLO SEAT

MINI DUO SEAT

475

420 435

545

421

145

1100

465

421

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard Supplied (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled

High Mini Seat

12.0111

420

750

Mini Solo Seat

12.0101

420

421

PC RAL Any Standard or Sable Colour

Mini Duo Seat

12.0102

1020

421

PC RAL Any Standard or Sable Colour

Surface Mount

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

PC RAL Any Standard or Sable Colour

n n

Wall Mounted

URBAN SOLO SEAT

URBAN TRIO SEAT

435

500 435

1700

421 465

421

STAND UP SEAT (SINGLE) WITH BACKREST

STAND UP SEAT (DOUBLE) WITH BACKREST

290

1000

357

905

740

965 740

500 1000 357 357

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Weight Standard (mm) (kg) Finish

Urban Solo

12.0121

500

421

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Urban Trio

12.0123

1700

421

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Stand Up Seat (Single)

12.3101

500

740

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Single Seat Back Rest

12.3001

500

n/a

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Stand Up Seat (Double)

12.3102

1000

740

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Double Seat Back Rest

12.3002

1000

n/a

PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour

Surface Mount

n n n n

Fixing Method Ground Fixed

500

Wall Mounted

n n n

357

n n 146

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT18

Seats Benches

Q50 225 Q50 220

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 184 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 203

Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 305 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 299

Polyurethane Seating Waterside

n F rames are cast from Ferrocast速 polyurethane which is corrosion and abrasion resistant. This makes Ferrocast seating particularly suited to coastal and riverside areas. n S eat and bench slats are made from Wood Fibre Composite (WPC) comprising 50% sawdust from waste wood and 50% recycled polymer. WPC is longer lasting than wood as it resists moisture and chemicals, does not absorb bacteria or funghi and is impervious to pests. WPC is coloured throughout, it does not need paint, sealants or preservatives and its protective finish is resistant to most paints and inks. n T he Waterside range is based around a unique elliptical form to complement the Llanelli post and rail system. This results in a highly contemporary and functional design. The standard range is silver but is available in other colours. The slats are available in silver or black, other colours or timber are available as a special request.

Waterside Bench

WATERSIDE SEAT

875

WATERSIDE BENCH

875 540

875

540 540

2000 2000 2000 2000

147

Parkway Seat

PARKWAY SEAT

2000

635

974 450 1931

Options Seat Seat Optional Slats Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Seat Span Timber Composite Free Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing

n n n/a n

WaterSide Seat

SE3500

2000

540

Black 9017

3000, 4000, 5000 or 6000

WaterSide Bench

BE4000

2000

540

Black 9017

3000, 4000, 5000 or 6000

2000

450

Parkway Seat

Black 9017/Hardwood Seats

n n

Fixing Method Surface Ground Mount Fixed

n n n 148

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT18

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 183 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 203 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 262 page 271 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Seating

Trowbridge Seat, Urban Bench, Flared Top Tree Guard and 581 Series Tree Grille, Trowbridge

TROWBRIDGE SEAT

URBAN BENCH

2000

669 1800

450

810 440

461

Product Product Description Reference

149

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Standard Supplied Free (mm) Finish Assembled Standing

Trowbridge Seat

2000

461

Black 9017

Urban Bench

1800

440

Black 9017

n n

Fixing Method Surface Mount

Ground Fixed

Leicester Seat

n T he Leicester Seat and Bench were specially designed for a project between Marshalls Street Furniture and Leicester City Council in 2001. Our design team worked closely with Leicester City Council to create seating that could be specified in different configurations. The results were a seat and bench manufactured entirely from Ferrocast which had a robust design to cope with the demands of busy city centre life.

n C omponents are then painted with a high gloss paint which chemically bonds itself to the Ferrocast creating a quality finish. In the event of damage to the paint, Ferrocast is pigmented in a matching colour to ensure the overall aesthetic is not dramatically affected.

n S eating is manufactured by casting Ferrocast, an engineering grade polyurethane, around a steel core giving it excellent rigidity and strength.

n Colours: A full range of RAL colours is available.

LEICESTER SEAT

n Fixing: Ground fixing comes as standard.

LEICESTER BENCH

2000

800

460

897

460

300 2000

Product Product Description Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height Standard Supplied Free (mm) Finish Assembled Standing

Leicester Seat

2000

460

Black 9017

Leicester Bench

2000

460

Black 9017

Fixing Method Surface Mount

n n

Ground Fixed

n n 150

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT19

Seats

Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 82 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 225

Timber Seating Victoria

n V ictoria Seating features a classically styled seat and chair that are constructed from sustainably sourced tropical hardwood which is treated with a solvent-free, natural coloured protective treatment. n T he seating sections comprise hardwood slats secured onto seat ends featuring a strengthening crossbar. n A ssembly of the ends and backs utilises bonded mortise and tenon joints with concealed star-shaped rivets. n Supplied fully assembled.

Victoria Seat

VICTORIA SEAT

VICTORIA CHAIR

1805

675

615

675

960

960 440

440 50

Product Description

151

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kgs)

Standard Finish

Supplied Assembled

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n

Victoria Seat

10.0802

1805

440

Treated Hardwood

Victoria Chair

10.0804

615

440

Treated Hardwood

Fixing Method Ground Fixing

n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

P or DE

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT20

Benches

Q50 220

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 82 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 225

Timber Seating Rustic

n T he Rustic range is constructed from solid pressure-sealed, sustainably-sourced softwood, Class 3 (CTB+). n T he wood is treated for protection against the ingress of water, insect and fungus, and has a slight green tinge. n T he Lavande features full length through-bolts with bolt heads concealed by spot facing. n The Romarin features brace mounting over stacked and bonded wood sections. n Solidity of construction is a feature of both products. n Supplied fully assembled.

Romarin Bench, Harbour Reach, Poole

LAVANDE BENCH

romarin bench

2000

400

415

410

Product Description

Product Reference

Seat Span (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kgs)

Standard Finish

Supplied Assembled

Free Standing

Surface Mount

n n

Lavande Bench

11.0401

2000

410

Treated Softwood

Romarin Bench

11.0400

2000

415

Treated Softwood

Fixing Method Ground Fixing

n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

P or DE

152

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT21

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 229

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 261

Recycled Plastic Composite Seating Intruplas

The ideal product from which to manufacture street furniture, created from waste plastic material, recycled plastic composite (RPC) is an excellent alternative to wood, metal and concrete. It can be tailored to suit the application and location of the finished product, contrasting with or blending into the environment as required. RPC is maintenance free, it is non-porous and therefore not subject to rot, algae or fungal growth, as such it is suitable for use in very wet or damp conditions. Also as it is manufactured using an extrusion process, it is free from cracking and splintering, improving safety in public areas. Due to high strength and robust construction, RPC furniture is vandal resistant to physical attack. It has an easy wipe clean surface and paint and marker pen can easily be removed with thinners without damaging the product. RPC furniture has an extended product lifetime. As plastic is less susceptible to degradation over time, the whole life cost of the furniture can be a third of the cost of a traditional solution.

Recycled plastic composite: n Reduces the need for landfill waste or potential pollution from incineration. n R educes CO2 output â&#x20AC;&#x201C; recycled plastic creates less carbon dioxide in manufacture than virgin plastic. Replacing timber also means fewer trees need to be felled and transported. n Can be recycled again at the end of its useful life. n C reates zero waste from the manufacturing process as all off-cuts can be recycled. n D oes not require the use of surface treatments such as paint, preservation products or cleaning materials. n I s made from material from which the official figures state that for every ton of recycled plastic used 1.66 tons of CO2 output is saved.

All products are supplied fully assembled and ready to use.

INTRUPLAS SEAT

153

INTRUPLAS BENCH

Product Length Width Overall Height Overall Width Seat Height Weight Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)

Fixing Method Free Standing

Ground Fixing

n n n n

1.8m Length Deluxe Seat with Backrest

1800

360

900

600

510

105

1.5m Length Standard Seat with Backrest

1500

360

900

600

510

1.8m Length Deluxe Bench

1800

350

480

350

480

60.5

1.5m Length Standard Bench

1500

350

480

350

480

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT21

Benches Seats

Q50 220 Q50 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 229

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 261

Recycled Plastic Composite Picnic Table Intruplas

Recycled Plastic Picnic Tables

n R ecycled plastic composite (RPC) is an ideal material for the manufacture of picnic tables. Totally weather resistant they will not rot or splinter. They do not absorb moisture and can be easily wiped clean, making them ideal for use outdoors all year round.

INTRUPLAS PICNIC TABLE

n The Intruplas RPC Picnic Table is available in 3 lengths: 1m, 1.5m and 1.8m. n P icnic tables with extended tops are also available to enable wheelchair access, or alternatively a seating section can be removed.

Product Description

Table Top Fixing Method Length Width Overall Height Overall Width Seat Height Weight (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Free Standing

1.8m Length Deluxe Picnic Table

1800

650

760

1370

450

133

1.5m Length Standard Picnic Table

1500

520

700

1000

400

130

1.0m Length Junior Picnic Table

1000

520

700

1000

400

n n n 154

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT22

Benches

Q50 220

page 239 page 255 page 268 page 297

Picnic Tables Ollerton

FESTIVAL TABLE

M3 TABLE

1800

700

1800

700

750

Shown with Festival Straight Bench

Shown with M3 Straight Bench

GULLIVER TABLE

LILLIPUT TABLE

1800 700 700

1260 750 1500 720

450

plan view

Product Product Length Width Height Weight Standard Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish M3 Table

OLSB711

1800

700

750

Stainless Steel

Festival Table

OLFB711

1800

700

750

PC in Any RAL Colour

Lilliput Picnic Set

OLFB701

1260

720

600

PC in Any RAL Colour

Gulliver Picnic Set

OLFB702

1800

700

750

170

PC in Any RAL Colour

*NB Tables can be extended to allow for wheelchair access

155

600

350

OPTIONS Fixing Method Free Surface Sub-Surface Standing Mount Mount

n n n n

Ground Fix

n n n n n n

Hardwood Solid Slats Top

Wheel Chair Access

n n n n

n n

n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SEAT23

Benches

Q50 220

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 180

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 225

Picnic Tables Sineu Graff

n P icnic tables are ideal for providing eating areas for almost any public space including parks and schools. Sineu Graff offer both steel and timber solutions in the form of Rendezvous City, Aubade and Champetre.

RENDEZVOUS CITY TABLE

n R endezvous City Table can be combined with the Rendezvous City bench to create a stylish picnic table. It is manufactured from zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel and is available in any RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colour. n A ubade and Champetre Picnic Tables offer a softer, more natural aesthetic making them highly suited from green areas such as parks. Both are manufactured from pressure treated softwood from sustainable sources. 928

1775

718

AUBADE PICNIC TABLE

CHAMPETRE PICNIC TABLE

850

725

410

450

1900

1700

Seat Span/ Product Product Table Length Seat Height Weight Standard Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish

OPTIONS Fixing Method Free Surface Standing Mount

Sub-Surface Mount

Rendezvous City Table

13.0425

1775

718

PC and RAL or Sable Colour

Aubade Picnic Bench

11.0420

2000

410

270

Treated Softwood

Champetre Picnic Bench

11.0421

2000

410

165

Treated Softwood

Champetre Extended Picnic Bench

11.0421H

2000

410

190

Treated Softwood

n n n

Fixing Type

Number Required

P or DE

156

157

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Litter Bins Concrete Litter Bins

159

Monoscape: Boulevard and Strada

160

Bellitalia: Concrete, Polished Concrete and Concrete with Metals

161

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins

165

Ollerton: M3

166

Olerton: Festival

167

Olerton: Buffalo

169

Olerton: Specials

170

Olerton: Cigarette Bins

171

Sineu Graff: Diamond Point

173

Sineu Graff: Contemporary

175

Sineu Graff: City

177

Sineu Graff: Others

178

Timber Litter Bins

179

Sineu Graff: Timber

180

Sineu Graff: Classic

181

Polyurethane Litter Bins

183

Ferrocast®: Heritage and Leicester

183

Ferrocast®: WaterSide

184

Cast Iron Litter bins

185

Imperial: Heritage

185

Plastic Litter bins

186

Heritage

187

Metro

188

Pioneer, Monarch and Consort

189

Twin Bin

190

Octaplus

191

Regent

192

Novelty

193

Envirobank

194

‹ Sineu Graff, Contemporary Litter Bin, Round

158

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Concrete Litter Bins

Bellitalia Citta Square Concrete Litter Bin, Welsh Development Agency

Marshalls Street Furniture offer concrete litter bins that will meet the demands of any project and budget. Monoscape contains simple, functional pieces whilst Bellitalia features design led litter bins that use concrete which is enhanced by metals or a lustrous polished finish. Monoscape Litter Bins comprise Boulevard and Strada. Both are utilitarian in design, making them functional and durable. Each litter bin is manufactured from high quality concrete and is available in exposed and etched finishes. Monoscape Litter Bins can be supplied with polyethylene rain shields and a choice of internal liners. Bellitalia offer a unique range of concrete litter bins. The range comprises concrete litter bins embellished with copper, concrete combined with steel or stainless steel and polished concrete. Each design is unique and offers architects and specifiers a fantastic choice of styles to suit any landscape. Concrete litter bins are manufactured from high quality pozzolanic cement which is vibrated and sandblasted before being coated with a clear acrylic resin. Copper bands are added to increase aesthetic appeal. Some models incorporate a self levelling system which allows them to be placed on various gradients.

159

Polished concrete litter bins are manufactured using a marble aggregate mixed with Portland cement. The product is then mechanically polished before being coated with a protective varnish. This gives the product a smooth, elegant polished finish. Polished concrete litter bins are available in seven fantastic colours. Each litter bin is equipped with a bin liner holder which is incorporated into the rim. Concrete mounted designs with steel and stainless steel consist of a concrete base made from high quality pozzolanic cement and a litter bin which is manufactured from either polyester powder coated steel or AISI 316 grade stainless steel. Post mounted designs consist of a litter bin manufactured from polyester powder coated steel or AISI 316 stainless steel which is mounted to either a nodular cast iron or stainless steel post. Bellitalia Litter Bins come with a range of options including hoods and ashtrays, for full details please refer to individual product pages.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN01

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 207

Concrete Litter Bins Boulevard and Strada

n B oulevard: A simple and durable litter bin which can meet the demands of today’s urban environments. It is available as an open top bin, as shown on the left, or with a rain shield, as shown bottom left. n S trada: A stylish range of concrete street furniture featuring clean lines and simple geometric shapes. n F inish: Available as standard in an exposed silver grey concrete finish but can be supplied in alternative colours and finishes as special order items. For more details on colours please consult the colour swatches for concrete on page 345. Available in brushed and etched standard finishes. n O ptions: Litter bins come with a range of options, please refer to the table below for details. n P olyethylene components for litter bins are available ex stock in yellow and brown with other BS colours to order.

Boulevard Litter Bin

BOULEVARD LITTER BIN

STRADA LITTER BIN

500

500Ø

750 1000

Dimensions Fixing Method Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Surface Open Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Mount Top Boulevard 700 Circular

FP280

1000 x 500Ø 1000

182

Exposed Silver Grey Concrete

Strada

F395

750 x 500Ø 750

165

Exposed Siver Grey Concrete

n n

OPTIONS Rain Shield

Galvanised Steel Liner

n n n

Wire Metal Basket

Polyethylene Liner

n n

n n 160

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items LTBN02

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 90 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 198

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Litter Bins

Concrete, Polished Concrete and Concrete with Metals

n C opper Top and Sorrento Litter Bins feature a self levelling system that allows them to be installed on gradients of up to 5% from horizontal. They are embellished with a copper band. n B ins are manufactured from a precast steel reinforced concrete which is vibrated and sandblasted to give a smooth finish, before finally being coated with a protective clear acrylic resin. n S orrento: Consists of two sections which are clamped together. It also comes with the option of a polyester powder coated hood. In addition the hooded model can also include a 175mm copper ashtray. n C opper Top: Consists of two parts, a cap shaped base and a lower body section. The galvanised steel liner comes with a handle for easy removal. It is finished off with a stylish copper top which is reinforced with 5mm steel sheets complete with locking system. n C itta Square: Incorporates a main body section which is designed to hold a steel liner. It consists of a support base, two half moon shaped columns and a dome lid which is anchored to the assembly using steel brackets and bolts. The base of the lid is surrounded by an attractive copper band. Sorrento Litter Bin, Poole Harbour, Dorset

SORRENTO LITTER BIN WITH HOOD

1115

SORRENTO LITTER BIN

805

625Ø

COPPER TOP LITTER BIN

CITTA SQUARE LITTER BIN 580

1080

1162

625Ø

161

630

560

Product Description

Product Reference

Capacity (L)

H x W x L (mm)

Dimensions HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Sorrento

BIAR45332

805 x 625Ø

717

210

Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band

Sorrento with Hood

BIAR45343

1115 x 625Ø

1115

281

Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band

Copper Top

BIAR45301

1162 x 625Ø

1162

281

Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band

Citta Square

BIAR44003

105

1080 x 630 x 580

1080

335

Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band

n O rione and Pegaso are two exquisitely styled concrete litter bins. Made from high quality cement with marble aggregate, they are polished to a smooth finish and coated with a two-component epoxy resin to give a beautiful polished aesthetic. n B oth bins come equipped with a bin liner holder and the rim features a 40mm brass plate. n T he litter bins are also available with stainless steel covers which tilt to open for easy access. The lid is manufactured from AISI 316 grade stainless steel. n O rione and Pegaso come in seven different colours which can be found in colour swatches on page 346.

Pegaso Litterbin in Rosso, Cheshire

ORIONE TOP LITTER BIN

ORIONE LITTER BIN WITH COVER

815 1051

520Ø

PEGASO LITTER BIN

520Ø

PEGASO LITTER BIN WITH COVER

900 1200

640Ø

Product Description

Product Reference

Capacity (L)

H x W x L (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Orione

BIAL3610

815 x 520Ø

815

242

Polished Concrete

Orione with Cover

BIAL3611

1051 x 520Ø

1051

248

Polished Concrete

Pegaso

BIAL3612

104

900 x 640Ø

900

374

Polished Concrete

Pegaso with Cover

BIAL3613

104

1200 x 640Ø

1200

383

Polished Concrete

640Ø

Dimensions

162

n A rtu is a tasteful cylindrical litter bin which combines concrete with steel or stainless steel. n T he base of Artu is manufactured from steel reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated and sandblasted to give a smooth finish. This is then given a protective clear acrylic resin coating. Artu has a hot dip galvanised liner which is accessed by rotating the hood. n T he hood also features a 175mm copper ashtray which is linked to the main assembly with a chain. n A rtu Stainless Steel has a body, hood, liner and ashtray manufactured from high quality AISI 316 grade stainless steel. n T he steel offering is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is coloured to RAL 7021 Basalt Grey. n A rtu features a patented self levelling system which allows the litter bin to be positioned on slopes of up to 6.5% from horizontal.

Artu Steel/Concrete Litter Bin

ARTU STEEL/CONCRETE LITTER BIN

ARTU STAINLESS STEEL/CONCRETE LITTER BIN

550Ø

1115

163

1115

Product Description

Product Reference

Capacity (L)

Dimensions H x W x L HAG (mm) (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Artu Steel/Concrete

BIAR38648

1115 x 550Ø

1115

112

Clear Acrylic Resin/Powder Coated Steel

Artu Stainless Steel/Concrete

BIAR38645

1115 x 550Ø

1115

112

Clear Acrylic Resin/Stainless Steel

n Merlino is a basket shaped litter bin which is mounted to a nodular cast iron post. n M erlino is simple in design and ideal for providing litter solutions to parks and grassy areas. n T he main body of the steel litter bin is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then powder coated in RAL 7021 Basalt Grey. n T he steel liner is made from 1mm thick, hot dip galvanised steel which is given a copper coloured polyurethane glaze. n T he cast iron mounting post for the steel liner bin is coated with a polyurethane glaze in RAL 7021 Basalt Grey. n T he post features a rounded tang at the base which has two grooves for fixing directly into the ground. n T he stainless steel Merlino Litter Bin consists of a AISI 316 grade basket, the base of which is formed by a 5mm thick hot dip galvanised steel disc. The basket is equipped with two fastening points to facilitate anchoring to the upright. n The liner is made from 1mm thick stainless steel in AISI 316 grade. n The stainless steel supporting post is also AISI 316 grade.

Merlino Post Mounted Stainless Steel Litter Bin

MERLINO POST MOUNTED STEEL LITTER BIN

MERLINO POST MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL LITTER BIN

915

385Ø

915

385Ø

Product Description

Product Reference

Capacity (L)

Dimensions H x W x L HAG (mm) (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Merlino Post Mounted Steel

BIAR38641

1165 x 385Ø

915

15.3

Powder Coated Steel

Merlino Post Mounted Stainless Steel

BIAR38646

1165 x 385Ø

915

15.3

316 Grade Stainless Steel

164

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins

M3 Flared Top Litter Bin with hinged side aperture lid, Durham

Litter bins are an essential piece of street furniture in almost all of todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s landscapes; Marshalls Street Furniture offer a number of designs manufactured from steel and stainless steel. We offer a wide selection of litter bins from both Ollerton and Sineu Graff.

Sineu Graff Litter Bins comprise Diamond Point, Contemporary, City, Tulip and Conical. Diamond Point features a range of steel and stainless steel litter bins with a unique detailing. The range comes in four basic shapes: Elliptical, Oval, Round and Square. A number of options are available which allows you to create the ideal litter bin for your landscape.

Within Ollerton there are four offerings, M3, Festival, Buffalo and Special Litter Bins. M3 is a range of 316L stainless steel litter bins which range in size from 40-110 litres and is available with a number of options. All litter bins are supplied with a stainless steel liner as standard and feature a beautiful brushed satin finish. Festival and Buffalo are ranges of polyester powder coated steel litter bins which are available in a number of styles and sizes. Litter bins can be coated in a colour of your choice and come with a galvanised steel liner as standard. Festival liners may also be powder coated in a colour of your choice. We also offer a range of special litter bins including a dog litter bin and cigarette end collector bollard. Each of these has been designed to provide a solution for specialist waste collection.

165

Contemporary is a range of unique steel and stainless steel litter bins. Two shapes are available, semi circular and circular, and a number of differently placed apertures and emptying methods can be specified. City, Tulip and Conical are polyester powder coated steel litter bins each with their own individual style. All are available with a range of options and can be specified across a whole host of different landscapes. Sineu Graff Litter Bins come with a range of options some of which include antiterrorist options, rain shields and ashtrays. Ollerton and Sineu Graff Litter Bins can be coordinated with other pieces of street furniture from their extensive ranges, giving the architect or specifier a huge amount of choice and allowing them to create inspirational schemes within landscapes.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN03

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 221

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 241 page 254 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins M3

n O llerton M3 Litter Bins have a simple shape and style combined with the attractive aesthetic qualities of stainless steel. n M anufactured from 316L grade stainless steel, M3 Litter Bins require low maintenance and perfectly complement any of the other products within the Ollerton M3 range. n L itter bins are available with a whole host of available options such as a liner lock, lid and also personalisation options such as plaques or signs. n M 3 Litter Bins come with a range of fixing options, please refer to the table for full details. n M arshalls Street Furniture offer replacement liners for this range of litter bins as a separate item.

M3 Flared Top 40 Litre Litter Bin with Serpentine Bench, Chichester

M3 FLAT TOP 40 LITRE

M3 FLARED TOP 40 LITRE

M3 FLARED TOP 85 LITRE

M3 FLARED TOP 110 LITRE

STOCK

610Ø 558Ø

435Ø

345Ø

Fixing Method Demountable Hinged Side Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Surface Ground Wall Ground Loading Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Socket Lid M3 Flat Top 40 Litre

OLSL501

620 x 345Ø 18

Satin Polished

M3 Flared Top 40 Litre OLSL101

650 x 435Ø 20

Satin Polished

M3 Flared Top 85 Litre OLSL104

785 x 558Ø 31

Satin Polished

M3 Flared 110 Litre

OLSL109

110

850 x 610Ø 40

Satin Polished

Replacement Liner

OLSL591

Any

n n n n

n n n n n

850

785

650

620

OPTIONS Side Loading Lid with Stubber Plate Liner and Ashtray Lock

n n n n n n n n

Cigarette End and Can Collector with Lid

n n n n n n

Ashtray Adaption

Litter Sign

Plaques

n n n n

166

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN04

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 52 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 221

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 239 page 255 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Festival

n F estival Litter Bins are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is polyester powder coated in a colour of your choice. n T here are a number of designs available which include flared, rolled or flat top litter bins. n L itter bins come with a galvanised steel liner and can be supplied with or without a liner lock. Galvanised liners can also be polyester powder coated in a colour of your choice. n Replacement liners are also available. n We also offer 90 and 40 litre bins with hardwood timber slats. n F estival Litter Bins come with an array of options, please refer to the tables for full details.

Ollerton Festival Flared Top Litter Bin without Lid

FESTIVAL FLAT TOP 40 LITRE

FESTIVAL FLAT TOP 90 LITRE

FESTIVAL FLARED TOP 40 LITRE

FESTIVAL FLARED TOP 90 LITRE STOCK

495Ø

345Ø

Festival Flat Top 40 Litre

OLFL501

620 x 345Ø 18

PC Any RAL Colour

OLFL506

650 x 495Ø 23

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Flared Top 40 Litre

OLFL101

650 x 435Ø 20

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Flared Top 90 Litre

OLFL106

650 x 580Ø 25

PC Any RAL Colour

Replacement Liner

OLFL951

Any

n n n n

n n n n n

650

Fixing Method Dimensions Demountable Hinged Side Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Surface Ground Wall Ground Loading Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Socket Lid

167

580Ø

435Ø

620

Festival Flat Top 90 Litre

STOCK

OPTIONS Side Loading Lid with Stubber Plate Liner and Ashtray Lock

n n n n n n n n

Cigarette End and Can Collector with Lid

n n n n n

Ashtray Adaption

Litter Sign

Plaques

n n n n

Festival Flared Top Litter Bin with Side Loading Lockable Lid and Festival Curved Seat

FESTIVAL FLARED TOP 110 LITRE

FESTIVAL ROLLED TOP 40 LITRE

FESTIVAL ROLLED TOP 90 LITRE

FESTIVAL TIMBER SLATTED 40 LITRE

FESTIVAL TIMBER SLATTED 90 LITRE

610Ø 505Ø

650Ø

392Ø 542Ø

850 620

620

573

OPTIONS Fixing Method Dimensions Demountable Hinged Side Side Loading Lid Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Surface Ground Wall Ground Loading with Stubber Plate Liner Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Socket Lid and Ashtray Lock Festival Flared Top 110 Litre

OLFL109

110

850 x 610Ø 40

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Rolled Top 40 Litre

OLFL301

620 x 505Ø 22

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Rolled Top 90 Litre

OLFL306

620 x 650Ø 27

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Timber Slatted 40 Litre OLFL502

573 x 392Ø 16

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Timber Slatted 90 Litre OLFL507

573 x 542Ø 21

PC Any RAL Colour

Replacement Liner

Any

OLFL951

n n n n n

n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n

573

Cigarette End and Can Collector with Lid

n n n n n n n

Ashtray Adaption

Litter Sign

Plaques

n n n n n

168

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN06

Litter Bins Q50 240

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 129 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 256 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 268

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Buffalo

n O llerton Buffalo is a post mounted cast aluminium litter bin. Bins can be coated in up to two colours of your choice. This makes them ideal for children’s play areas and parks. n B uffalo comes in two basic shapes, flat or hemispherical base with side loading lockable door for easy access. n I n addition the litter bins come with a range of options including replacement galvanised steel liners. For a full range of options please refer to the table below. n Buffalo Litter Bins are available with surface, sub surface, ground and wall fixing.

BUFFALO 120 LITRE TRIPLE BIN FOR WASTE SEGREGATION

1020

380Ø 76Ø

Buffalo 40 Litre Bin with Hemispherical Base

BUFFALO 40 LITRE

BUFFALO 40 LITRE FLAT BASE

BUFFALO 80 LITRE DOUBLE FLAT BASE

400Ø

1020

1100

380Ø

76Ø

Options Fixing Method Dimensions Demountable Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Surface Sub- Ground Wall Ground Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Surface Socket

169

Buffalo 40 Litre Hemispherical Base

OLBL101

1100 x 400Ø

PC Any RAL Colour

Buffalo 40 Litre Flat Base

OLBL401

1020 x 380Ø

PC Any RAL Colour

Buffalo 80 Litre Double Flat Base

OLBL421

1020 x 380Ø (2 in Total) 55

PC Any RAL Colour

Buffalo 120 Litre Triple Bin For Waste Integration

OLBL431

120

1020 x 380Ø (3 in Total) 75

PC Any RAL Colour

Replacement Liner

OLBL951

Any

n n n n

n n n n n n n

Cone Lid

Stubber Plate

n n n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN06

Litter Bins Q50 240

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Specials

DOG WASTE BIN, TOP LOADING

1020

380Ø

Dog Waste Bin, Top Loading

CENTRAL PATTERN: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL

CENTRAL STRIPE: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL

400

830

170

Product Product Capacity Description Reference (L)

OPTIONS Litter Bin Fixing Method Dimensions Stainless (H x W x L) Weight Standard Surface Sub Ground Wall Root Steel (mm) (kg) Finish Surface Lid

Dog Waste Litter Bin

OLDL101

1020x380Ø

Any RAL Colour

Central Pattern Steel

MSCST31

830x400Ø

Any RAL Colour

Central Pattern Stainless Steel

MSCSS31

830x400Ø

Stainless Steel

Central Stripe Steel

MSCST32

830x400Ø

Any RAL Colour

Central Stripe Stainless Steel

MSCSS32

830x400Ø

Stainless Steel

n n n n n

Twin Side Filling

Triple Side Filling

170

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN07

Litter Bins Q50 240

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Cigarette Bins

n W all Mount Cigarette Bin: Ideal for doorways outside shops, restaurants and bars. A unique design incorporating a stubber plate, a double box which reduces internal oxygen levels to ensure cigarettes are fully extinguished and an easy to empty slide out collection unit. It is available in two sizes, original and mini. The unit is mounted to the wall using back mounting plates. The collection box is secured using a key operated security slam lock.

STAND MOUNT CIGARETTE BIN

n W all Mount Mini Cigarette Bin: Smaller than the standard Wall Mounted Cigarette Bin the Mini Bin is the ideal specification for areas where space is at a premium. n S tand Mount Cigarette Bin: Designed for glass fronted buildings where wall mounting in not possible. It can be positioned in the optimum location and consists of a wall mounted litter bin, base and stand.

1400mm

n L antern Bin: Similar to the wall mounted litter bin in functionality, but features a triangular shaped lid which adds a unique aesthetic and ensures that litter can not be placed on top of it. Lantern Bin also features the unique double box which ensures that cigarettes are extinguished. Both wall and pole fixing methods are available. n T ower Bin: A stylish and functional freestanding cigarette litter bin. It features a uniquely profiled pyramid top and lockable double box which ensures that cigarettes are fully extinguished. It also comes with the option of alternate top, hooded and flat top designs are available. The bin can be left freestanding or be bolted into the ground. n C igarette and Litter Bin: Highly functional allowing for effective disposal of both general litter and cigarettes. It consists of a general litter bin, pyramid top with stubber plate, a cigarette butt collection box which ensures that cigarettes are extinguished and a galvanised steel liner. The litter bin is also lockable and can be bolted to the ground for added security. n E ach of the litter bins are available in either 304 grade steel or zinc plated and epoxy/polyester powder coated steel in a black textured colour.

245mm

WALL MOUNT CIGARETTE BIN

WALL MOUNT MINI CIGARETTE BIN

445mm

245mm

370mm

200mm

70mm

171

70mm

300mm

LANTERN BIN

145mm

Cigarette and Litter Bin

TOWER BIN

CIGARETTE AND LITTER BIN

800mm

1130mm

Flat Top

Hooded Top

Pyramid Top shown

200mm

385mm

Dimensions Product (H x W x L) Standard Description (mm) Finish

Wall Mounted

Wall Mount Cigarette Bin

445 x 245 x 70

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Wall Mount Mini Cigarette Bin

370 x 200 x 70

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Stand Mount Cigarette Bin

1400 x 245 x 70

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Lantern Cigarette Bin (large)

400 x 190 x 95

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Lantern Cigarette Bin (large)

400 x 145 x 70

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Lantern Cigarette Bin (large)

300 x 145 x 70

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Tower Cigarette Bin with Pyramid Top

800 x 200 x 200

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Tower Cigarette Bin with Hooded Top

850 x 200 x 200

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Tower Cigarette Bin with Flat Top Top

690 x 200 x 200

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Cigarette & Litter Bin

1130 x 385 x 385

Stainless Steel or Black Textured

Fixing Method

n n n

Post Mounted

n n n

172

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN08

Litter Bins Q50 240

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243

Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Diamond Point

n T he Diamond Point range incorporates a uniquely profiled body with frame and is available in grade 316L marine grade stainless steel or in zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel. The raised pattern not only provides a unique aesthetic but also prevents flyposting. n W here the bin is stainless steel the main body is electropolished whilst the frame is shot peened; for the steel litter bin the frame and body can be supplied in two different colours. n S teel litter bins have galvanised steel liners whilst stainless steel litter bins are supplied with stainless steel liners. Some Diamond Point steel models have the option of a stainless steel liner. Please refer to the table for full details. n T he Diamond Point round litter bins are supplied with a concrete mounting block when specified with surface or ground fixing. n A ll options for the litter bins are shown below, simply pick the litter bin you require and then select any of the available options. Litter bins can be specified without rain shields. n W here two capacities are shown in the table for the same model, the larger number indicates capacity if chosen with a plastic bin liner holder. n N B. Dimensions and weights shown are for base models only. Products with options added to them will differ in size, weight and capacity. Please contact our Sales Office if you require more detailed information. Diamond Point Round and Expression Seat

DIAMOND POINT ROUND: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL

DIAMOND POINT RECTANGULAR: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL

350

600 920

320 660 340

420

258 Plastic Bin Liner Holder

173

Plastic Bin Liner Holder

DIAMOND POINT SQUARE 490Ø

1067

Plastic Bin Liner Holder

Diamond Point Elliptical with Rainshield in Stainless Steel, Sunderland

DIAMOND POINT ELLIPTICAL: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL

DIAMOND POINT OVAL: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL

520 102

480 900 1155 361

207 500 450

268 Plastic Bin Liner Holder

Ashtray Option

Plastic Bin Liner Holder

Ashtray Option

Shown with rainshield option Options Fixing Method Dimensions Bin Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder Diamond Point Round Small

20.0511#

40/46

740 x 350Ø

740

Steel or Stainless Steel

Diamond Point Round Medium

20.0513#

55/60

820 x 350Ø

820

Steel or Stainless Steel

Diamond Point Round Large

20.0515#

75/80

770 x 420Ø

770

Steel or Stainless Steel

Diamond Point Rectangular Small with Support Post

20.0500S#

35/42

600 x 210 x 420

920

Steel or S/Steel***

Diamond Point Rectangular Medium with Support Post 20.0502S#

40/50

700 x 210 x 420

920

PC Steel

Diamond Point Square with Covered Aperture

20.0549

100

490 x 490 x 1000 1067

Diamond Point Elliptical Small

20.0523

38/42

480 x 270 x 520

730

Diamond Point Elliptical Medium

20.0527

46/50

580 x 270 x 520

830

Diamond Point Elliptical Large

830 x 270 x 520

1080

Diamond Point Oval

100/120 900 x 410 x 500

900

20.0590

n n n

n* n PC Steel n Steel or Stainless Steel n n Steel or Stainless Steel n n PC Steel n n Steel or Stainless Steel n

n n n n n n n AS n n AS n n n n AS n n n n AS n n n AS n n n** n

Stainless Steel Liner

AS = As Standard * Wall mounting only available for steel model **Ashtray only available for ss model with ss liner ***S/steel only available for model with support post # For stainless steel model please add suffix INX.

174

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN09

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 281 Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Contemporary

n T he Contemporary range incorporates a smooth steel body with laser cut stripes which is zinc plated and polyester powder coated. n A ll options for the litter bins are shown below, simply pick the litter bin you require and then select any of the available options. n W here two capacities are shown in the table for the same model, the larger number indicates capacity if chosen with a plastic bin liner holder. n N B. Dimensions and weights shown are for base models only. Products with options added to them will differ in size, weight and capacity. Please contact our Sales Office if you require more detailed information.

Contemporary Round Litter Bin with Expression Seat

CONTEMPORARY ROUND APERTURE IN TOP/EMPTY VIA TOP

780

CONTEMPORARY ROUND APERTURE IN TOP/EMPTY VIA FRONT

420Ø

880 500Ø

Ashtray Option

STOCK

Ex stock in stainless steel

175

Anti-Terrorist Option n T he Contemporary Litter Bin can also be supplied without the galvanised liner, featuring instead an integrated holder for transparent bin liners, and an internal platform to support the bottom of the bags and to keep their contents visible. n T he body of the litter bin is manufactured from 3mm steel with a lid in 5mm steel. n C apacities available are 40 litre and 60 litre in round shaped and 45 litre in semi-circular.

Contemporary Litter Bin Semi Circular

CONTEMPORARY SEMI CIRCULAR

CONTEMPORARY ROUND APERTURE IN FRONT/EMPTY VIA TOP

380Ø

732 778

360

500

Ashtray as Standard

Options Fixing Method Additional Items Dimensions Bin Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder

Stainless Steel Liner

Anti Terrorist

Contemporary Round Small, Aperture in Top (Empty Via Top)

20.0721

45/40

730 x 430Ø

730

Steel or Stainless Steel

Contemporary Round Large, Aperture in Top (Empty Via Top)

20.0725

70/60

780 x 500Ø

780

Steel or Stainless Steel

Contemporary Round, 20.0725PFR 70 Aperture in Top (Empty From Front)

880 x 420Ø

880

PC Steel

Contemporary Semi Circular, Aperture in Top (Empty Via Top)

778 x 360 x 500 780

Steel or Stainless Steel

730 x 500Ø

PC Steel

20.0723

50/45

Contemporary Round, 20.0721OFR 40 Aperture in Front (Empty Via Top)

730

AS = As Standard

176

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN10

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243 Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins City

n T he City Range comprises circular and square litter bins. The main body of the litter bins is constructed from steel rods welded to flat steel bars and a cover and base. n T hese are zinc plated and polyester powder coated. The cover and base can be supplied in a different colour to the body. A full range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours is available. n T he galvanised steel liner is accessed through an 8mm triangular key operated lock system, either from the top or front depending on the model. n W here City Confort Round and Square models are specified with surface or ground fixing, a concrete mounting block is supplied as standard. n A ll options for the litter bins are shown below, simply pick the litter bin you require and then select any of the available options. n W here two capacities are shown in the table for the same model, the larger number indicates capacity if chosen with a plastic bin liner holder. n D imensions shown in the tables are for base models only. For more information on selecting a litter bin to meet your needs please contact our Sales Office. City Confort Round Litter Bin

CITY CONFORT SQUARE

CITY CONFORT ROUND

GARDEN CITY

510Ø

710

760

394

830

420Ø

21.056M

364 x 364 x 600 630

PC Steel

City Confort Square Large

21.0563M

394 x 394 x 680 710

PC Steel

City Confort Round

21.0569M

760 x 420Ø

760

PC Steel

Garden City

21.0200

50/60

830 x 510Ø

830

PC Steel

AS = As Standard

177

n n n n

n n n n n

Stainless Steel Liner AS AS AS AS

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN11

Litter Bins Q50 240

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243 Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins Others

n T he Tulip Litter Bin is made from 12 flat steel slats welded onto a top ring. The litter bin is zinc plated and polyester powder coated after manufacture. n W here Tulip is specified with surface or ground fixing, it is supplied with a concrete mounting block. n T ulip is supplied as standard with a zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel liner. n B oth body and liner of Tulip can be supplied in a range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. n The Campus 4 Litter Bin is made from a steel structure and vertical aluminium profiles for the body. All parts are polyester powder coated.

Tulip Litter Bin

TULIP

CAMPUS 4

CONICAL

578Ø

490Ø

830 820

850

490

20.0600

50/55

850 x 580Ø

850

PC Steel

Campus 4

J298107B

830 x 490Ø

830

PC Steel/Aluminium

Conical

20.0911

820 x 490Ø

820

n n

PC Steel

Stainless Steel Liner

n n n n AS

Anti Terrorist

178

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Timber Litter Bins

Classic Elliptical Litter Bin with Rainshield

Timber Litter Bins offer the designer an alternative, more natural look for their landscape. Our range of Sineu Graff Timber Litter Bins are unique in design and coordinate with seating allowing architects and specifiers to create truly inspirational schemes within todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s urban landscapes. A range of shapes, styles and sizes are available along with a whole host of options which allow you to select a litter bin which will suit the needs of your project. n R endezvous: A uniquely styled litter bin which can be combined with coordinating Rendezvous Seating to create a contemporary aesthetic within your landscape. It is manufactured from treated hardwood which is set around a steel frame. The hardwood is covered with a natural shade varnish which is applied using an electrostatic process. Where Rendezvous is specified with surface mounting or ground fixing, a concrete mounting block is supplied as standard. n M etropolis: Litter bin can also be combined with coordinating Metropolis seating to create a complete scheme within landscapes. Metropolis is manufactured from treated hardwood slats which are set around a zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel frame. Hardwood elements are treated in the same way as those used for Rendezvous. n C onical: A slim line litter bin with a small footprint. Straight wooden slats combined with a curved top make this a striking addition to any landscape. It comprises treated hardwood and zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel. n R endezvous, Metropolis and Conical are all supplied with a stainless steel liner as standard, which is secured using an automatic locking system. This can be operated by using an 8mm triangular key. 179

n R ustic: A robust litter bin which has been designed to complement green surroundings. It forms part of Sineu Graffâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s rustic range and fully coordinates with the Romarin bench. Rustic is manufactured from 40mm thick treated softwood which has a slight green tint. The softwood is set around a galvanised steel frame. The lid is manufactured from zinc plated and polyester powder coated 3mm thick sheet steel cover and is supplied in RAL traffic black 9017 with a red handle. It is equipped with a plastic bin liner holder as standard. n A full range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours is available across the range of litter bins. Please contact our Sales Office for more details.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN12

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 82

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 105

Timber Litter Bins Timber

RENDEZVOUS

METROPOLIS

820

780

490Ø

450Ø

CONICAL

RUSTIC

490Ø

1000 820

450

Options Fixing Method Dimensions Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Rendezvous

20.0800

490Ø x 820

820

Hardwood/PC Steel

450Ø x 780

780

Hardwood/PC Steel

Metropolis Medium J298 105B 60

520Ø x 830

830

Hardwood/PC Steel

Conical

20.0901

490Ø x 820

820

Hardwood or PC Steel

Rustic

23.0581

120

1000 x 450 x 450 1000

Softwood or PC Steel

Metropolis Small

n n n n n

Bin Liner Holder

Galvanised Stainless Steel Steel Liner Liner

n n n n n n n AS

AS = As Standard

180

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN13

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 82

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 105

Timber Litter Bins Classic

Classic Elliptical with Rainshield and Rendezvous Seat

n C lassic Litter Bins offer a more natural aesthetic for your landscape. They are manufactured from treated hardwood which is set around a steel frame.

CLASSIC ELLIPTICAL WITH RAINSHIELD

n T he steel is zinc plated before being finished with polyester powder coating and the hardwood section is treated with a natural shade varnish which is applied using an electrostatic process. 560

930

n S upplied with a galvanised steel liner as standard which is secured by an automatic locking system. This can be operated using an 8mm triangular key. n L itter bins come with a range of options, which are detailed in the table below. Litter bins can be specified without rainshields.

300

563

n W here round and square litter bins are specified with surface mount or ground fixing, a concrete mounting block is supplied as standard.

Ashtray Option

n W here two capacities are shown in the table for the same model, the larger number indicates capacity if chosen with a plastic bin liner holder. n A full range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available. n N B. Dimensions and weights shown are for base models only. Products with options added to them will differ in size, weight and capacity. Please contact our Sales Office if you require more detailed information.

Shown with rainshield option

20.0553

39/44

560 x 300 x 563

930

Hardwood/PC Steel

Classic Elliptical Medium 20.0557

44/50

660 x 300 x 563

1010

Hardwood/PC Steel

AS = As Standard

181

n n

AS AS

n n

Bin Liner Holder

Galvanised Stainless Steel Steel Liner Liner

n n

CLASSIC ROUND

420Ø

912

258

Round Timber Litter Bin

CLASSIC SQUARE

710

392

Square Litter Bin with Roseraie Square Planter Fixing Method Dimensions Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Classic Round Small

20.0567

48/53

810 x 420Ø

810

Hardwood/PC Steel

Classic Round Medium

20.0569

58/64

810 x 420Ø

912

Hardwood/PC Steel

Classic Square Small

20.0561

42/46

630 x 360 x 360

630

Hardwood/PC Steel

Classic Square Medium

20.0563

59/65

710 x 392 x 392

710

Hardwood/PC Steel

n n n n

Options

Open Top

Rain Ashtray Shield

n n n n

Bin Galvanised Stainless Liner Steel Steel Holder Liner Liner

n n n n

n n n n 182

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN14

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 203 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 262 page 271 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Litter Bins Heritage and Leicester

n T he Heritage Litter Bin offers a traditional aesthetic to fit in with Victorian style landscapes. n M anufactured from Ferrocast®, Heritage Litter Bins will not rust or corrode and are resistant to saline and uric acid. n H eritage can be specified with or without a lid; lidded bins have a unique swivel top opening mechanism. Litter bins within the Heritage range are supplied with galvanised steel liner, liner lock and contrasting colour lettering as standard. n C oats of arms, city crests and company logos can easily be incorporated on request. n We also offer an ashtray option for the Heritage Litter Bin on request. n T he Leicester Bin has been designed to have the apperance of a slatted litter bin and to coordinate with Ferrocast Leicester Seating.

Heritage Litter Bin with lid

HERITAGE LITTER BIN

LEICESTER LITTER BIN 443Ø

429Ø

670

800

Available with or without swivel top lid

183

Product Capacity Description (L)

Dimensions H x W x L (mm)

Standard Finish

Heritage

800 x 443Ø

PC Black with Gold Lettering

Heritage with Lid

1010 x 443Ø

PC Black with Gold Lettering

Leicester

670 x 429Ø

PC Black

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN15

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 147

Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 299

Polyurethane Litter Bins WaterSide

n C ontemporary and elegant, the WaterSide Litter Bin is both stylish and functional. Its clean, simple lines complement any landscape, whether traditional or modern. Designed around a unique elliptical form, the oval shape provides a smaller footprint helping to maximise pedestrianised areas. n D esigned to hold large capacities the bins also feature large apertures to accommodate bulky waste items easily. n T he standard bin is available with a 100 litre or 120 litre capacity and the choice of single or double aperture is also available. The large bin has a capacity of 400 litre and comes with double aperture as standard. n T he WaterSide Bin features either single or twin lockable, front opening, hinged doors for litter removal. n The standard colour is silver, other colours are available on request. n The litter bin is free standing with above ground fixing. WaterSide Large Litter Bin with Double Aperture

WATERSIDE STANDARD

WATERSIDE LARGE 850

1350

1000

1357 Also Available as Dog Litter Bin

CAPACITY (L) Product 100 120 400 Description

n n WaterSide Large n WaterSide Standard

WaterSide Dog Litter Bin

n n

OPTIONS Dimensions H x W x L (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Single Aperture

Double Aperture

1000 x 850 x 400

165

Silver

1000 x 850 x 400

165

Silver

n n

1357 x 1350 x 550

395

Silver

n n n 184

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN16

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 41 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 104 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 231

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 236 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 269

Cast Iron Litter Bins Heritage

Heritage Litter Bin and MSF502 Heritage Seat

n H eritage is a tough and sturdy offering. Similar to the Ferrocast® Heritage Litter Bin, our ductile cast iron version has a traditional Victorian aesthetic.

HERITAGE LITTER BIN

n H eritage is available with an 85 litre capacity making it a practical solution for waste collection. n H eritage is primed with a 100% phosphate primer before being finished in black gloss paint. The lettering is then highlighted with gold paint. Other RAL colours are available on request. 950

n T he litter bin comes with a range of options; these include open top and galvanised metal bin liner.

415Ø

Options Fixing Method Dimensions Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Surface Ground Open Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Heritage Litter Bin

185

MSF5501

950 x 415Ø

950

Painted Black Gloss 9017 with Gold Highlights

Galvanised Lidded Top

Steel Liner

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Plastic Litter Bins

Envirobank Recycling Litter Bin

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of plastic litter bins which come in a variety of designs to suit almost any landscape. Styles range from traditional to contemporary and give the designer a multitude of options for litter solutions. Each litter bin is manufactured to the highest standard from medium density moulded polyethylene (MDPE). MDPE will not rust or corrode and can be cleaned easily, this makes it ideal for use as a litter bin material. Furthermore plastic requires no maintenance, adding to your cost savings over the lifetime of the product. MDPE is also environmentally friendly and is 100% recyclable. Plastic Litter Bins are economically priced and highly functional. Boasting large capacities and coming with a range of useful options, our plastic litter bins should always be considered for a spectrum of projects.

Recycling has become common place in many parts of the UK with more areas taking part in regular recycling schemes. Marshalls offer a range of recycling litter bins which make recycling quick and simple. Envirobank Litter Bins not only promote recycling but also help keep areas clean and tidy. Litter bins can be made from recyled material on request. Litter bins can be used alongside our plastic range of bollards to help create a fully coordinating scheme within any landscape. A full range of colours are available dependent on model. For colour swatches please refer to page 354.

Litter Bins can be customised with personalised labels which include logos, emblems or crests. 186

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN17

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Heritage

n H eritage Litter Bins have a classic style which is combined with excellent functionality. n M anufactured from MDPE and equipped with a 100 litre galvanised liner. We also offer an optional plastic moulded liner if required. n S upplied in black and enhanced with gold banding, they can be combined with our range of coordinating plastic Heritage Bollards. n A ground fixing kit is available on all the versions which will eliminate any aggravation associated with extra parts during installation. n R ound and open top versions have an integral ballast cartridge. The square model has a unique double skin construction which gives it greater strength ensuring a long life. n T he litter aperture is moulded through and has an integral chute which ensures no waste is trapped between the liner and the inside of the bin body. n L itter bins are supplied with vandal resistant locks to ensure the security of the liner. Stubber plates may also be specified on round hooded and square hooded models. n H eritage Litter Bins are available in a range of Heritage colours. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches.

Heritage Square Hooded Litter Bin

HERITAGE ROUND HOODED

HERITAGE ROUND OPEN TOP

HERITAGE SQUARE HOODED 553mm

570Ømm

1071mm

840mm

1071mm

642Ømm

Options Fixing Method Dimensions Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Free Wall Anchor Ground Ballast Stubber Ashtray Plastic Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Plate Cartridge Plate Liner Heritage Round Hooded with Galvanised Liner LPHBRH100 100

1071 x 570Ø

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage Round Open Top with Galvanised Liner LPHBOT100 100

840 x 642Ø

Any Heritage Colour

Heritage Square Hooded with Galvanised Liner LPHBSH100 100

1071 x 553 x 553 29

Any Heritage Colour

AS = As Standard

187

n n n

AS AS

Refuse Sack Holder

n n n

Gold Bands AS AS AS

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN18

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Metro

n T he Metro range offers contemporary styling, increased strength through double skin features and excellent functionality. The sleek design boasts a compact 470mm footprint that will fit into most restricted space locations. n T he litter bin has a moulded through litter aperture which ensures waste does not get trapped between the liner and litter bin wall. n T he range has a capacity of 85 to 120 litres depending on which type of liner is used. Two galvanised steel liners are available; 85 and 100 litres. To achieve the maximum capacity a plastic refuse sack can be used. n M etro Litter Bins also include an integral 18” plastic refuse sack retaining rim and ballast cartridge. n Litter bins come with a polished finish to accept personalisation graphics. n S ome options include an innovative easy empty ashtray and stubber plate. For a full range of available options please refer to the table at the bottom of the page. n M etro Litter Bins are available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches. n All litter bins are manufactured from MDPE.

Metro Hooded Litter Bin

METRO ROUND HOODED

METRO OPEN TOP

METRO FLIP TOP

547Ø

522Ømm

859mm

832mm

1082mm

522Ø

LPMBRH085 85 to 125 1082 x 547Ø 17

Any Standard Colour

Metro Open Top with Galvanised Liner

LPMBOT085 85 to 125 832 x 522Ø

Any Standard Colour

Metro Flip Top with Galvanised Liner

LPMBFT085 85 to 125 859 x 522Ø

Any Standard Colour

n n n

AS AS

n n n

Refuse Sack Holder

Gold Bands

AS AS AS

AS = As Standard

188

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN19

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Pioneer, Monarch and Consort

n P ioneer: A modern styled litter bin with a generous capacity, it has a double skin for extra strength and also opens from the front for added functionality. n P ioneer has a hidden slam locking system for added security and ease of emptying. In addition, the litter bin has a four point locking system. The exterior has a dimpled finish to increase resistance to fly posting. Pioneer also comes with a stubber plate as standard and is available in any Modern colour. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches. n C onsort: A stylish hooded litter bin which comes in a range of vibrant colours. It has a generous 100 litre capacity making it ideal for community or commercial applications. The body unlocks at the base for emptying and comes with integral base plate. A stubber plate can be added as an optional item. Consort is available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches. n M onarch: A simple but highly functional litter bin. It comes with a drop in liner which means there is no need to disassemble the bin to remove the waste. It is available as a free standing bin or as the Super Monarch with the addition of a ribbed ballast retaining plinth. Various options are available, please refer to the table for full details. Monarch is available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches. n All three litter bins are made from MDPE. Consort Litter Bin

PIONEER

CONSORT 680Ømm

MONARCH 500Ømm

1075mm

810mm

1170mm

560Ømm

1170 x 680Ø 27

Any Modern Colour

Consort with Galvanised Liner

LPCBHO100 100

810 x 500Ø

Any Standard Colour

Monarch Bin with Galvanised Liner

LPMBBP085 85

1075 x 560Ø 20

AS = As Standard

189

Any Standard Colour

Pioneer with Galvanised Liner

Refuse Sack Holder

AS n n n n n AS

Gold Bands

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN20

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Twin Bin

n T he Twin Bin offers a generous 170 litre capacity and contains two 85 litre steel liners. n The space saving design is ideal for heavily pedestrianised areas. n V ersatile, the Twin Bin features two apertures which can be used for litter collection or adapted with colour coded aperture options and WRAP compliant graphics for recycling. n A n easy to operate front opening design means that the liner can be removed without lifting it out of the bin. n Dimpled exterior increases the resistance to flyposting. n A hidden and innovative slam locking system provides added security. n Optional rat bait box facility. n Available in a full range of colours from the Modern colour range.

Twin Bin

TWIN BIN 515mm

1052mm

1161mm

No insert: general litter

Slot insert: newspapers & magazines

Hole insert: plastic bottles & aluminium cans

Options Fixing Method Dimensions Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Anchor Ground Stubber Ashtray Description (L) (mm) (kg) Plate Plate Twin Bin Litter Bin

2 x 85

1161 x 1052 x 515

Twin Bin Litter/Recycling Bin

2 x 85

1161 x 1052 x 515

Twin Bin Recycling Bin

2 x 85

1161 x 1052 x 515

n n n

AS AS AS

n n n

Steel Liner

Gold Bands

n n n

AS = As Standard

190

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN21

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Octaplus

Octaplus Midi, Maxi and Jumbo Litter Bins

n Octaplus is a hard wearing litter bin with excellent functionality.

OCTAPLUS

n Available in three sizes, the Octaplus has the advantage of multiple waste apertures.

445Ømm

n A galvanised steel liner is supplied as standard. Additional options include an anchor plate and a ballast cartridge.

950mm

n Supplied with an anti-vandal lock. n L itter bins are available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches. n Manufactured from MDPE. 130L and 150L sizes are detailed in table below

Options Fixing Method Add Ons Dimensions Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Free Wall Anchor Ground Ballast Stubber Ashtray Plastic Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Plate Cartridge Plate Liner Octaplus Midi with Galvanised Liner

LPOBMI070 70

950 x 445Ø

Any Standard Colour

Octaplus Maxi with Galvanised Liner

LPOBMA130 130

1025 x 575Ø 14

Any Standard Colour

Octaplus Jumbo with Galvanised Liner

LPOBJM150 150

1025 x 570Ø 16

Any Standard Colour

AS = As Standard

191

n n n

n n

Refuse Sack Holder

Gold Bands

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN22

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Regent

n T he Regent range of litter bins features open and hooded top models which can be wall or post mounted. Available in a range of sizes they are ideal for waste collection in public areas. n W ithin the range is a 30 litre dog litter bin which can be used in areas where dog fouling can be prevalent. The dog litter bin is available in red only and comes with a hinged lid. n T he 50 litre hooded version comes in black with a tidyman logo in gold as standard. The hood has an integral stubber plate and incorporates a slam locking system as standard to enable ease of emptying. n 3 0 litre and 50 litre models are available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 354 for full colour swatches. n All Regent models are manufactured from MDPE.

Regent 50 Litre Hooded Litter Bin

REGENT 30 & 50 LITRE

REGENT 30 LITRE DOG BIN

795mm

440mm

525mm

390mm

525mm

390mm

REGENT 50 LITRE HOODED

50L size detailed in table below Options Fixing Method Dimensions Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Free Wall Anchor Ground Ballast Stubber Ashtray Plastic Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Plate Cartridge Plate Liner Regent 30L Post Mounted

LPRBPM030 30

525 x 390

Any Standard Colour

Regent 30L Dog Bin with Hinged Lid

LPRBDB030 30

525 x 390

Red

Regent 50L Post Mounted

LPRBOPM50 50

645 x 425

Any Standard Colour

Regent 50L Hooded Post Mounted

LPRBHPM50 50

795 x 440

Black

n n n n

Refuse Sack Holder

Gold Bands

AS = As Standard

192

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN23

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Novelty

n H enri and Henrietta Hippo Novelty Litter Bins are an excellent way to encourage early litter awareness amongst children. Available in blue or pink the litter bins are ideal for schools, swimming pools, tourist and picnic areas and leisure complexes. n L itter bins come with a galvanised steel liner as standard and can accommodate 65 litres of waste. The head twists off for ease of access to the liner. Tamper proof locks are also supplied as standard. n Anchor plate fixing is available as an additional option. n Other colours are available on request. n Henri and Henrietta Hippo Litter Bins are manufactured from MDPE.

Henrietta Hippo Litter Bin

HENRI LITTER BIN

HENRIETTA LITTER BIN

1100mm

700Ømm

1100mm

700Ømm

LPHENR165 65

1100 x 700Ø 23

Blue

Henrietta with Galvanised Liner

LPHETTA65 65

1100 x 700Ø 23

Pink

AS = As Standard

193

n n

Refuse Sack Holder

Gold Bands

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

LTBN24

Litter Bins Q50 240

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75

Plastic Litter Bins Envirobank

n E nvirobank is designed to collect a multitude of waste materials for recycling. Supplied with a 140 litre or two 90 litre wheelie bins and a lightweight ‘lift to open’ front door, Envirobank makes recycling as easy as possible and ensures that it forms part of existing waste collection programmes. n T he innovative honeycomb structure gives the litter bins extra strength. Furthermore, the exterior is dimpled to resist fly posting. n O ptional sack retention can be supplied for lightweight waste collection. This increases the bin’s capacity to 225 litres. n E nvirobank Split allows waste to be separated into two 90 litre wheelie bins to make recycling even simpler. n B oth models have an integral ballast cartridge and are supplied with a four point locking system. n A range of WRAP compliant recycling graphics are available as standard. Some examples can be found below. n All models are manufactured from MDPE. Envirobank with paper aperture, Westminster

ENVIROBANK

ENVIROBANK SPLIT

1395mm

658Ø

1395mm

658Ø

ENVIROBANK LABEL OPTIONS

Shown with bottle/can aperture

Refuse Sack Holder

Envirobank Standard

LPEBST140 140

1395 x 658Ø

Any Standard Colour

Envirobank Split

LPEBST180 180 (2 x 90) 1395 x 658Ø

Any Standard Colour

Envirobank Super-Sized

LPEBSS240 240

Any Standard Colour

1491 x 741 x 871

Gold Bands

AS = As Standard

194

195

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

For cycle shelters please contact our specialist business Urban Engineering www.urbanengineering.co.uk

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Cycle Parking Concrete Cycle Parking

197

Monoscape

197

Bellitalia

198

Steel and Stainless Steel Cycle Parking

199

Ollerton

199

Sineu Graff

201

Polyurethane Cycle and Motorcycle Parking

203

Ferrocast®

203

‹ Sineu Graff, City Cycle Stands, on Perfecta Paving, Galleons Reach, Beckton

196

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

CYPA01

Cycle Stands Q50 210

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 207

Concrete Cycle Parking Monoscape

Multiline Parking Rack

n M onoscape concrete cycle parking is manufactured from high quality aggregates. Cycle blocks are available in a wide variety of colours, including mixes manufactured to coordinate with Marshalls concrete paving.

MONOSCAPE CYCLE BLOCK

n T he Bellitalia Multiline dual sided, concrete and steel cycle parking rack is available in five, seven, and nine space configurations and is manufactured using hot dip galvanised, polyester powder coated steel (RAL 7021), with side supports made from steel-reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated, sandblasted and protected using acrylic resins. Assembly on site is required. n T he Bellitalia Furbo double sided, modular, concrete and steel cycle parking rack is available in five, seven and nine space configurations. It is made of two circular hot dip galvanised, polyester powder coated steel tubes (RAL 7021) with wheel holding elements fixed to them by hollow sleeves that allow them to be fixed in the required position. The sliding mechanism permits the installation of a varying number of wheel-securing elements according to requirements (each cycle should be allotted a maximum space of 700mm width). Tubes are fixed to side supports made from steel-reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated, sandblasted and protected using acrylic resins. Assembly on site is required.

Shown in River Gravel finish

590

400

197

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

CYPA02

Cycle Stands Q50 210

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 90 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 161

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Cycle Parking Multiline and Furbo

MULTILINE PARKING RACK

1995/2695/3395

500 430

Multiline Parking Rack

FURBO PARKING RACK

420

2055/2755/3455 820

Furbo Parking Rack

Product Description

Product Reference

Diameter (mm)

Width (mm)

HAG (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Free Standing

n n n n n n n

Monoscape Cycle Block

FM715

590 (Length)

305 front/190 back

400

Smooth Grey

Multiline Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (5 Space)

BIAB39050

1955

430

134

Clear Acrylic Resin

Multiline Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (7 Space)

BIAB39070

2695

430

172

Clear Acrylic Resin

Multiline Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (9 Space)

BIAB39090

3395

430

200

Clear Acrylic Resin

Furbo Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (5 Space)

BIAB38205

2055

820

166

Clear Acrylic Resin

Furbo Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (7 Space)

BIAB38207

2755

820

186

Clear Acrylic Resin

Furbo Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (9 Space)

BIAB38209

3455

820

206

Clear Acrylic Resin

198

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

CYPA03

Cycle Stands Q50 210

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 221

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 241 page 254 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Cycle Parking Sheffield

n S heffield Cycle Stands are available galvanised, galvanised and powder coated and in grade 316L stainless steel. n C olour Options: A full standard range of RAL colours is available, please see page 356. n F ixing Options: Sheffield Cycle Stands can be supplied with either ground (root) fixing or base plate fixing. n Bespoke Options: Sheffield Cycle Stands can be adapted to client requirements.

Sheffield Cycle Stands

SHEFFIELD CYCLE STAND

SHEFFIELD CYCLE STAND WITH TAPPING BAR STOCK

750

STOCK

750

250

SHEFFIELD CYCLE STAND WITH SIGN STRIP & TAPPING BAR

250

SHEFFIELD DOUBLE CYCLE STAND

750 750

750

250

199

950

750

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

CYPA03

Cycle Stands Q50 210

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 241 page 254 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Cycle Parking n B uffalo and Hoop Cycle Stands are available galvanised, galvanised and powder coated and in grade 316L stainless steel. RCS5 is available galvanised only.

RCS5 CYCLE STAND

n B uffalo and Reliant Cycle Stands are supplied in galvanised and galvanised and powder coated steel.

n A standard range of RAL colours is available. Please see page 356.

343

BUFFALO CYCLE STAND

HOOP CYCLE STAND 476

900

700 76Ø

800

250

300

FESTIVAL CYCLE STAND

RELIANT CYCLE STAND 680 1200

700

800

168Ø

350

Options Material Finish Fixing Method Product Product Diameter Span HAG Weight Standard Stainless Stainless Galvanised Ground Base Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Steel Steel Only Fix Plate

n n n n n n

n n n

Add Ons Demountable Cycle Ground Parking Socket Sign

n n n

Sheffield Cycle Stand

RCS1

750

PC Black 9005

Sheffield Cycle Stand with Tapping Bar

RCS2

750

PC Black 9005

Sheffield Cycle Stand with Sign Strip & Tapping Bar RCS3

750

PC Black 9005

Sheffield Double Cycle Stand

RCS7

750

PC Black 9005

Multiple Cycle Stand Floor Fixing

RCS8

750

N/A

RCS5 Cycle Stand

RCS5

N/A

484

Buffalo Safety Cycle and Motorcycle Stand

OLBC101

476

700

Hoop Cycle Stand

Hoop

800

900

Festival Safety Cycle Stand

OLFC101

680

700

Reliant Safety Cycle Stand

OLFC103

168

1200

800

n n n n n PC Any RAL Colour n n n PC Black 9005 n n PC Any RAL Colour n n n n PC Any RAL Colour n n PC Black 9005

PC Black 9005

Brushed Satin Brushed Satin Brushed Satin

Tapping Bar

Brushed Satin Brushed Satin Brushed Satin

n n

200

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

CYPA04

Cycle Stands Q50 210

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243 Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

Steel and Stainless Steel Cycle Parking n A ll Sineu Graff cycle stands are available in either: – Zinc plated steel with a powder coated finish – Grade 316L stainless steel with a shotpeened finish. n F or powder coated finishes a full range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours is available. n Fixing Options: Either base plate or ground (root) fixing. n T he Multipa System allows the layout of cycle parking to be adapted for each site. Using a single individual rack, a linear triple rack and a curved triple rack, different configurations can be created. Base plate fixing only. n T he Cycle Tree is a combination of two elements of three clips in a semi circle with an information mast, an effective method of marking an area reserved for cycles so that it may be seen from a distance.

Arc Cycle Stands with cut out insert

DOUBLE LOOP CYCLE STAND

BOW CYCLE STAND 600

625

900

900 390

540

300

CITY CYCLE STAND

WISHBONE CYCLE STAND 550

201

650

900

300

ARC CYCLE STAND

ARC CYCLE STAND WITH CUT OUT INSERT 650

300

900

300

MULTIPA – SINGLE CLIP

MULTIPA – 3 CLIP

276

1470

400

MULTIPA – 3 CLIP SEMI CIRCLE

400

MULTIPA CYCLE TREE INFORMATION POST

276

765

2400

400

Material Product Product Span HAG Weight Standard Stainless Stainless Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Steel Steel

n n n n

Options Finish Galvanised Only

Double Loop Cycle Stand

43.010

625

900

PC Green 6026

Bow Cycle Stand

43.012

600

900

PC Green 6026

City Cycle Stand

43.013

550

900

PC Green 6026

Wishbone Cycle Stand

43.014

650

900

PC Green 6026

Arc Cycle Stand

43.0151

850

900

PC Ruby Red 303

Arc with Cut Out Insert

43.0155

850

900

PC Ruby Red 303

Multipa Single Clip

43.1101

276

400

PC Green 6026

Multipa 3 Clip

43.1501

1470

400

PC Green 6026

Multipa 3 Clip Semi Circle

43.1511

765

400

PC Green 6026

Multipa Cycle Tree Information Post

43.1521

N/A

2400

PC Green 6026

n n n n

Shot Peened Shot Peened Shot Peened Shot Peened

Fixing Method Ground Fix

Base Plate

n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n

Shot Peened Shot Peened Shot Peened Shot Peened

202

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items CYPA05

Cycle Stands Q50 210 Motorcycle Stands Q50 214

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 147 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 183 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 203 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Polyurethane Cycle and Motorcycle Parking

Islington Motorcycle Stand, Westminster

n F errocast Cycle and Motorcycle Stands are both secure and attractive. Stands are cast around a strong inner steel core, and the durable polyurethane finish will not be damaged by cycle chains. n C ycle stands can be coordinated with existing street furniture. The Cardiff and Manchester Bollards have been adapted to create matching cycle stands. n T he Red Route Cycle Stand and the Red Route and Islington Motorcycle Stands are supplied complete with reflective tape and signs. n Cycle and Motorcycle Stands are available root fixed with a 300mm root.

RED ROUTE MOTORCYCLE STAND

1000mm

203

850mm

1050mm

ISLINGTON MOTORCYCLE STAND

750mm

page 262 page 271 page 283 page 299

RED ROUTE

1050mm

STOCK

750mm

Red Route Cycle Stands

MANCHESTER

965mm

1000mm

CARDIFF

1085mm

1825mm

SHEFFIELD REDUCED

SHEFFIELD

STOCK

800mm

770mm

STOCK

950mm

750mm

893mm

SUFFOLK

660mm

ROMFORD

950mm

960mm

204

205

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Planters Concrete Planters

207

Monoscape: Boulevard

208

Monoscape: Strada

209

Monoscape: Ovito, Scala, Sero

210

Bellitalia: Concrete

211

Bellitalia: Polished Concrete

217

Bellitalia: Concrete with Metals

220

Steel and Stainless Steel Planters

221

Ollerton: M3

222

Ollerton: Festival

223

Timber Planters

225

Sineu Graff: Marquise

226

Sineu Graff: Roseraie

227

Sineu Graff: Domino

228

Recycled Plastic Composite Planters

229

Intruplas

230

Cast Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets

231

Imperial

231

Steel and Stainless Steel Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets

232

Ollerton

232

â&#x20AC;š Ovito Planter

206

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Concrete Planters

Classica 1620 Planter in white with Belluno Bench with Natural Stone Inset, Welsh Development Agency

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a wide range of practical and attractive concrete planters. Designs range from the totally utilitarian to those with a more sculptured aesthetic and all are functional. Use concrete planters to enhance urban environments with greenery or colourful floral arrangements. Also, strategically placed, heavy duty planters can be effectively used to guide the flow of pedestrians, limit vehicular access or act as ram-raid deterrents. Monoscape planters are available in the standard colours and finishes shown on page 345. Boulevard is available in a wide range of shapes and sizes allowing an appropriate plant container to accommodate every type of display, from flowers to large shrubs and small mature trees. Each plant container consists of a base unit (with recesses to assist handling) onto which are placed one, two or three rings to achieve the desired height. Plant container rings can be used without the base unit if direct ground cultivation is preferred. 207

Strada comprises planters featuring clean lines and simple geometric shapes. Bellitalia features cast concrete planters in simple shapes. Planters are also available enhanced with copper banding and a patented self levelling system. Their functionality can be increased further by adding stainless steel or steel circular seats to the planter body. Highly polished planters are also available in seven colours. Uniquely Bellitalia also features concrete planters with a wrapped copper shell.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT01

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197

Concrete Planters Boulevard

BOULEVARD CIRCULAR

BOULEVARD SQUARE

700

Plan view (not to scale)

1200

730

BOULEVARD SEMI CIRCULAR

BOULEVARD RECTANGULAR

2000 1400 Plan view (not to scale)

730

Product Description

495

Plan view (not to scale)

Dimensions Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Boulevard Circular 700

FP310040

Circular

700Ø

Variable*

337**

See Monoscape Swatch

Boulevard Circular 1200

FP350030

Semi Circular

1200Ø

Variable*

644**

See Monoscape Swatch

Boulevard Square

FP300004

Square

700 x 700

Variable*

330**

See Monoscape Swatch

Boulevard Rectangular 1400

FP330040

Rectangular

1400 x 700

Variable*

728**

See Monoscape Swatch

Boulevard Semi-Circular 2000

FP360040

Semi Circular

2000Ø

Variable*

968**

See Monoscape Swatch

*Additional rings may be added to the standard planter to allow varying heights. **Boulevard Planters’ weights based on 3 extension rings, others may be created.

208

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT01

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 159 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 197

Concrete Planters Strada

Strada Planters

STRADA CIRCULAR

STRADA SQUARE

500 710Ø

500

209

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Strada Circular

FP3900400

Circular

710Ø

500

184

See Monoscape Swatch

Strada Square

FP3950200

Square

500 x 500

500

109

See Monoscape Swatch

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT01

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 88

Concrete Planters Ovito, Scala, Sero

n O vito is a modern styled elliptical concrete planter which comes with a separate concrete base to compensate for uneven ground. Available in three colours white green, grey granite or anthracite basalt (black) and enhanced with a fine shot blast finish.

OVITO

n Scala is a classically shaped planter in mid grey with a high quality ground finish.

1040

n S ero planters are available in circular, square and rectangular shapes and also in a variety of sizes, they can be specified to create truly unique planting environments. All Sero planters are grey with a smooth finish to further enhance aesthetic appeal.

480

1040

600

SCALA

SERO

1200

600-1200

600

400-600

See dimensions below

Product Product Shape Description Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Colour

Finish

Ovito Planter

SD900005

Oval

1040 x 480

600

270

White Green, Grey Granite, Anthracite Basalt

Fine Shot Blast

Scala Planter

SD902001

Square

1200 x 1200

600

900

Mid Grey

Fine Ground

Sero Planter 600 x 400

SD906051

Rectangular

600 x 400

400

143

Grey

Smooth

Sero Planter 800

SD906080

Circular

800Ă&#x2DC;

400

226

Grey

Smooth

Sero Planter 800 x 400

SD906052

Rectangular

800 x 400

400

181

Grey

Smooth

Sero Planter 800 x 800

SD906059

Square

800 x 800

600

393

Grey

Smooth

Sero Planter 1200

SD906081

Circular

1200Ă&#x2DC;

600

544

Grey

Smooth

Sero Planter 1200 x 400

SD906053

Rectangular

1200 x 400

400

258

Grey

Smooth

Sero Planter 1200 x 600

SD906057

Rectangular

1200 x 600

600

446

Grey

Smooth

210

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT02

Planters

Q31 292

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 198 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Planters Concrete

n T he practical Acquario rectangular planter features gently rounded corners. The walls of the planter are at least 70mm thick (maximum thickness 95mm) with a base of 50mm. The base of the planter features a drainage hole. n A cquario is steel-reinforced; the inner side walls have four galvanised steel axle boxes set into the concrete and connected to the steel reinforcement system. M16 eyebolts may be fixed to these to make it easier to install and move the filled planter. n T he Menhir Planter is a trough style planter with semicircular section and support feet, complete with water reservoir and drainage holes. n P lanters are manufactured using precast white or grey concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected using an acrylic resin coating. n To install planters, simply place in the required position.

Menhir Planter

ACQUARIO PLANTER

MENHIR PLANTER

1950

1980

211

500

2200

600

670

500 700

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Acquario Planter

BIAF4035

Rectangular

1980 x 700

600

700

Clear Acrylic Resin

Menhir Planter

BIAF4037

Rectangular

2200 x 500

500

380

Clear Acrylic Resin

Ciotala Padova Self Levelling Planter

n S elf levelling circular planter with attractive ‘stepped’ lower body section and drainage hole.

CIOTALA PADOVA

n M anufactured using precast white or grey granite concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected using an acrylic resin coating. n T he planter consists of a base and two upper elements divided by a copper band measuring 35mm high and 0.8mm thick. n B oth base and upper sections are steel reinforced, and the unit features lifting hooks to facilitate movement and installation. n T o install, place the planter in the required position. The upper section may then be placed on top and will automatically be level.

467

1200

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Ciotala Padova Self Levelling Planter

BIAF4120

1200Ø

467

n/a

500

Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band

Circular

212

n C lassica planters consist of a circular concrete body enhanced by a copper band* running in the central groove around their full circumference.

CLASSICA 1220 CIRCULAR

n T he planter is equipped with a permanent water reservoir, rooting ventilation system and overflow drain. n M anufactured from steel-reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated, sandblasted and treated using a clear acrylic resin for protection. n T he body is attached to a separate concrete base by three steel bolts in steel axle boxes, set into the concrete of the base. These steel bolts can be adjusted to level the planter to compensate for a slope of up to 6% from the original. n S aturnia is a circular bench mounted around a Classica 1220 planter. The bench consists of 12 concentric bars which rest on eight uprights fastened in a radial arrangement around the exterior of the planter. The bench and uprights are manufactured from either zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel (RAL 7021), or 316L grade stainless steel.

1220

650

n C lassica and Saturnia are supplied pre-assembled. To install, place base elements and adjust level. ‘Lock’ adjustment bolts in the level position and manoeuvre top elements into position. The completed planter is now ready for positioning. The planter is equipped with hot dip galvanised steel eyes to make it easier to lift and move – even when fully planted. *Please note banding is also available in stainless steel.

CLASSICA 1620 CIRCULAR

CLASSICA 2020 CIRCULAR

2020

650

1620

213

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Classica 1220 Circular

BIAF4432

Circular

1220Ø

650

n/a

910

Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band

Classica 1620 Circular

BIAF4433

Circular

1620Ø

650

n/a

1468

Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band

Classica 2020 Circular

BIAF4434

Circular

2020Ø

650

n/a

2114

Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band

Saturnia Planter, Steel and Romana Benches, Nero, Harbour Reach, Dorset

SATURNIA STAINLESS STEEL

SATURNIA STEEL

1770Ø

1220Ø

650

650 435

435

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Saturnia Stainless Steel

BIAF3012

Circular

1770Ø

650

435

1014

Clear Acrylic Resin

Saturnia Steel

BIAF30126

Circular

1770Ø

650

435

1014

Clear Acrylic Resin

214

n C ristina Planters are self levelling, oval shaped planters complete with water reservoir, consisting of a base and two upper elements divided by a polished copper band* measuring 52mm high and 0.8mm thick. n M anufactured using precast white or grey granite concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected using an acrylic resin coating. Both base and upper sections are steel reinforced. n U nits feature steel stirrups and lifting hooks to facilitate movement and installation. n T o install, place the base of the planter in the required position. The upper section may then be placed on top and will automatically be level. *Please note banding is also available in stainless steel.

Cristina A Self Levelling Planter

CRISTINA A SELF LEVELLING PLANTER

CRISTINA B SELF LEVELLING PLANTER

2000

1500

600

478

820

565

600

478

215

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Cristina A Self Levelling Planter

BIAF4430

Oval

1500 x 565

478

n/a

350

Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band

Cristina B Self Levelling Planter

BIAF4437

Oval

2000 x 820

600

n/a

880

Clear Acylic Resin with Copper Band

n Ischia Planters are modular planters available in twin and triple configurations. n Planters are hemispherical in shape and are set on trapezoidal self levelling bases. n M anufactured using precast white or grey granite concrete, planters are vibrated, sandblasted and finally finished with a clear acrylic resin coating. n P lanter sections are reinforced with steel and concrete bases feature two external flat plates. These are linked together using steel M14 threaded bars and blind brass bolts. n T o install the planters simply loosen the blind bolts on the bases. Then level the planter and re-tighten the blind bolts.

Ischia Triple

ISCHIA TWIN

ISCHIA TRIPLE

1300

727

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Ischia Twin B90

BIAV3830

Quarter Circle

1300 x 727

613

n/a

364

Clear Acylic Resin

Ischia Triple B90

BIAV38303

Quarter Circle

1300 x 1300

613

n/a

519

Clear Acrylic Resin

216

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PLNT02

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 38 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 93

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 162 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 235

Concrete Planters Polished Concrete

Primavera Planter in Porfido colourway

n M anufactured from marble aggregate with a maximum particle size of 25mm, planters are then smoothed and treated with a protective varnish that gives them an exquisite polished finish. The upper rim features a 40mm diameter brass plate.

PRIMAVERA

n P rimavera and Estate planters come with a self levelling system that allows them to be positioned on 10% from horizontal gradients. n L una and Venere planters can be adapted to incorporate a circular bench which gives them added functionality. The seat section is manufactured from hot dip galvanised, polyester powder coated (RAL 7021) steel and anchored securely to the planter with steel bolts. n O rione features a brass plate around the upper rim and an internal stainless steel liner. n All planters are equipped with a water reservoir and overflow drain. n T o install planter/planters and seats, simply place in the desired position on the ground and level the unit using the eyebolt provided.

Polished Concrete Colours Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

520

830

Rosso

Bianco

Nero

Porfido

380 Rosso shown

217

Giallo

Veneziano

Verde

ESTATE

ORIONE

1150

540

815

760 Nero shown

LUNA

520Ø

Verde shown

Venere

1153

590

860

450

Nero shown

716

Nero shown

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Primavera with Self Levelling System

BIAR3610

Circular

830Ø

520

n/a

360

Polished Concrete

Estate with Self Levelling System

BIAF3601

Circular

1150Ø

540

n/a

594

Polished Concrete

Orione

BIAR3610

Circular

520Ø

815

n/a

242

Polished Concrete

Luna

BIAF3610

Circular

860Ø

450

n/a

135

Polished Concrete

Venere

BIAF3609

Circular

1153Ø

590

n/a

800

Polished Concrete

218

Luna Planter with circular bench, Giallo

Venere WITH CIRCULAR BENCH

LUNA WITH CIRCULAR BENCH

1370Ø

1770Ø

590

435

Porfido shown

219

520

435

Giallo shown

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Venere with Circular Bench

BIBF36106

Circular

1770Ø

590

435

890

Polished Concrete

Luna with Circular Bench

BIBF36092

Circular

1370Ø

520

435

430

Polished Concrete

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT02

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 92

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 163

Concrete Planters Concrete with Metals

n G inevra is an elegantly styled planter combining concrete with powder coated steel. The planter consists of three components. The first is a round base manufactured from precast concrete which is coated with a clear acrylic resin. The second is the supporting structure which is made from hot dip galvanised steel which is finished with a polyester powder coating. The final part is an extractable planter liner which is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel and powder coated in a copper coloured polyurethane glaze. n C osmoarredo is a classically styled concrete planter which is embellished with copper to give a fantastic aesthetic. The planter is made from precast concrete which is then wrapped in 1mm thick copper and finished with a decorative rim of your choice. Choices of rim are natural stone, iroko or pine wood and grey/ white concrete. The internal diameter of the rim is 660mm. n B oth planters feature the Bellitalia patented self levelling system. The Ginevra can compensate for slopes of up to 5% from horizontal. The Cosmoarredo up to 10%. n Planters are equipped with lifting eyes to make them easier to move. Ginevra Circular Steel/Concrete Planter

GINEVRA CIRCULAR STEEL/CONCRETE PLANTER

COSMOARREDO 860 COPPER SELF LEVELLING PLANTER

820Ø

800

716

820Ø

565Ø

800

716

860Ø

444

565Ø

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Ginevra Circular Steel/Concrete Planter

BIAF3710

Circular

820Ø

800

n/a

118

Clear Acrylic Resin/Polyurethane Glaze

Cosmaorredo Self Levelling Planter

BIAF5004

Circular

860Ø

444

n/a

140

Copper Coated Concrete/Decorative Rim

220

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Steel and Stainless Steel Planters

Ollerton Festival Square Planter and Straight Seat, Kirklees

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of steel and stainless steel planters which can be used to brighten up urban landscapes. They may also be used for restricting vehicular access within pedestrian areas either permanently or temporarily. Ollerton Planters feature M3, Festival and Bleasdale. Each is available in a variety of sizes and shapes. M3 Planters are made from 316L grade stainless steel which is satin polished to give a contemporary finish. A major benefit of stainless steel planters is that they will not rust and require minimal maintenance. Festival and Bleasdale Planters are manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being polyester powder coated in a RAL colour of your choice. Festival Planters can be specified with seating incorporated. Larger models of Ollerton planters can be specified with sub channels for ease of movement.

221

Imperial and Ollerton Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets are ideal for areas where ground space is restricted and planters are unsuitable. Imperial Hanging Basket Columns are manufactured from mild steel which can be coated in a colour of your choice. The hanging basket brackets attached to the column are in cast aluminium. Brackets are also available as single items allowing them to be wall mounted. Brackets can include personalised motifs such as coats of arms to special order. Ollerton M3 Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets are manufactured from 316L grade stainless steel. Festival Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then coated in a RAL colour of your choice. Brackets can be supplied as single items to allow for wall mounting of hanging baskets.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT03

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 241

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 254 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 268 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Planters M3

n C oordinating with the M3 range these stainless steel planters add a clean modern aesthetic. n M anufactured from high quality 316L grade polished stainless steel, the M3 Circular Flared Top features a commercial planting basket in stainless steel. The rectangular and circular terrace sizes have a GRP liner. Liners can be specified in a colour of your choice. n R ectangular and circular terrace planters can be specified with sub channels to allow movement by fork lift.

M3 Flared Top Planter

M3 CIRCULAR FLARED TOP

M3 RECTANGULAR FLARED TOP 1840

565Ø 360

785

M3 CIRCULAR TERRACE FLARED TOP 1530Ø

625

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

M3 Circular Top Flared

OLPS106

Circular

565Ø

785

316L Grade Satin Polished Stainless Steel

M3 Rectangular

OLPS1010

Rectangular

1840 x 940

360

340

316L Grade Satin Polished Stainless Steel

M3 Circular Terrace Flared Top

OLPS1090

Circular

1530Ø

625

154

316L Grade Satin Polished Stainless Steel

222

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT03

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 52 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 167 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 239 page 255 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Planters Festival

fESTIVAL CIRCULAR TERRACE ROLLED TOP 1530

625

fESTIVAL CIRCULAR ROLLED TOP 505Ø

620 Festival Circular Terrace Rolled Top Planter, Havering

n Ollerton Festival is a range of polyester powder coated steel planters. n A vailable in circular, rectangular and square shapes they can assist in adding floral arrangements to your landscape.

fESTIVAL CIRCULAR LARGE ROLLED TOP n Large planters may be specified at 900mm high with integral Festival Seating. 650Ø

n P lanters are hot dip galvanised and then powder coated in a colour of your choice. The internal liner may also be colour coded. n Larger planters can be specified to allow movement by fork lift. 620

n Rolled top planters are also available with flared tops as special order items.

223

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Festival Circular Terrace Rolled Top

OLPL1090

Circular

1530Ø

625

154

PC any RAL Colour

Festival Circular Rolled Top

OLPL1050

Circular

505Ø

620

PC any RAL Colour

Festival Circular Large Rolled Top

OLPL1060

Circular

650Ø

620

PC any RAL Colour

Festival Square Planter with Festival Straight Seat

fESTIVAL SQUARE

fESTIVAL RECTANGULAR ROLLED TOP 1500 sq

1900

1100

360

BLEASDALE SQUARE LATTICE FRAME 1210

890

Product Description

Product Shape Reference

L x W (mm)

Dimensions Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Festival Square

OLPS1020

Square

1500 x 1500

1100*

360

PC any RAL Colour

Festival Rectangular Rolled Top

OLPL1010

Rectangular

1900 x 1000

360

PC any RAL Colour

Bleasdale Square Lattice Frame

OLPB103

Square

1210 x 1210

890

280

PC any RAL Colour

*Festival Square Planter is also available at 900mm high for use with integral seating

224

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Timber Planters

Roseraie Large Square Planter

Sineu Graff Planters range from a complete timber planter, Marquise, which offers a natural aesthetic to two other planters, Roseraie and Domino, which combine timber and powder coated steel to create a more contemporary aesthetic. The timber used in manufacture is solid tropical hardwood from sustainable sources which is protected using a water-based, solvent-free treatment. This is electrostatically-applied by a robotic pistol to an overall thickness of 135 microns when dry, giving the timber a smooth and natural finish whilst protecting it against water, insect and fungal ingress. There are three shapes and sizes available in each style of planter: square, large square and rectangular. Should you wish to plant trees we also offer a larger planter which is supplied with a galvanised steel liner, a water reservoir and fixed lifting points. The large square planter is specially designed to accommodate large root bases and requirements for maximum available root space, and is supplied with height adjustable feet as standard.

225

A range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours are available for each model, please refer to individual product pages for more details. Planters can be specified with height adjustable stainless steel feet so that they can be levelled easily on gradients of up to 10% from horizontal. Planters are supplied as standard with a galvanised steel liner with fixed lifting points or with the option of retractable steel lifting points (dependent on model). Standard galvanised liners also have a built in water reservoir to keep flower beds moist. In addition to the galvanised steel liner we can also supply a high-density moulded polyethylene liner which also has an in built water reservoir and fixed lifting points only.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT04

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 82 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151

Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

Timber Planters Marquise

n M arquise is manufactured from tropical hardwood which is treated with an electrostatically-applied varnish. This gives the planter a natural aesthetic as well as a high quality smooth finish.

Marquise SQUARE

n T he large square model has 100 x 100 mm section corner posts and the Square and Rectangular models have 80 x 80 mm section corner posts. These are then capped with a machined-in hardwood globe design. n T he side panels are constructed from 105mm wide and 20mm thick narrow hardwood sections supported by u-shaped cleats bolted to the corner posts. Each section is connected by stainless steel bolts to a u-shaped polyester powder coated steel frame.

650

n Height adjustable stainless steel feet are also available. n A galvanised steel liner with fixed handles and water reservoir is supplied as standard. Retractable steel handles are also available (dependent on model). Additionally a high-density moulded polyethylene liner with fixed lifting points and water reservoir is also available. n A larger version of the Square Planter is also available should you wish to use your planter to grow trees. Details can be found in the table below. n T he hardwood is supplied in a natural shade as standard. The range is also available in two other colours, moss green RAL 6005 and pure white RAL 9010.

Marquise LARGE SQUARE

Marquise ReCTANGULAR

900

920

650

1250

Dimensions High Density Product Product Shape L x W Height Weight Finish Polyethylene Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Liner

Options Height Adjustable Feet

Retractable Linear Lifting Points (steel liner only)

n n n

Marquise Square

299680 AB1

Square

650 x 650

650

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

Marquise Large Square

299681 AB1

Square

920 x 920

900

105

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

Marquise Rectangular

299685 AB1

Rectangular

1250 x 650

650

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

Marquise Tree

299686 AB1

Square

1370 x 1370

1190

150

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

n n n

AS*

*AS = As Standard

226

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT04

Planters

Q31 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 103

Timber Planters Roseraie

n R oseraie Planters combine polyester powder coated steel with hardwood timber to create a fusion of natural and contemporary aesthetics. Posts are painted as standard in anthracite grey RAL 7016, other RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours are available on request.

Roseraie SQUARE

n T he Large Square model has 100 x 100 mm section corner posts and the Square and Rectangular models have 80 x 80 mm section corner posts. n T he side panels are constructed from 105mm wide and 20mm thick, narrow hardwood sections supported by u-shaped cleats are bolted to the corner posts. Each section is connected by anti-vandal bolts onto flat-profiled zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel cross-struts.

610

640

n Height adjustable stainless steel feet are also available. n A galvanised steel liner with fixed handles and water reservoir is supplied as standard. Retractable steel handles are also available (dependent on model). Additionally a high-density moulded polyethylene liner with fixed lifting points and water reservoir is available. n A larger version of the Square Planter is also available should you wish to use your planter to grow trees. Details can be found in the table below. n T he frame and posts are available in other RAL (high gloss) colours on request. Panel sections are a natural shade as standard and are also available in two other colours, moss green RAL 6005 and pure white RAL 9010.

Roseraie LARGE SQUARE

Roseraie ReCTANGULAR

900

920

640

1240

Options

Product Product Shape Description Reference

Height Adjustable Feet

Dimensions L x W Height Weight Volume Finish (mm) (mm) (kg) (L)

High Density Polyethylene Liner

Retractable Liner Lifting Points (steel liner only)

Roseraie Square

299650 AB1

Square

610 x 610

640

200

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

Roseraie Large Square

299561 AB1

Square

920 x 920

900

105

400

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

Roseraie Rectangular

299655 AB1

Rectangular

1240 x 610

640

200

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

n n n

Roseraie Tree

299656 AB1

Square

1370 x 1370

1370

150

1400

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

AS*

*AS = As Standard

227

n n

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT04

Planters

Q31 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 103

Timber Planters Domino

n D omino Planters are uniquely styled with laser-cut motifs and bright colours to create a truly vibrant aesthetic. They combine treated hardwood posts with polyester powder coated steel panels.

Domino SQUARE

n S ide panels are laser-cut with 28mm square motifs before being zinc plated and polyester powder coated in anthracite grey RAL 7016. Back panels, which are coated in traffic yellow RAL 1023, are added to enhance the motif. n T he panels are connected to the posts by anti-vandal bolts and are reinforced at the top and bottom by u-shaped returns.

640

n Height adjustable stainless steel feet are also available. 650

n A galvanised steel liner with fixed handles and water reservoir is supplied as standard. Retractable steel handles are also available (dependent on model). Additionally a high-density moulded polyethylene liner with fixed lifting points and water reservoir is also available. n A larger version of the Square Planter is also available should you wish to use your planter to grow trees. Details can be found in the table below. n H ardwood posts are supplied in a natural shade as standard. Other RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available as options.

Domino LARGE SQUARE

Domino RECTANGULAR

900

960

650

1290

Options

Product Product Shape Description Reference

Height Adjustable Feet

Dimensions L x W Height Weight Volume Finish (mm) (mm) (kg) (L)

High Density Polyethylene Liner

Retractable Liner Lifting Points (steel liner only)

Domino Square

299660 AB1

Square

640 x 640

650

200

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

Domino Large Square

299570 AB1

Square

960 x 960

900

105

400

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

n n

Domino Rectangular

299665 AB1

Rectangular

1290 x 640

650

200

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

n n n

Domino Tree

299666 AB1

Square

1400 x 1400

1130

150

1400

Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection

AS*

*AS = As Standard

228

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Recycled Plastic Composite Planters Intruplas

Square Planter with Modular Seat

Recycled Plastic Composite (RPC) Planters are cost effective ways of adding planting arrangements to landscapes. Marshalls Street Furniture offer a number of different styles and sizes. Raised planting beds allow arrangements to be protected from foot traffic. They are produced using plastic waste and manufactured using extruded techniques. RPC requires minimal maintenance. Non-porous, it is not subject to rot, algae or fungal growth. As a result it is suitable for use in very wet or damp conditions. The non porous surface also means that planters are resistant to physical attacks. They are easy to clean and paint and marker pen can easily be removed with thinners without compromising the finish of the product. RPC planters are also highly durable and robust as the material does not crack or splinter. As RPC is less susceptible to degradation over time, recycled planters have an extended product life. Therefore, whole life costs can be a third of the cost of traditional materials.

229

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 261 Picnic Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153

Recycled Plastic Composite Planters Intruplas

SQUARE PLANTER WITH STAINLESS STEEL

500mm

SQUARE PLANTER

0mm

500

100

RAISED BED PLANTER

500mm

See table

SQUARE PLANTER WITH MODULAR SEAT

220

320

mm 2400 mm 1200

Product Description

Dimensions L x W Height (mm) (mm)

Seat Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Finish

Square Planter

500 x 500

500

n/a

RPC Grain Effect

Square Planter With Stainless Steel

1000 x 1000

500

n/a

178

RPC Grain Effect

Square Planter With Modular Seat (Small)*

2200 x 500

500

178

RPC Grain Effect

Square Planter With Modular Seat (Large)*

3200 x 1000

500

376

RPC Grain Effect

Raised Bed Planter

2400 x 1200

150

n/a

RPC Grain Effect

Raised Bed Planter

2400 x 1200

300

n/a

105

RPC Grain Effect

Raised Bed Planter

2400 x 1200

425

n/a

151

RPC Grain Effect

Raised Bed Planter

1200 x 1200

150

n/a

RPC Grain Effect

Raised Bed Planter

1200 x 1200

300

n/a

RPC Grain Effect

Raised Bed Planter

1200 x 1200

425

n/a

102

RPC Grain Effect

*Seat Section Dimensions 1200mm x 330mm

230

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT06

Planters

Q31 292

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 41 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 104 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 135

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 236 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 269

Cast Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets n M arshalls Street Furniture offer a range of hanging basket columns which allow floral arrangements to be placed above ground level, either with a supporting column or wall bracket. n I mperial Hanging Basket Column is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being coated in a RAL colour of your choice. n The Hanging Basket Bracket is manufactured from cast aluminium. n Brackets are available separately to enable wall mounting. n H anging Basket Columns are available with two spandrel brackets as standard but can be supplied with three or four spandrel brackets on request. n Imperial Basket Brackets also come with the option of motifs.

IMPERIAL HANGING BASKET COLUMN 1334

356Ă&#x2DC;max

Imperial Basket Bracket

IMPERIAL BASKET BRACKET 600

114Ă&#x2DC; 356 max

231

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

PLNT07

Planters

Q31 292

356 max Steel and Stainless Steel Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets n M 3 Hanging Basket Column and Bracket are manufactured from 316L grade stainless steel which is satin polished to give a smooth, contemporary aesthetic.

M3 HANGING BASKET COLUMN

n H anging Basket Columns are available with two spandrel brackets as standard but can be supplied with three or four spandrel brackets on request.

1314

n Brackets are available separately to allow for wall mounting.

M3 BASKET BRACKET

356Ømax 3490 Typ

600 114Ø

150 Typ 750 Concrete GEN 1 MASS

356Ø max

750sq

n F estival Hanging Basket Column and Bracket are manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being coated in a RAL colour of your choice.

FESTIVAL HANGING BASKET COLUMN

n H anging Basket Columns are available with two spandrel brackets as standard but can be supplied with three or four spandrel brackets on request.

1334

n Brackets are available separately to allow for wall mounting. n Personalised motifs may also be added to brackets.

FESTIVAL BASKET BRACKET 600

356Ømax

356Ø max

114Ø Product Product Description Reference

Column Height Width (mm) (mm)

Basket Diameter Weight Finish (mm) (kg)

Fixing Method Sub Surface

n n n n n n

Imperial Hanging Basket Column

OLHC102

3490

1334

356

PC any RAL Colour

Imperial Hanging Basket Bracket

OLHC201

n/a

600

356

PC any RAL Colour

M3 Hanging Basket Column

OLHS102

3490

1314

356

316L Grade Stainless Steel

M3 Hanging Basket Bracket

OLHS201

n/a

600

356

316L Grade Stainless Steel

Festival Hanging Basket Column

OLHF102

3490

1334

356

PC any RAL Colour

Festival Hanging Basket Bracket

OLHF201

n/a

600

356

PC any RAL Colour

232

233

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Tree Protection Concrete Tree Protection

235

Bellitalia

235

Cast Iron Tree Protection

236

Imperial

237

Ollerton: Festival

239

Sineu Graff: Series 4000

239

Imperial and Ollerton Tree Guards

240

Stainless Steel Tree Protection

241

Ollerton: M3 Tree Grilles and Guards

242

Steel Tree Protection

243

Sineu Graff: Series 2000

243

Polyurethane Tree Protection

247

Ferrocast®

247

Steel Frames for Paving and Bonded Gravel

249

Ollerton: Paving Tree Frame

249

Ollerton: Bonded Gravel Tree Frame

250

‹ 58P Series Tree Grille in Ferrocast with Monoscape Cubes on Buff Saxon Paving, Leeds Valley Business Park, West Yorkshire

234

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

TREE01

Tree Grilles Q50 262

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 198 Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 211

Concrete Tree Protection n Simple circular tree grilles in concrete and polished concrete. n 1 220 and 1620 are simple, pozzolanic concrete planters which are designed to protect tree beds. They come with a clear acrylic coating and are styled with rounded edges. The planters are designed to be partially buried, affording protection for the plant. n A ndromeda is a beautifully polished planter which is made from a fine marble aggregate. The planter comes in two sizes and the rim features a 40mm diameter brass plate. n The tree protectors can be concreted into place if preferred.

1220 Tree Protector

1220/1620

ANDROMEDA

270

820Ø 1220

270

225 1220Ø

820Ø

1620 255

308

1620Ø

1220Ø

308 Product Product Diameter Description Reference (mm)

235

Height Overall Height (mm)

Weight 1220Ø (kg)

Standard Finish

1220

BIV412610

1220

225

314

Clear Acrylic Resin

1620

BIV416610

1620

255

486

Clear Acrylic Resin

Andromeda 820

BIAF3604

820

270

154

Polished Concrete

Andromeda 1220

BIAF3605

1220

308

383

Polished Concrete

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Cast Iron Tree Protection Cast iron tree grilles provide room for water irrigation in areas where paving construction has been designed to collect and dispose of surface run off. They allow trees to be added to the landscapes without the risk of root growth damaging surrounding paving. Tree guards provide newly planted trees with protection and growing support. Ollerton Festival Tree Grilles are circular in design and are supplied in separate segments to fit into the tree grille support frame. The tree guard also bolts to the latter. Festival Tree Grilles are primed in black as standard and then, if requested they can be coated in a colour of your choice. Imperial cast iron tree grilles are available in a variety of styles and a range of sizes designed to coordinate with most sizes of paving.

MSF 58 Series Cast Iron Tree Grille with Metropolis Benches shown with Marshalls Tegula Paving

Series 4000 Classic Cast Iron Tree Grille

236

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items TREE02

Tree Grilles Q50 262

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 231 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 269

Cast Iron Tree Protection n I mperial cast iron tree grilles are manufactured from ductile cast iron and comply with BS EN 1563 1997. n T ree grilles are supplied in a black gloss finish as standard. Products can also be supplied with irrigation or lighting ports. n M edium duty tree grille support frames are available to suit either square or circular models. A two piece frame provides support to all edges of the grille and is also advantageous when the tree is already established. n T wo piece frames can also be supplied with removable inner support sections. These should be used when the trees are to be planted at a later stage. n M arshalls Street Furniture also offer tree guards for additional protection for young trees. These are available to suit all tree grille designs. n T ree guards are manufactured from mild steel and electroplated before finally being painted with black gloss. n W e would be pleased to quote for the supply of any tree grilles, frames or guards to clientsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; own specific designs. Please contact our Sales Office for further information. 61 Series Tree Grille

237

58 SERIES

59 SERIES

60 SERIES

61 SERIES

62 SERIES

63 SERIES

64 SERIES

65 SERIES

66 SERIES

68 SERIES

7002 with 400Ø Aperture 10002/1000Ø with 400Ø Aperture Product Grille Weight Grille Weight Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg)

DIMENSIONS (mm) 12002/1200Ø with 400Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

14002/1400Ø with 600Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

18002 with 600Ø Aperture Grille Reference

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

58 Series

5807

5810

5812

126

5814

153

5818

240

Black Gloss

59 Series

n/a

5910

5912

126

5914

153

n/a

Black Gloss

60 Series

n/a

6010

126

6012

161

6014

191

n/a

Black Gloss

61 Series

n/a

6110

106

6112

170

6114

232

n/a

Black Gloss

62 Series

n/a

6210

6212

136

6214

148

n/a

Black Gloss

63 Series

n/a

6310

106

6312

150

6314

214

n/a

Black Gloss

64 Series

n/a

6410

6412

6414

121

n/a

Black Gloss

65 Series

n/a

6510

6512

106

6514

128

n/a

Black Gloss

66 Series

n/a

6610

6612

126

6614

153

n/a

Black Gloss

68 Series

n/a

6810

6812

126

6814

153

n/a

Black Gloss

238

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

TREE03

Tree Grilles Q50 262

Cast Iron Tree Protection Festival and Series 4000

n T he Ollerton Festival Tree Grille is supplied in four separate segments to fit into a tree grille support frame.

SERIES 4000 CONTEMPORARY

n Available in two dimensions: 1200mm and 1400mm. n T ree grilles are primed in black as standard but if requested they can be coated in a colour of your choice. n S ineu Graff Series 4000 Classic and Contemporary Tree Grilles are available in two designs and come with a black gloss finish. n Tree grilles can be supplied with irrigation holes and removable covers. n S eries 4000 Contemporary is supplied with four removable cast iron apertures which can be used to accommodate support stakes. These may be locked when support stakes are no longer needed. n B oth models can be supplied with a Tree Guard. A four piece tree grille frame is also available for both models.

FESTIVAL 1200 ROUND TREE GRILLE

FESTIVAL 1400 ROUND TREE GRILLE

600 Segment

SERIES 4000 CLASSIC

700 Segment

dimensions (mm) 18002 with 600Ø Aperture Product Product Weight Description Reference (kg)

239

OPTIONS Standard Finish

Two Irrigation Holes + Covers

Series 4000 Classic Tree Grille

42.451

300

Black Gloss

4 Piece Tree Grille Frame for use with Series 4000 Classic

42.455

Black Gloss

Series 4000 Contemporary

42.461

290

Black Gloss

4 Piece Tree Grille Frame for use with Series 4000 Contemporary

42.465

Black Gloss

Tree Grille Guard for Use with Series 4000 Classic/Contemporary

42 5000

Black Gloss

Festival Round Tree Grille 1200Ø

OLTG201

Primed Black

Festival Round Tree Grille 1400Ø

OLTG204

120

Primed Black

Four Removable In Fill Covers

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

TREE04

Tree Guards Q50 260

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 42 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 103 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 185

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 231 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 269

Tree Protection Imperial and Festival Tree Guards

n I mperial Tree Guards, for use with Imperial Tree Grilles are constructed from mild steel bars, electroplated and black gloss paint finished. Two fixing methods are available: spike and bolt.

IMPERIAL TREE GUARD 400/600

n F estival Tree Guards, for use with Festival Tree Grilles are supplied in mild steel, hot dip galvanised and polyester powder coated.

IMPERIAL TREE GUARD SPIKE FIXING DETAIL Tree Guard Tree Grille

16 Fixing Spike x 4 300

n F estival Tree Guards can be coated in colours of your choice from a full range of standard RAL colours. 1800

IMPERIAL TREE GUARD BOLT FIXING DETAIL Plan View Tree Grille Tree Guard

Height adjustable M16 Nut to lock Tree Guard

Tree Grille

FESTIVAL FLAT TOP TREE GUARD

FESTIVAL FLARED TOP TREE GUARD

FESTIVAL ROLLED TOP TREE GUARD

580

505

650

1800

FESTIVAL FREE STANDING TREE GUARD

1800

400

Internal Product Product Height Width Weight Standard Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Imperial Bolt Fixing Square Tree Guard

MSF402SQ

1800

400

Black Gloss

Imperial Bolt Fixing Circle Tree Guard

MSF402CIR

1800

400

Black Gloss

Imperial Spike Fixing Square Tree Guard

MSF402SQ

1800

400

Black Gloss

Imperial Spike Fixing Circle Tree Guard

MSF402CIR

1800

400

Black Gloss

Imperial Bolt Fixing Square Tree Guard

MSF602SQ

1800

600

Black Gloss

Imperial Bolt Fixing Circle Tree Guard

MSF602CIR

1800

600

Black Gloss

Imperial Spike Fixing Square Tree Guard

MSF602SQ

1800

600

Black Gloss

Imperial Spike Fixing Circle Tree Guard

MSF602CIR

1800

600

Black Gloss

Festival Flat Top Tree Guard

OLTR501

1800

495

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Flared Top Tree Guard

OLTR301

1800

495

PC Any RAL Colour

Festival Rolled Top Tree Guard

OLTR101

1800

495

PC Any RAL Colour

OPTIONS Free Standing

Plaques

n n n

n n n 240

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Stainless Steel Tree Protection

M3 Tree Grille with M3 Pedestal Seats, Newby Primary

n M 3 is a range of 316L grade satin polished stainless steel tree grilles and guards. They are available in two sizes and designs; circular or square designs. n T ree grilles are supplied in separate segments and fit directly into the tree grille support frame. n T ree guards are available to match M3 Tree Grilles. They come with bolt fixings that allow them to be attached to tree grilles. Alternatively they can be supplied with free standing legs which allow them to be used independently. n Stainless steel tree grilles are bolted to the frame with security bolts as standard.

M3 Round Tree Grille with Festival Tree Guard, Flared Top painted silver, Bolsover

241

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

TREE05

Tree Grilles Q50 262 Tree Guards Q50 260

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 221 page 254 page 268 page 297

Stainless Steel Tree Protection M3 Tree Grilles and Guards

M3 1200Ø ROUND TREE GRILLE

M3 1400Ø ROUND TREE GRILLE

600 Segment

M3 1200Ø SQUARE TREE GRILLE

600 Segment

700 Segment

M3 FLAT TOP TREE GUARD

M3 1400Ø SQUARE TREE GRILLE

700 Segment

M3 FLARED TOP TREE GUARD 580

505

1800

Product Description

Product Reference

Length (mm)

Height (mm)

Aperture (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

M3 Round Tree Grille

OLSG201

1200Ø

n/a

495Ø

316L Grade Stainless Steel

M3 Round Tree Grille

OLSG203

1400Ø

n/a

495Ø

316L Grade Stainless Steel

M3 Square Tree Grille

OLSG202

12002

n/a

495Ø

316L Grade Stainless Steel

M3 Square Tree Grille

OLSG204

14002

n/a

495Ø

316L Grade Stainless Steel

M3 Flat Top Tree Guard

OLTS501

505

1800

495Ø

316L Grade Stainless Steel

M3 Flared Top Tree Guard

OLTS301

580

1800

495Ø

316L Grade Stainless Steel

OPTIONS Free Plaques Standing

n n

n n 242

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items TREE06

Tree Grilles Q50 262 Tree Guards Q50 260

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 105 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 180

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201 Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . page 287 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 294

Steel Tree Protection Series 2000

Round â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Rootsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; Grille with Tree Guard and Sineu Graff Rendezvous Curved Benches

n S ineu Graff Series 2000 Tree Grilles are manufactured from 8.5mm sheet steel that has been profiled by laser cutting.

n T he range is supplied with support frames and the option of additional irrigation holes, temporary stake mounting shoes or permanent bolt fixing tree guards.

n A ll products are zinc plated and polyester powder coated from a standard range of five sable colours to create a unique sand textured finish.

n S eries 2000 Tree Grilles can be specified with removable irrigation covers to make irrigating more convenient. An example of this is shown in Fig 1.

n C olours available are Sable Green 500, Brown 650, Blue 700, Black 100 and Grey 900.

n F or temporary tree support, staking shoes can be specified. These can be removed at a later date when the tree is fully established and self supporting (Fig 2).

n Series 2000 Tree Grilles are available in three sizes; 1200mm, 1500mm and 1800mm. n All products can be produced to special order in 316 (1.4401) grade stainless steel. n All Series 2000 models have the option of steel tree guard. n Please be aware that Series 2000 model patterns change on 1200mm and 1800mm grilles. Please contact our Sales Office for further information.

243

FIG 1

FIG 2

PEBBLES (ROUND)

PEBBLES (SQUARE)

ROOTS (ROUND)

ROOTS (SQUARE)

TULIPS (ROUND)

TULIPS (SQUARE)

STARS (ROUND)

STARS (SQUARE)

dimensions (mm) 12002/1200Ø with 600Ø Aperture 15002/1500Ø with 600Ø Aperture Product Product Weight Product Weight Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg)

18002/1800Ø with 600Ø Aperture Product Weight Reference (kg)

Standard Finish

Round Pebbles Grille

42.2204R

42.2504R

134

42.2804R

170

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Square Pebbles Grille

42.2204S

108

42.2504S

176

42.2804S

225

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Round Roots Grille

42.2205R

42.2505R

125

42.2805R

175

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Square Roots Grille

42.2205S

108

42.2505S

169

42.2805S

234

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Round Tulips Grille

42.2208R

42.2508R

125

42.2808R

170

Sand Textured PC Blue 700

Square Tulips Grille

42.2208S

109

42.2508S

169

42.2808S

225

Sand Textured PC Blue 700

Round Stars Grille

42.2201R

42.2501R

115

42.2801R

148

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Square Stars Grille

42.2201S

107

42.2501S

161

42.2801S

207

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

244

245

GEODES (ROUND)

GEODES (SQUARE)

FOLIAGE (ROUND)

FOLIAGE (SQUARE)

OCEAN (ROUND)

OCEAN (SQUARE)

WAVES (ROUND)

WAVES (SQUARE)

n Designed as an integral component of the Series 2000 tree protection system. n T he Sineu Graff Series 2000 tree guard is manufactured in zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel, using 30mm diameter round tubes welded to 4mm thick flat rings. n A vailable in the full range of standard RAL (high gloss) and sable (matt textured) colours. n Supplied in two sections for assembly with stainless steel bolts. n Guard to grille fixing allows for installation on slopes up to 10% from horizontal.

SERIES 2000 TREE GUARD 270

1696

600 Square ‘Roots’ Tree Grille

dimensions (mm) 12002/1200Ø with 600Ø Aperture 15002/1500Ø with 600Ø Aperture Product Product Weight Product Weight Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg)

18002/1800Ø with 600Ø Aperture Product Weight Reference (kg)

Standard Finish

Round Geodes Grille

42.2207R

42.2507R

125

42.2807R

167

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Square Geodes Grille

42.2207S

109

42.2507S

172

42.2807S

229

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Round Foliage Grille

42.2206S

111

42.2506S

183

42.2806S

239

Sand Textured PC Green 500

Square Foliage Grille

42.2206R

42.2506R

134

42.2806R

178

Sand Textured PC Green 500

Round Ocean Grille

42.2203R

42.2503R

124

42.2803R

160

Sand Textured PC Blue 700

Square Ocean Grille

42.2203S

109

42.2503S

169

42.2803S

221

Sand Textured PC Blue 700

Round Waves Grille

42.2202R

42.2502R

119

42.2802R

157

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

Square Waves Grille

42.2202S

104

42.2502S

154

42.2802S

207

Sand Textured PC Brown 650

246

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

TREE07

Tree Grilles Q50 262 Tree Guards Q50 260

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 64 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 147 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 183 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 203

Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 262 page 271 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Tree Protection n F errocast polyurethane is an ideal material for tree grilles and guards; a Ferrocast Tree Grille is not only resistant to corrosion but also the degradation that can be caused by street cleaning equipment. n G rilles are also abrasion resistant and, because of their through colour, always present an optimal appearance. n I n tests on location and independently witnessed by Ceram â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Ferrocast Tree Grilles and sub-frames proved to be capable of withstanding vehicle over-run weight of 43.3 tonnes, 8.92 tonnes per axle and 4.46 tonnes per wheel. n F errocast Tree Grilles are much lighter than cast iron and will reduce the risk of manual handling injuries (Manual Handling Operations 1992). n T ree guards are also available, manufactured from galvanised powder coated steel.

IMPERIAL TREE GUARD 400/600

1800

58 Series Tree Grille with Marshalls Tegula Paving

247

OPTIONS

Product Description

Product Reference

Height (mm)

Diameter (mm)

Weight (kg)

Standard Finish

Circular

Square

Imperial Tree Guard

TP130000

1800

400 or 600

Black Gloss

ARABESQUE

PARK LANE

58P SERIES

59P SERIES

60P SERIES

61P SERIES

65P SERIES

66P SERIES

68P SERIES

Product Description

7002 with 400Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

10002 with 400Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

DIMENSIONS (mm) 12002 with 400Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

14002 with 600Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

18002 with 600Ø Aperture Grille Weight Reference (kg)

Standard Finish

Arabesque

n/a

Arabesque

Black Gloss

Park Lane

n/a

Park Lane

Black Gloss

58P Series

5807

5810

5812

5814

5818

Black Gloss

59P Series

n/a

5910

5912

5914

n/a

Black Gloss

60P Series

n/a

6010

6012

6014

n/a

Black Gloss

61P Series

n/a

6110

6112

6114

n/a

Black Gloss

65P Series

n/a

6510

6512

6514

n/a

Black Gloss

66P Series

n/a

6610

6612

6614

n/a

Black Gloss

68P Series

n/a

6810

6812

6814

n/a

Black Gloss

248

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items TREE08

Tree Grilles Q50 262

Steel Frames for Paving Paving Tree Frame

n M arshalls Street Furniture manufacture tree frames that allow the continuous installation of Marshalls paving up to and around a tree base. n T ree frames are divided into sections that accommodate specific sizes of paving. Sections are divided by irrigation channels and the entire base of the grille is perforated to allow water to drain through to the root ball of the tree. n Manufactured from steel, the frames are hot dip galvanised to prevent rust. n Supplied in kit form.

Paving Tree Frame with Natural Stone Paving, Albert Square, Manchester

Ollerton Steel Frame for paving

249

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items TREE09

Tree Grilles Q50 262

Steel Frames for Bonded Gravel Bonded Gravel Tree Frame

n T he Ollerton Bonded Gravel Tree Frame allows the continuous and tidy installation of bonded gravel around a tree base. It is to be filled with bonded gravel by others. n T he two sides of the tree frame can be opened easily to allow access to the root ball and tie anchors and then closed and the opening brackets protected with a security cover. n An optional removable inner ring is available.

Ollerton Bonded Gravel Tree Frame

1288 sq

Tree Frame

Security Cover in Place

Remove Security Cover

Attach Lifting Handle

Open One Side

Open Second Side

494

250

251

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Notice Boards Steel and Stainless Steel Notice Boards

254

Ollerton: M3

254

Ollerton: Festival

255

Ollerton: Buffalo

256

Ollerton: Aviso

257

Imperial: Imperial

259

Recycled Plastic Composite Notice Boards

261

Intruplas

261

Polyurethane Notice Boards

262

FerrocastÂŽ Notice Board Product Selector

263

â&#x20AC;š M3 A1 Notice Board with M3 Pedestal Seats, Newby Primary School

252

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Notice Boards

Imperial A0 Notice Board, Edinburgh

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of notice boards in steel, stainless steel and cast aluminium with steel which allow information and notifications to be clearly presented within your landscape. Notice boards are available in a variety of styles and can be personalised with text, crests, logos and motifs. Ollerton Notice Boards are available in polyester powder coated steel, 316L grade satin polished stainless steel and silver anodised aluminium. Notice boards are available to coordinate with the M3, Festival and Buffalo ranges with the addition of Aviso Exterior and Combi Notice Boards. Imperial Notice Boards are manufactured from cast aluminium combined with polyester powder coated steel. They coordinate with other products under the Imperial brand. All notice boards are highly versatile, come with a variety of options, and are supplied as standard with a mechanically sealed door which is either top or side opening depending on model. Mechanically sealed doors combined with air ventilation help to minimise condensation. Sizes of notice boards vary from A1-AO and can be specified single or double sided. Notice boards are ideal for tourist areas, city centres and shopping centres where visibly identifiable information points are often required.

Ollerton Aviso Exterior Notice Board with rectangular post mounting

253

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

NTBD01

Notice Boards

N14 130

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 221 page 241 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Notice Boards M3

n M 3 Notice Boards have a simple design which is enhanced by the attractive, satin polished finish of 316L grade stainless steel. n T he M3 A1 Notice Board has a notice area measuring 594mm wide x 841mm high. It comes complete with a mechanically sealed side hinged lockable glazed door and is single post mounted. n T he M3 A0 Notice Board has a notice area measuring 1189mm wide x 841mm high. It also comes complete with a mechanically sealed top hinged lockable glazed door with gas assisted struts. It can be supplied either as a single or double sided notice board. When specified as double sided, post columns move to the end of the notice board. n N otice boards are available glazed or unglazed in polycarbonate or toughened glass and are supplied with a pinboard. n M3 Notice Boards can be supplied open fronted without door. n Notice boards are supplied with two locks for added security. n M3 Notice Boards are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard.

M3 A1 Notice Board, Newby Primary School

M3 A1 NOTICE BOARD

M3 A0 NOTICE BOARD 1310

696

Locks (2) 943

954

2173

2210

114Ă&#x2DC;

Locks (2)

114Ă&#x2DC; 1075

750 1100

100

254

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items NTBD02

Notice Boards

N14 130

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 221 page 239 page 268 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Notice Boards Festival

n F estival Notice Boards provide an ideal way to add notification areas to your landscape. n A ll notice boards within the Festival range are manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised and then powder coated in a colour of your choice. Header boards are manufactured from cast aluminium. n Visible areas on the notice boards measure 594mm wide x 841mm high for A1, 1189mm wide x 841mm high for A0 and 1440mm wide x 841mm high for Large. n F estival A1 features a mechanically sealed side hinged lockable glazed door. Festival A0 and Large feature a mechanically sealed top hinged lockable door with gas assisted struts. n F estival A1 can be supplied as a double sided notice board. (Support columns will be moved to the end.) n N otice boards are available glazed or unglazed in polycarbonate or toughened glass and are supplied with a pinboard. n All Festival Notice Boards can be supplied open fronted and without a door. n Notice boards are supplied with two locks for added security. n Festival Notice Boards are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard.

Festival A1 Notice Board, Westminster

Festival A1 Notice Board

Festival A0 Notice Board

Festival large Notice Board

1315

704

1555

Locks (2) 943

954 954

2230

114Ø 1075

114Ø

Locks ( 2) 750

1100

100 Typ

255

2294

2450

114Ø

Locks (2) 1100

1100

100 Typ

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items NTBD03

Notice Boards

N14 130

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 129 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 169

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 199 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 268

Steel and Stainless Steel Notice Boards Buffalo

n T he Buffalo is a unique hoop shaped notice board which complements other pieces of street furniture in the Buffalo range. n I t is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being powder coated in a colour of your choice. n B uffalo A1 Notice Board has a visible area measuring 594mm wide x 841mm high. It is supplied complete with a mechanically sealed side hinged lockable glazed door. n N otice boards are available glazed or unglazed in polycarbonate or toughened glass and are supplied with a pinboard. n It can also be supplied open fronted without door. n Additional text and symbols can be added to the header. n Buffalo Notice Board is supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard.

Buffalo A1 Notice Board 952

2520

Locks (2) 943

696

1075 76Ă&#x2DC;

100 Typ

Buffalo A1 Notice Board

256

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

NTBD04

Notice Boards

N14 130

Steel and Stainless Steel Notice Boards Aviso

Aviso Exterior Notice Board

Aviso Exterior Notice Board with railing mount, Tate Gallery

n A viso Notice Boards are extremely versatile and come in a number of sizes and finishes. They can be used internally and externally and some models have the option of lighting for increased visibility.

Aviso Exterior Notice Board X

n F inishes available are silver anodised aluminium or powder coated in a colour of your choice. n A viso Exterior Notice Board can be mounted to railings or to rectangular or circular posts. It can also incorporate a header board and lighting. A side hinged lockable door with gas assisted struts is supplied as standard along with 4mm toughened glass and a black magnetic backing board.

n A viso Combi Notice Board is suitable for interior as well as exterior use. It can be rail or post mounted onto square or circular posts. A top hinged door is supplied as standard along with 4mm toughened glass and a black magnetic backing board. Locks (2)

n Full details of products including dimensions can be found in the table below.

OPTIONS Dimensions Circular Rectangular Header Board Product Product Y X Rail Post Post Wall Rounded Incorporated Pin Lighting Description Reference Mounted Mounted Mounted Mounted Corners Within Board

257

Aviso Exterior Notice Board

OLAE310

790

OLAE320

820

970

OLAE330

781

582

OLAE340

1060

1350

OLAE501

1076

805

OLAE401

1450

970

n n n n n n

80mm Deep Double Sided

120mm Deep Glazing Single Polycarbonate Toughened Sided Glass

n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n

Aviso Combi in silver anodised aluminium

Aviso COMBI X

Locks (2) depending on size Y 1800

600

Aviso Combi

OPTIONS Dimensions Circular Square Header Board Product Product Y X Rail Post Wall Post Rounded Incorporated Pin Lighting Description Reference Mounted Mounted Mounted Mounted Corners Within Board Aviso Combi Notice Board

OLAC101

377

290

OLAC201

500

377

OLAC301

674

500

OLAC401

920

674

OLAC501

1268

920

n n n n n

80mm Deep Double Sided

120mm Deep Glazing Single Polycarbonate Toughened Sided Glass

n n n n n

n n n n n 258

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items NTBD05

Notice Boards

N14 130

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 41 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 104 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 185

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 231 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 236 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 269

Cast Aluminium and Steel Notice Boards Imperial

n I mperial Notice Boards have a Victorian aesthetic which is particularly suited to more traditionally styled landscapes. n T he notice boards consist of either one or two cast aluminium fluted bollards which act as the base and then either one or two posts which support the notice board. The posts and notice boards are manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised and powder coated in a colour of your choice. n Visible areas measure 594mm wide x 841mm high for A1 and 1189mm wide x 841mm high for the A0 single and double sided. n I mperial A1 Notice Board comes with a mechanically sealed, side hinged glazed door and is single post mounted. n T he A0 Notice Board comes with a cast aluminium heading, mechanically sealed top hinged door with glazed front and gas assisted struts. n N otice boards are available glazed or unglazed in polycarbonate or toughened glass and are supplied with a pinboard. n All models can be supplied open fronted and without a door. n All Imperial Notice Boards are supplied with two locks for added security. n Imperial Notice Boards are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard.

Imperial A0 Notice Board, Edinburgh

Imperial A1

Imperial A0

Imperial Large 1315

704

1555

Locks (2) 943

954 954

2250

114Ø 2294 1075

114Ø 750 2450

1100

100 Typ

259

Locks ( 2)

225Ø Typ

Locks (2)

114Ø 1100

1100

100 Typ

n I mperial Large Notice Boards, both single and double sided, have a visible area of 1440mm wide x 841mm high and come complete with a mechanically sealed, top hinged, lockable glazed door with gas struts. n W ithin the range there are two double sided notice boards, A0 double sided and Large double sided. n T he double sided notice boards consist of cast aluminium fluted bollards, finials and headings which are coated in a colour of your choice. n Text and symbols can be added to the headers of all notice boards.

Imperial Large Notice Board, Malton and Norton

Imperial A0 Double Sided

954

Imperial Large Double Sided 1476

1726

1315

1555

954 2540

2540

Locks (2) 1100

100 Typ

260

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items NTBD06

Notice Boards

N14 130

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 229

Recycled Plastic Composite Notice Boards Marshalls Street Furniture offer two Recycled Plastic Composite (RPC) notice boards which are manufactured from 100% recycled plastic and are 100% recyclable. RPC is a robust material with a high strength and is resistant to degradation, meaning it won’t rust or rot. Products have a ‘grain’ effect finish which is a result of the manufacturing process. In instances of vandalism with paint or marker pens it can be cleaned using thinners without damaging the surface of the product.

Single Bay: Measuring 850mm high x 700mm wide plus 150mm header board if required (total height 1000mm). Display area measures 750mm high x 600mm wide. When specified with glazing, display area measures 650mm high x 500mm wide.

RPC notice boards are ideal for use in parks and conservation areas as they have a natural aesthetic. Their robust design means that they can withstand most forms of attack. RPC is also a suitable replacement for timber.

Double Bay: Measuring 850mm high x 1250mm wide plus 150mm header board if required (total height 1000mm). Display area measures 750mm high x 1100mm wide. When specified with glazing, display area measures 650mm high x 900mm wide.

Notice boards come in two styles, Interpretation Board or Notice Board. The Interpretation Board is ideal for use with maps or information regarding points of interest. The Notice Board is useful for important notices where there is often a requirement for a larger display space. Each of the products comes fully assembled and is held together using stainless steel bolts.

Triple Bay: Measuring 850mm high x 1900mm wide plus 150mm header board if required (total height 1000mm). Display area measures 750mm x 1800mm wide. When specified with glazing, display area measures 650mm high x 1500mm wide.

n I nterpretation Boards available are: Small: Measuring 406mm high x 686mm wide. Medium: Measuring 762mm high x 1041mm wide. Large: Measuring 762mm high x 1194mm wide.

INTERPRETATION BOARD

261

n Notice Boards available are:

Interpretation and Notice Boards can be specified with wall or post mounting. Post heights can vary according to customer requirements. The maximum height available is 2 metres.

NOTICE BOARD

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items NTBD07

Notice Boards

N14 130

Polyurethane Notice Boards

Notice Board with Hendon Post and Ball Finial, Scarborough

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of Ferrocast速 Notice Boards which can be customised to meet your needs and to coordinate with the surrounding environment. Ferrocast Notice Boards are ideal for tourist areas and city centres where clearly presented information points are essential elements of the landscape. Ferrocast Notice Boards are durable and low maintenance. As Ferrocast is resistant to most chemicals including saline and uric acid they will not rust or corrode and are suited to a variety of locations. The Ferrocast Notice Board product selector allows you to select each component which will make up the final product. Following the easy steps you can quickly create a notice board complete with posts and finials. You may also wish to add text to the headers along with crests, logos or motifs. Notice boards can be coated in a colour of your choice from a full range of RAL colours. Contrasting colours may be used to highlight details such as the finial or any crests, logos or motifs. All notice boards come with root fixing as standard. In situations where your old cast iron notice boards have become degraded, we offer a bespoke service to recreate them in Ferrocast. We can recreate exact replicas of any design. In addition to this we offer a full bespoke service to create new designs to fit in with special schemes and projects. For further information please contact our Sales Office. 262

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items NTBD07

Notice Boards

N14 130

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 147 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 183 Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 203

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signage & Lamp Columns.. . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 247 page 271 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Notice Boards Notice Board Product Selector

n M arshalls Street Furniture offer a range of notice board systems, the components of which can be mixed and matched to create your ideal solution. n The following product selector will assist you in creating a notice board. n S imply select the post style you require and then the finial. Illustrations of posts and finials are below. Should you require a bespoke design please contact our Sales Office. n O nce you have selected your post and finial you may then select a colour. Black is the standard, however other RAL colours are available. Finials may be created in contrasting colours. n All posts are supplied with ground fixing. Typical root depth is 500mm.

Dewsbury Post and Pointed Finial with info board 1800

Pointed Finial

Ball Finial 142Ø

STOCKPORT POST

2400mm

JERSEY POST

2400mm

HENDON POST

2400mm

DEWSBURY POST

2400mm

DARTFORD POST

Dome FINIAL 110Ø

110Ø

263

182mm

255mm

34mm

n T he final part in creating your notice board system is to select the size and type of notice board that you require. n W e offer two types of notice board, infrequent use and frequent use, in two sizes, 1500mm and 1800mm wide. Other sizes are available on request. n I nfrequent Use: Can be opened by removing the fastening bolts at the top and sliding out the perspex front. Add your notice and then simply replace the perspex, top and fastening bolts. n F requent Use: Can be opened by using the top hinged door to access the notice board area. This door is supplied with two locks. n H eaders and Footers: Are available and can have text, logos, coats of arms and motifs added to customersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; requirements. n Text Size: 40mm however other sizes are available on request. n Font: Standard fonts are Times Roman and Helvetica. n Colours: Any standard RAL colours are available. n Either notice board can be supplied single or double sided. n N otice boards are manufactured from aluminium and headers/footers are polyester powder coated steel. Boards are bracket mounted to the FerrocastÂŽ posts.

Hendon Post and Ball Finial with info board 1500

Information

240mm

Information

240mm

INFO BOARD 1800

1800mm

120mm

1500mm

1000mm

120mm

INFO BOARD 1500

264

265

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Signage and Lamp Columns Steel and Stainless Steel Signage

267

Ollerton: M3, Festival and Buffalo

268

Cast Aluminium and Steel Signage

269

Imperial: Imperial and Kingston

269

Signage Options

270

Polyurethane Signage

271

FerrocastÂŽ Fingerpost Product Selector

272

Ferrocast: Name Plates

277

Polyurethane Lamp Columns

279

Ferrocast

279

â&#x20AC;š Ferrocast Finger Post with Dome Finial, Cardiff

266

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Steel and Stainless Steel Signage

Imperial Signpost, Betws-y-Coed

Signage systems are an important part of many urban landscapes. They allow for effective communication of information to pedestrians. Ollerton Fingerposts are available in polyester powder coated steel and 316L grade satin polished stainless steel. Styles are available to coordinate with the M3, Festival and Buffalo ranges; within each style there a number of design options available. In order to create your fingerpost please first select a post, then a finial, style of finger and finally the font and the justification that you will require for your text. A full reference table is on page 270 which indicates the full range of available options for each type of finger post. The Ollerton range of fingerposts comprises M3, Festival, Buffalo, Imperial and Kingston. The more traditional style Kingston and Imperial have cast aluminium fingers and embellishments. All steel and stainless steel signage systems can be personalised with crests, logos and motifs to client requirements. Should a bespoke system be required our team of designers can receive a design brief to create signage systems to fit in with a specific project or theme.

M3 Signpost, Newby Primary

267

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SNLC01

Signage Signage

N14 360 N14 320

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 221 page 241 page 254 page 297

Steel and Stainless Steel Signage M3, Festival and Buffalo

n O llerton steel and stainless steel signage systems are highly functional and come with a range of options to allow communication of directional information clearly within your landscape. n M 3 fingerpost: Manufactured from 316L grade satin polished stainless steel and comes with a dome finial. Fingers can accommodate one or two lines of text and have a rounded end and cut out arrow. n F estival fingerpost: Similar in style to M3 but formed from hot dip galvanised mild steel which is then coated in a colour of your choice. Festival is supplied as standard with a dome finial and fingers which can accommodate one or two lines of text with square ends. n B uffalo fingerpost: Manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which can then be coated in a colour of your choice. A ball finial is supplied which can be coated in a second colour to increase aesthetic appeal. Fingers can accommodate one or two lines of text and have rounded edges. Pointing fingers are also available with Buffalo fingerposts as optional extras. n Each fingerpost is supplied as standard with two single fingers. n Spacers are available for each fingerpost to leave room for future fingers. n O ptions: Each fingerpost has a number of options ranging from alternative fingers to varying fonts. Please refer to the table on page 270 for full details and illustrations. n S hould future changes be required the fingers can be removed and updated, at a lower cost than purchasing new fingers. n All fingerposts are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard.

Buffalo Signpost

M3 FINGERPOST

FESTIVAL FINGERPOST 845

838

845

X SPACER

110

89Ø

BUFFALO FINGERPOST

76Ø

89Ø 2500

150 Typ

2500

150 Typ

2500

150 Typ

268

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SNLC02

Signage

N14 320

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 231 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 236 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259

Cast Aluminium and Steel Signage Imperial and Kingston

n I mperial and Kingston Signage Systems have a time honoured aesthetic which makes them ideal for more traditional landscapes. n I mperial: Constructed from a fluted, cast aluminium bollard sleeve which houses the post. n Kingston: Manufactured from hot dip galvanised mild steel. n P osts are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then coated in a colour of your choice. Both come with a choice of finial but the standard for each is shown in the technical drawings below. n I mperial and Kingston also come with the option of single, double, triple and quadruple line fingers which are manufactured from cast aluminium. n Each fingerpost is supplied as standard with two single fingers. n Spacers are available for each fingerpost to leave room for future fingers. n I mperial and Kingston can be specified with a number of options. Please refer to the table on page 270 for full details and illustrations. n All fingerposts are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. Kingston Fingerpost

Imperial FINGERpost

Kingston FINGERpost 740 740

SINGLE LINE

DOUBLE LINE

152

DOUBLE LINE

TRIPLE LINE

214

TRIPLE LINE

SINGLE LINE

X SPACER

76Ø

114

2500

114Ø 1100

1000 230Ø 150 Typ

269

150 Typ

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SNLC03

Signage Options

n O llerton Signage Systems have a number of options which allow the standard offering to be tailored slightly for individual requirements. The full range of options is detailed on this page along with a table which shows all possibilities.

FONT AND JUSTIFICATION OPTIONS

n W e can also add a range of symbols to fingers. Some examples of these are shown below. If you have a bespoke symbol you would like to add please contact our Sales Office to discuss your requirements. n I n order to create your signpost select a post, for example M3, then select any of the relevant options. n Please refer to the illustrations on this page as a guide when creating your signpost.

FINIAL OPTIONS

FINGER OPTIONS Pointing

135Ø

Round with cut out

305Ø

Dome

Ring Square

Ball

n n

Buffalo Imperial Kingston

Pointed

Sign Finger Ends Fonts Round with Times Product Pointed Cut Out Round Square Pointing Helvetica Times New Specials 30, 35 or Description Arrow Finger Bold Roman 40mm

Festival

Round

n n n

n n n n

n n

n n n n n

n n n n n n n n

n n n n n

OPTIONS Lettering Size and Style

Column

Finials

Upper Surface & Lower Left Right Post Point Centred Spacers Trim Case Justified Justified Justified Justified Plates

Dome

Ball

Point

Ring

n n n n n

n n n

n n

n n n n n

n n n n n n n n

270

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Polyurethane Signage Ferrocast速 Signage Systems are extremely versatile which makes them ideal for communication of information in public areas. A range of signposts and notice boards are available, many of which have mix and match elements which means the final aesthetic of the product is unique to the client. Simple product selectors guide you through the process of selecting each component that you require for your signage system. A range of styles is available from simple to more traditional. Fingerposts are available in a range of RAL colours, and components can be coated in contrasting colours to enhance lettering, symbols and detailing. Fingerposts are available in five standard designs with a choice of three finials and an extensive list of configurations for fingers. Symbols can be added to fingers according to client specifications. We offer a full bespoke service whereby we can create new designs according to client requirements. Furthermore, we also offer a re-creation service whereby existing degraded iron signage systems can be replaced with exact Ferrocast replicas. For further information please contact our Sales Office.

Ferrocast Finger Post with Dome Finial, Cardiff

271

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SNLC04

Signage

N14 370

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 247 page 262 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Signage Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 1 of 4 – Post Selector

Step 1: Post Selector n The first step in creating your signage system is to select the design of post. n Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of post designs from simple to traditional. n P osts are manufactured from Ferrocast® polyurethane which is cast around a steel core. n W e also offer a bespoke capability where we can create posts to match client requirements. This could be reproductions from degraded iron or completely new designs. n Full dimensions can be found on the diagrams below. n C olour: Posts are supplied as standard in black but can be made to order in a range of RAL colours. For more information please contact our Sales Office. n Fixing: All posts are supplied with ground fixing. Typical root depths are 530mm.

114Ø

160Ø

102Ø

HENDON POST

JERSEY POST

STOCKPORT POST

3405mm

3990mm

DEWSBURY POST

3170mm

3670mm

DARTFORD POST

3575mm

Ferrocast Fingerpost

114Ø

101Ø

103Ø

147Ø

272

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SNLC04

Signage

N14 370

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 247 page 262 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Signage Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 2 of 4 – Finial Selector

Step 2: Finial Selector n The second step in creating your signage system is to select a finial for your post. n S tyle: We offer three designs, pointed, ball and dome. Should you require a bespoke finial, our design team can create either brand new designs or reproduce degraded cast iron ones. n C olour: Finials are supplied as standard in black but can be made to order in other RAL colours. You may wish to have a finial created in a contrasting colour to enhance the aesthetic of your signage system.

Wandsworth Post with Pointed Finial, Double and Quadruple Finger

Pointed FINIAL

Ball FINIAL 110Ø

110Ø

273

182mm

255mm

34mm

142Ø

Dome FINIAL

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SNLC04

Signage

N14 370

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 247 page 262 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Signage Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 3 of 4 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Finger Selector

Step 3: Finger Selector n T he third step in creating your signage system is to select the type of finger that you require. n S tyle: We offer five types of finger which have the option of full or half collars. Half collars allow two fingers to be placed at the same height on the post. Up to seven single-fingers can be placed on a post. We can also supply spacers which allow you to add fingers in the future. n C olour: Fingers are supplied in black as standard but can be supplied in a range of RAL colours on request.

Fingerpost with bespoke finial: Stockport

SINGLE FINGER

QUADRUPLE FINGER 870mm

Town Hall

DOUBLE FINGER

Town Hall Train Station Library Hospital

265mm

110mm

870mm

QUINTUPLE FINGER 870mm

TRIPLE FINGER

Town Hall Train Station Bus Station Library Hospital

315mm

Train Station Library

165mm

870mm

HALF COLLAR FINGER

Town Hall Bus Station Hospital

215mm

870mm

Library Hospital

Town Hall Train Station Bus Station

274

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

SNLC04

Signage

N14 370

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protective Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 247 page 262 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Signage Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 4 of 4 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Text Selector

Step 4: Font Selector

FONT, SIZE AND COLOUR

n T he final step in creating your signage system is to select how you would like the text and symbols to appear on each of the fingers.

Helvetica

n T ext: On average up to 20 upper case letters and 26 lower case letters can be used on a single finger. n Select the font, size and colour for your text.

Times New Roman

n F ont: Two standard fonts are available, Helvetica and Times New Roman, however we can create text in other fonts on request. n Size: 40mm is the standard size, however other sizes are available on request. n Colour: Standard font colour is white, however other RAL colours are available.

FONT STYLE (RAISED OR FLAT)

n F ont Profile: Fonts can be created either stencilled flat onto or created raised from the surface of the finger. n Border Profile: Raised borders are supplied as standard. n B order Colour: Borders can be coloured in any standard RAL colour as an additional option.

Justification

Left Justified

n J ustification: Once all text and symbols have been selected the final step in the process is to select the position of your text and symbols. The illustration shows the available options.

Left Justified Right Justified

Centre Justified

Right Justified

Centre Justified

Point Justified

Point Justified Post Justified

Post Justified

Symbols n S ymbols: We offer a range of symbols which may also be added to the finger. Some examples are illustrated, more are available on request.

n E xample: Once you have completed all the steps you can order your FerrocastÂŽ signpost. For an example specification, please refer to the right hand page. If you have any queries please contact our Sales Office for assistance. 275

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SNLC04

Signage

N14 370

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Barriers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 247 page 262 page 283 page 299

Polyurethane Signage Fingerpost Product Selector: Additional Information

n O nce you have followed the four steps you should have a specification similar to the example shown below. This will allow us to create the signpost that you require. n Please forward this information onto our Sales Office and they will raise a quotation. n A s previously mentioned Marshalls Street Furniture offer a unique bespoke capability. Our team of designers can recreate existing cast iron signposts which may have become degraded. They can also create new designs according to client requirements. n S hould you wish to have a bespoke signage system created, please contact our Sales Office who will be happy to discuss this with you.

Single Finger with Ball Finial

EXAMPLE SPECIFICATION Step 1: Post Selector

Step 4: Font Selector Times New Roman Font: Times New Roman, Upper and Lower Case Size: 40mm Colour: White Font Profile: Raised Border Profile: Raised Border Colour: Black

Post: Dewsbury Colour: RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Step 2: Finial Selector

Left Justified

Left Justified Right Justified

Right Justified

Centre Justified

Point Justified

Point Justified Post Justified

Post Justified

Finial: Dome Colour: RAL 9017 Traffic Black Text Justification: Centre Justified Text: Bus Station

Step 3: Finger Selector Town Hall

Town Hall Train Station Library Hospital

Train Station Library

Town Hall Train Station Bus Station Library Hospital

Town Hall Bus Station Hospital

Finger: Single with Full Collar Colour: RAL 9017 Traffic Black

Library Hospital

Town Hall Train Station Bus Station

Symbols: Walking Man and Bus Symbol Position: Walking Man to left of text, Bus to right of text

276

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SNLC05

Signage

N14 370

Polyurethane Signage Name Plates

Ferrocast速 has proven qualities that make it ideally suitable for the manufacture of both wall-mounted and post-mounted street nameplates. Rust-proof, corrosionproof and resistant to severe weather conditions, Ferrocast street nameplates have the advantage of retaining their appearance and clarity, thus minimising ongoing maintenance costs. We can manufacture Ferrocast street nameplates to your own specifications, and logos, crests and reflectivity can be incorporated into both modern and traditional styles.

STREET PLATE 43

382mm

MORNINGTON CRESCENT 1215mm

STREET PLATE 442

OLD SQUARE

1065mm

784mm

MOTT STREET

NAVIGATION STREET

1130mm 855mm

190mm

STREET PLATE 444

234mm

STREET PLATE 443

277

176mm

SMALLBROOKE QUEENSWAY

382mm

STREET PLATE 429

STREET PLATE 591

GRANVILLE STREET

1285mm

238mm

RUDDINGTON STREET

176mm

STREET PLATE 590

1664mm

PERSHORE ROAD

1220mm

BRASSHOUSE PASSAGE

390mm

STREET PLATE 1779

230mm

STREET PLATE 1140

1130mm

278

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items SNLC06

Polyurethane Lamp Columns

Bespoke Lamp Column

n D ue to Ferrocastâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;sÂŽ excellent resistance to corrosion, water and chemicals it is an ideal material for use in lamp columns. n There are eight designs to suit a wide range of street environments. n F lexibility in the manufacturing process means that bespoke items can be created to suit a specific client brief. n D egraded cast iron lamp columns can be recreated in Ferrocast ensuring traditional aesthetics are respected. n L amp Columns can be supplied in most RAL colours and contrasting gold banding and reflective finishes are also available. n A ll Ferrocast Lamp Columns comply with the relevant safety and electrical British Standards. n Please note that lanterns are not included. Reproduction of Historical Lamp Column

279

GEORGIAN

SOMERSET

915mm

990mm

930mm

3100mm

4100mm

SANDRINGHAM

4600mm

5000mm

MERRICK

1275mm

5500mm 1185mm

1055mm

1185mm

4400mm 1340mm

JERSEY

Product

HANOVER

3830mm

DEWSBURY

8000mm

BUCKINGHAM

Dimensions (mm) Column Column Width Housing Length

Fixing Method Ground Fixing

n n n n n n n n

Buckingham

1340

4400

275

Dewsbury

1185

8000

260

Georgian

1055

3830

256

Hanover

1185

5500

256

Jersey

1275

5000

215

Merrick

930

4600

275

Sandringham

990

4100

290

Somerset

915

3100

225

NB. Lanterns are not included

280

281

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Protective Barriers Polyurethane Protective Barriers

283

FerrocastÂŽ: Decorguard

284

Steel Protective Barriers

287

Sineu Graff: Series 2000

287

â&#x20AC;š PGR3 at 715mm high and Top Vision Rail with Court Cap, Neath Bus Station

282

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Polyurethane Protective Barriers

Pedestrian Guard Rail, Westminster

Decorative Pedestrian Guard Rails provide the means of directing pedestrians in those areas where there is a potential for them to come into conflict with traffic. They clearly mark those areas to be used only by traffic, with a physical barrier preventing pedestrians from entering the traffic zone. By directing the flow of pedestrians, they can be encouraged to use the safe road crossing zones.

A versatile system, installations can be achieved with stepped and/or radiused layouts.

In areas where pedestrians need to be separated safely from heavy traffic the combination of composite FerrocastÂŽ posts and our high quality steel panels provides the perfect solution.

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full site survey and installation service.

The system comprises mild steel posts coated with Ferrocast polyurethane combined with steel panels. Decorative cap, post and panel options mean that different configurations that best suit your scheme can be created. Bespoke designs can be commissioned on request.

283

The combination of composite Ferrocast posts and steel panels means that Decorguard Pedestrian Guardrail Systems have the added advantage of bending â&#x20AC;&#x201C; not shearing or shattering â&#x20AC;&#x201C; on impact.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PRBA01

Protective Barriers Q41 110

Bollards........................................................ page 63 Seating...................................................... page 147 Litter Bins................................................ page 183 Cycle Parking...................................... page 203

Tree Protection.................................. page 247 Notice Boards. .................................... page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns....... page 271 Post and Rail........................................ page 299

Polyurethane Protective Barriers Decorguard Decorative Guard Rail

PGR3 at 715mm high and Top Vision Rail with Court Cap, Neath Bus Station

Posts

Panels

n Composite posts are mild steel galvanised with a protective Ferrocast速 coating.

n All panels are hot dip galvanised.

n Posts are polyester powder coated to most standard RAL colours.

n Galvanised panels are supplied powder coated in most RAL colours.

n Two dimensions of post are available 89mm and 114mm.

n A s well as our standard range of high visibility panels, we can custom-make panels to your own design to enhance the character of an area.

n Optional post heights are available. n P osts are capped with decorative Ferrocast embellishments in three styles: Chancellor, Court or Regent.

n H igh Visibility Options: For areas where it is particularly important that drivers can see pedestrians, high visibility panels are available. There are three rail configurations, shown below, which are selected according to the anticipated speed of traffic flow.

Rail configurations HV 2 HV 4 HV 8

284

COURT POST

285

1134mm 1134mm 1134mm 1134mm

REGENT 5

1134mm

COURT 5

1134mm

CHANCELLOR 5

REGENT 4

1134mm

COURT 4

1134mm

CHANCELLOR 4

REGENT 3

1134mm

COURT 3

1134mm

CHANCELLOR 3

REGENT 2

1134mm

COURT 2

1134mm

CHANCELLOR 2

REGENT 1

1134mm

COURT 1

1134mm

CHANCELLOR 1

REGENT POST

1134mm

CHANCELLOR POST

Pedestrian Guard Rail Product Selector 1) PANEL OPTIONS: a) C hoose from five different styles of panel: – High Vis panel: choose from HV2, HV4 and HV8 configurations – Reduced Hi Vis panel in HV8 with top vision rail – PGR3 900mm high – PGR3 715mm high with top vision rail – PGR2 panel. b) Choose the size of panel.

2) POST OPTIONS: a) C hoose the post dimension. Dimensions of 89mm or 114mm are available. b) Choose the post height. c) C hoose the cap option. Three styles Chancellor, Court and Regent are offered.

2 metre Hi Vis panels in HV8/HV4/HV2 are available ex stock.

STOCK PGR3 at 715mm high and Top Vision Rail with Court Cap

PANEL Panel Panel Options Sizes

Post Dimension 89mm

POST OPTIONS Post Dimension Cap Post Intermediate End Corner Ramp Panel Panel 114mm Options Height 90 deg 3 deg Cupped Lugged

Hi Vis

2000 x 900 x 12mm

in any of

1500 x 900 x 12mm

HV8/HV4/HV2

1000 x 900 x 12mm

Regent

Reduced Hi Vis

2000 x 700 x 12mm

Chancellor

in HV8

1500 x 700 x 12mm

(with top vision rail)

1000 x 700 x 12mm

Regent

PGR3

2000 x 900 x 20mm

Chancellor

900mm high

1500 x 900 x 20mm

1000 x 900 x 20mm

Regent

PGR3

2000 x 715 x 12mm

Chancellor

715mm high

1500 x 715 x 12mm

(with top vision rail)

1000 x 715 x 12mm

Regent

PGR2

2000 x 870 x 12mm

Chancellor

1500 x 870 x 12mm

1000 x 870 x 12mm

3 3 3 3 3

Chancellor Court

Court

Court Regent

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Top Rail Cupped

Top Rail Stepped Lugged

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 286

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PRBA02

Protective Barriers Q41 135

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54 Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133 Litter Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 173

Steel Protective Barriers Series 2000

Series 2000 41 271, London

n S eries 2000 Protective Barriers are a highly functional and aesthetic range of steel safety barriers with unique motif infill panels.

SERIES 2000 41 271

n T he system comprises 1.56 metres or 0.86 metres wide barriers featuring a 8mm thick laser-cut motif panel or a motif panel with additional top rail with 60mm diameter and 1 metre high uprights with a choice of Classic, Modern or Contemporary caps. n A ll individual barriers are supplied fully welded. Barriers can also be supplied for fully continuous construction in component form for site assembly, each panel/ rail being riveted to connectors on the upright. n T he Series 2000 System is suitable for flat/level applications and is adaptable for direction change by welding the connectors on intermediate uprights to the required angle. The standard uprights offer 1.5 degrees of tolerance for direction change. Barriers can be stepped if a gradient is constant. n B arrier fixing options are ground, baseplate and removable. The root length is 215mm but that can be extended by use of a separate 80mm extension unit. n T he system is zinc plated and polyester powder coated and can be supplied in either one colour complete or with caps and additional top rail in a different colour. n B arriers can be supplied to the standard range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. n Series 2000 Barriers coordinate with Series 2000 Bollards (see page 54).

287

SERIES 2000 41 272

Cycle Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 201 Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243 Post and Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 295

SERIES 2000 41 261

SERIES 2000 41 263

SERIES 2000 41 265

SERIES 2000 41 264

SERIES 2000 41 266

SERIES 2000 41 262

SERIES 2000 41 231

SERIES 2000 41 232

SERIES 2000 41 233

SERIES 2000 41 234

288

289

SERIES 2000 41 253

SERIES 2000 41 251

SERIES 2000 41 256

SERIES 2000 41 254

SERIES 2000 41 255

SERIES 2000 41 252

SERIES 2000 41 241

SERIES 2000 41 242

SERIES 2000 41 221

SERIES 2000 41 222

SERIES 2000 41 211

SERIES 2000 41 212

SERIES 2000 41 281

SERIES 2000 41 282

Product Product HAG Width Weight Standard Cap Style Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Shown Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.211

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.212

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.221

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Modern

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.222

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Modern

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.231

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.232

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.233

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.234

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.241

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.242

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.251

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.252

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.253

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.254

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.255

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.256

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.261

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.262

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.263

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.264

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.265

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.266

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Classic

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.271

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.272

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.281

1000

1560

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Series 2000 Safety Barrier

41.282

1000

860

PC Metallic Grey

Contemporary

Fixing Options Baseplate

Removable

Ground

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 290

291

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Post and Rail Systems Steel and Stainless Steel Systems

293

Sineu Graff: Series 9100 Post and Rail System

295

Sineu Graff: Series 9600 Post, Rail and Wire System

296

Ollerton: M3 and Festival Post, and Rail System

297

Ollerton: M3 and Festival Post, Rail and Wire System

298

Polyurethane Systems

299

Benefits of FerrocastÂŽ

300

Ferrocast: Post and Rail Systems

301

Ferrocast: Post, Rail and Tension Wire System

308

Ferrocast: Post and Parapet System

309

Ferrocast: Bespoke Post and Panel Systems

310

Ferrocast: Bespoke Systems

311

Ferrocast: Special Features

312

â&#x20AC;š Illuminated Torbay Post and Wire System, with bespoke Ferrocast Seating, Waterside Bins and Geo Lighting by Woodhouse

292

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems

Series 9600 Stainless Steel, Bicentenary Glass House, RHS Wisley

Marshalls Street Furniture supply post and rail and post and tension wire systems in both stainless steel and steel. Post and rail systems provide the means of guiding pedestrians safely. Specifications appropriate to where they are to be installed can be created with a minimum of two and up to seven rails being specified. Ideal for locations where maximum visibility is desirable, post and wire systems feature uprights with an anti-climb profile which support rails and cables. The number of rails and cables can be selected to suit your scheme. Stainless steel systems are supplied in grade 316L stainless steel. Mild steel systems are protected against rust and can be polyester powder coated to a colour of your choice. Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full site survey and installation service.

Series 9600 front profile, RHS Wisley

293

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items Fencing Q40 430 Protective Barriers Q41 135

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems Series 9100 and Series 9600

Standard Features and Technical Information Uprights n Upright Height: 1190mm, height is modifiable to special order. n U pright Spacing: Recommended as 1.7 linear metres for best aesthetics (minimum 1.5 linear metres, maximum 2.0 linear metres). Profiles n P rofiles: i.e. The number of rails and cables are modifiable. The minimum requirement for system rigidity is two rails. n Rail Diameter: 42.4mm. n Cable Diameter: Multi strand cable is 6mm diameter. n C able Length/Radius: The recommended maximum single run length is 25 linear metres. The cable may have to be replaced by rail for small radius (please consult us). n Cable Holes: Cable holes are protected by plastic spacers. Fixing n Fixing Methods: Baseplate or root fixing is available.

Series 9100 Stainless Steel, Norfolk

n B aseplate Sizes: The standard base plate is 250mm square, with four number 18mm diameter holes; the baseplate size is modifiable to special order. n F oundation Size: The preferred spot foundation size for the standard baseplate is 400mm cube, with 400mm wide and 40mm step for a strip foundation. n S upply of Baseplate Fixings: Baseplate fixings are supplied by site as guided by project engineer. n Steel Base Plate: 10mm thick. n Steel Upright Plate: 6mm thick. n Stainless Steel Base Plate: 6mm thick. n Stainless Steel Upright Plate: 6mm thick. n M anufacture: Uprights are laser-cut and welded with flanges to baseplate. Each rail end is fitted by two rivets over a connector on the upright, using a riveter. Installation n Assembly Components: For simple assembly and installation by site all assembly components, including rivets, are supplied separately for continuous construction. n C omponents are reference stamped (where necessary) to enable site to assemble and install in line with product setting out drawings. n I nstallation must be exactly in accordance with setting out drawings, i.e. respecting baseplate centres on drawings.

Series 9100 Steel, Speke Retail Park, Liverpool

294

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL01

Fencing Q40 430 Protective Barriers Q41 135

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems Series 9100 Post and Rail System

Series 9100 with seven rails in stainless steel, Whittington Hospital

n T he Series 9100 Post and Rail System has uprights with a unique curved anticlimb profile. The system comprises 1190mm high uprights with a choice of three or seven rails. n M aterial and Finish Options: The two standard finishes are zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel or grade 316L stainless steel. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Stainless steel uprights are only supplied matt shotpeened. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; S tainless steel rails are supplied electropolished as standard or matt shotpeened if specifically requested. n Fixing: Uprights are supplied for either baseplate or root fixing. n Options: Uprights can also be supplied with a straight profile. n C olour: Mild steel is available in any standard colour; ral (high gloss), Sable (matt textured) or metallic grey; other colours to special order. n A ssembly: The system can be supplied either as fully welded complete 2 metres or 3 metres length barriers or as components of uprights, rails and rivets for construction of a continuous barrier with recommended upright centres of 2 metres (max).

Series 9100 with three rails in steel, Hillingdon Hospital

295

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL02

Fencing Q40 430 Protective Barriers Q41 135

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems Series 9600 Post, Rail and Wire System

Series 9600 Stainless Steel Post, Rail and Cable, Jersey

n T he Series 9600 Post, Rail and Wire System has uprights with a unique curved anti-climb profile. The system comprises 1190mm high uprights with two rails and six cables. n M aterial and Finish Options: Two standard finish options are available either zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel or grade 316L stainless steel. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; S tainless steel uprights are only supplied matt shot peened. Stainless steel rails are supplied electropolished as standard or matt shotpeened if specifically requested. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Cable and cable tension and anchor devices are only supplied in stainless steel. n Fixing: Uprights are supplied for either baseplate or root fixing. n Options: Uprights can also be supplied with a straight profile. n C olour: Mild steel is available in any standard colour; RAL (high gloss), Sable (matt textured) or metallic grey; other colours to special order. n A ssembly: The system is supplied as components of uprights, rails, rivets, uncut cable, spacers, cable tension and anchor devices with anti-vandal fixings for construction of a continuous barrier with maximum upright centres of 2 metres (max).

Series 9600 Steel Post and Rail with stainless steel cable, Edgley

296

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL03

Fencing

Q40 430

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems M3 and Festival Post and Rail System

M3 Post and Rail System

M3 and Festival Post and Rail System

M3 AND FESTIVAL POST AND RAIL SYSTEM

Versatile and practical, this system features uprights 1200mm high with a choice of two, three, four, five or six rails. Where appropriately specified this system will meet the requirements of BS EN 1317/BS7818 Specification for Pedestrian Restraint Systems in Metal.

1200mm

n O ptions: Where required uprights of 1400mm high are available to meet cycleway requirements as required by BS EN 1317/BS7818. n M aterial and Finish Options: â&#x20AC;&#x201C; M3: Posts and rails are 1.4401 stainless steel (Grade 316). Matt shotpeened uprights contrast with highly polished rails. Shotpeened rails can be supplied to special order. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Festival: Mild steel protected with a zinc rich coating and polyester powder coated to a colour of your choice. n Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard RAL colour. n F ixing: Uprights feature a triangular base plate with three fixing points. A root fixed alternative can also be supplied. n M odular: Standard components enable assembly to be undertaken quickly and easily. The lack of mechanical fixings ensures easy alteration or even repair after accidental impact. n Assembly: On site, the system is simple to assemble, no special tools are required. Available in steel and stainless steel

297

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL04

Fencing

Q40 430

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems M3 and Festival Post, Rail and Wire System

M3 and Festival Post, Rail and Wire System Ideal for scenic locations, this attractive system maximises visibility by using streamlined uprights and a two rail, six cable configuration. Where appropriately specified this system will meet the requirements of BSEN 1317/BS7818 Specification for Pedestrian Restraint Systems in Metal. n C ables: Cables are supplied in seven by seven configuration and manufactured from 1.4401 (316) stainless steel. Cable is supplied in uncut lengths for site installation. n C onnectors: Connectors are supplied in a swageless configuration for easy installation on site. n M aterial and Finish Options: â&#x20AC;&#x201C; M3: Posts, rails and cables are 1.4401 stainless steel (Grade 316). Matt shotpeened uprights contrast with highly polished rails. Shotpeened rails can be supplied to special order. â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Festival: Mild steel, hot dip galvanised and polyester powder coated in a colour of your choice. n Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard RAL colour. n F ixing: Uprights feature a triangular base plate with three fixing points. Root fixing is also available. n Assembly: On site the system is simple to assemble, no special tools are required.

1200mm

M3 AND FESTIVAL POST AND TENSION WIRE SYSTEM

Available in steel and stainless steel M3 Post Rail, and Wire System

298

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Polyurethane Systems

Llanelli 3 Rail Post and Rail System

Ferrocast速 Post and Rail Systems are decorative means of restricting access to potentially hazardous areas, they are ideally suited to waterfronts, on bridges and near steep inclines. Ferrocast Post and Rail Systems feature styles that can be specified to recreate a traditional look or to provide a more contemporary styling. In areas where it is necessary to continue or to refurbish existing schemes copies of historic posts can be made on request. Alternatives to post and rail systems include a post and tension wire system and a post and parapet system. Systems can be created to suit your requirements, corners and bends can be accommodated and banisters and handrails that are compliant with DDA requirements can be specified. Also facilities for chain links can be supplied to restrict access to entrances. Ferrocast post and rail is available in most standard RAL colours, a second colour may be used to highlight details. Civic crests and company logos can be incorporated into posts and schemes can be further enhanced with illuminated handrails. Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full site survey and installation service. 299

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items Fencing

Q40 430

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 271

Benefits of Ferrocast速

Ferrocast Post and Rail, Herne Bay

The Benefits of Ferrocast Polyurethane Ferrocast is an engineering grade polyurethane with a proven track record in the harsh environments of the quarrying, mining and North Sea oil industries. It is an ideal material for post and rail systems as it will withstand the demanding conditions of modern urban environments, and harsh coastal locations. Ferrocast systems comprise steel posts cast into a decorative Ferrocast outer and steel rails with a Ferrocast coating. The internal steel core gives structural strength and provides increased safety. The Ferrocast polyurethane is pigmented with a through-colour making it the same colour as the final paint finish. This means that chips and abrasions will not be apparent. Ferrocast polyurethane will not rust and offers maximum resistance to chemical corrosion including saline, uric acid (human and animal) and water.

Cast Iron Post and Steel Rail, Herne Bay

Whole Life Costing Ferrocast is a popular choice for the replacement of historic cast iron installations. Its durability ensures minimal maintenance is required and provides a maximum life expectancy. In analysis of whole life costing comparing galvanised, powder coated steel and Ferrocast, the Ferrocast system showed whole life costs less than half those of galvanised systems and less than a third of powder coated steel systems. The images on the right show a cast iron post and steel rail system four years after installation. The Ferrocast system above had been installed adjacent to it just twelve months later and after three years it showed none of the natural degradation that the cast iron system showed.

Cast Iron Post and Steel Rail, Herne Bay

300

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL05

Fencing

Q40 430

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 271

Polyurethane Systems Post and Rail Systems

Berwick Post and Rail System, Slaithwaite

Berwick Post and Rail at Slaithwaite Part of the regeneration scheme in Slaithwaite in Yorkshire involved the restoration of the old Huddersfield Narrow Canal. The requirement was for a robust, durable post and rail system that separated road and pedestrian traffic from the canal.

ANGLESEY KNEE POST

301

935mm

BUDE

1100mm

BERWICK

375mm

With funding from the Millennium Commission Lottery Project, British Waterways and Kirklees MBC, Marshalls solution was for a Berwick Post and specially designed heavy duty post calculated to P2 capabilities. Marshalls also supplied gateways and hand rails for the staircases.

Deansgate Post and Rail System, Gateshead

1134mm

DEANSGATE

1105mm

CLEETHORPES

Now offered with baseplate

1017mm

DREAM PARK

415mm

DELAVAL TRIP

302

Harbour Post and Rail with DDA handrail, Aberavon

1075mm

Harbour 2 rail

Harbour Post and Rail on steps, Aberavon

303

1347mm

Harbour 4 rail

1075mm

Harbour 3 rail

1033mm

HARTLEPOOL

900mm

JERSEY

Hartlepool Post and Rail, Sovereign Harbour

304

Llanelli 3 Rail Post and Rail, Aberavon

Early in 2006 Neath and Port Talbot County Council approached Marshalls with a requirement to create approximately 5km of post and rail and to provide a range of other street furniture that had a modern aesthetic yet was capable of withstanding the harsh coastal environment. Marshalls solution incorporated Llanelli Posts with three Rails, bollards, special oval Waterside Litter Bins and Stockport Fingerposts. As a final touch to keep the scheme modern and fresh looking, all the components were produced in white.

305

1200mm

Llanelli 6 Rail

1200mm

Llanelli 5 Rail

Llanelli 3 Rail

1200mm

Llanelli Post and Rail, Aberavon

Scarborough Post and Rail, Scarborough

577mm

Morpeth Post 1 Rail

950mm

Malvern

925mm

Scarborough

777mm

Morpeth Post 2 Rail

306

Stalybridge Post and Rail, Stalybridge

Stalybridge

307

1100mm

Treardour

901mm

Stavanger

1170mm

1100mm

Seaham

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL06

Fencing

Q40 430

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 271

Polyurethane Systems Post, Rail and Tension Wire System

Torbay Post, Rail and Tension Wire System, Torquay

Ferrocast® Post, Rail and Tension Wire System The Torbay Post and Rails System features Ferrocast uprights with an anti-climb arch, supporting a continuous hand rail at the top, a rail at the bottom and eight stainless steel cables in between. Torbay Post, Rail and Tension Wire System, Torquay Marshalls Street Furniture were involved in the regeneration of the waterfront at Torquay. The scheme required improvements to be made to the town’s seaside facilities and public area at Beacon Quay. The proposal called for new post and rail systems to go around the harbour, and the area of the boardwalk overlooking the World War II embarkation ramps. This was the site used by troops setting off for Normandy and the D-Day landings in June 1944 and was given Grade II Listing by English Heritage in 2000. Marshalls proposed that two coordinating post and rail systems with anti–climb arches were employed: the Ferrocast Llanelli; featuring different diameter rails and the Torbay tension wire system. Both are contemporary in style and were specified with a silver finish with illuminated handrails. The site also required bespoke seating to be built and was completed with the installation of four large Waterside Bins.

Illuminated Torbay Post, Rail and Tension Wire System, Torquay

308

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL07

Fencing

Q40 430

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 271

Polyurethane Systems Post and Parapet System

Bradford Post and Parapet System, Bradford

n D esigned for use on parapet applications which require low level containment the Bradford System is a decorative solution that can continue and enhance the traditional aesthetic of the surrounding area. n T he Bradford Post and Panel System is designed to meet the requirements of BS6779: Part 1 Highways Parapets for Bridges and Other Structures. n C reated in mild steel with Ferrocast embellishments, the Bradford system comprises steel posts with decorative caps in Ferrocast速 and steel panels with Ferrocast detailing.

Bradford Post and Parapet System, Warrington

309

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL08

Fencing

Q40 430

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 271

Polyurethane Systems Bespoke Post and Panel Systems

Bespoke Post and Panel System, Cardiff

Post and panel systems can be created to a clientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specifications. Specific posts used in the construction of post and rail systems can be fitted with panels to continue a scheme or alternatively a post in an existing scheme can be replicated. Bespoke Post and Rail System, Cardiff In mid 2004, Cardiff City Council wanted to replace the existing perimeter barrier around the bay with one that met three specific requirements.

1. To conform to the height requirements of the new cycle route legislation where the cycle route ran parallel to the water.

2. To replicate the existing style of perimeter barrier.

3. To be more durable than the existing perimeter barrier.

Following extensive consultation, Marshalls were able to fulfil the brief with replicated Cardiff FerrocastÂŽ Posts, 400 metres of special galvanised and powder coated panels and Stockport Fingerposts. The scheme was completed in September 2004.

Bespoke Panels used with Scarborough Posts, Scarborough

310

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL09

Fencing

Q40 430

Tree Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247 Notice Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262 Signage & Lamp Columns.. . page 271

Polyurethane Systems Bespoke Systems

Bespoke Post and Rail System, Bewdley

Ferrocast速 is a material which easily fulfils the requirements of both the designer and engineer. The flexibility of the manufacturing process means that post and rail products can be manufactured to almost any design. Bespoke Ferrocast post and rail schemes have been incorporated into many imaginative schemes to enhance the character of the area. Ferrocast allows the designer more freedom than traditional materials to create their own individual concepts. The manufacturing process means that it is a practical proposition to produce specific, unusual and colourful posts and rails. Low cost tooling helps to ensure bespoke design is an economically viable option. Bespoke System, Bewdley In February 2005 the Environment Agency and Volker Stevin approached Marshalls with a brief to develop two different post styles for an upper and lower section of post and rail for the waterside at Bewdley. In Marshalls design solution the quay post for the upper section conformed structurally to BS7818 Class 3 whilst the lower quay post was developed with an anti-climb element. By February 2006, the designs had been approved and 600 metres of bespoke post and rail had been installed with very positive feedback.

Bespoke Post and Rail, Bewdley

311

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Coordinating items PTRL10

Fencing

Q40 430

Polyurethane Systems Special Features

Special Features Include: n A lternative Rail Diameters: Can be accommodated in certain post and rail systems n I lluminated Handrails: Lighting units can be incorporated into handrails with wiring being run through continuous handrails. n P ost with Swivel Sockets: The unique swivel post and socket allows rails to be adjusted within any angle up to 37 degrees to match the gradient of any ramp, staircase or steep incline.

DDA Handrail

Alternative rail diameters, Newport

Handrail design is one of the items covered by the British Standard Code of Practice – ‘Design Of Buildings And Their Approaches to Meet the Needs Of Disabled People.’ Compliance with the standards helps designers and engineers to create streetscapes that fulfil the requirements of the Disability Discrimination Act (DDA) 1995 Part III (Duty of Providers of Services to Make Adjustments). The standards cover such items as the design of the rail and its supports, its colouring and luminance and its installation. Where installations of refurbishment need to conform to the BS 8300: 2001, most notably on flights of stairs, ramps or landings, a smooth and continuous handrail can be added by using a special fitting. The rail is easy to grip having a circular profile with an outside diameter of 50mm.

Illuminated handrail, Torbay

Swivel post with DDA Handrail, Gateshead

DDA bracket fixing, Aberavon

312

313

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Bandstands, Gazebos and Pavilions Bandstands, Gazebos and Pavilions

315

Bandstands

316

Ollerton: Burnham Bandstand

316

Ollerton: Imperial Bandstand

317

Ollerton: Monmouth Bandstand

318

Ollerton: Spa Performing Arts Bandstand

319

Shelters

320

Ollerton: Burnham Shelter

320

Ollerton: Imperial Shelter

321

Ollerton: Isis Shelter

322

Gazebos

323

Ollerton: Ollerton Gazebo

323

Ollerton: Campbell Park Gazebo

324

Pavilions

325

Ollerton: South Hampton Pavilion

325

Ollerton: West Hampton Pavilion

326

Ollerton: Oriental Pavilion

327

Bowers

328

Ollerton: Chelsea and Bleasdale Bower

328

â&#x20AC;š Burnham Bandstand

314

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Bandstands, Gazebos and Pavilions

Imperial Bandstand with Festival Benches, Hinckley

Ollerton Bandstands, Shelters, Gazebos, Pavilions and Bowers are ideal ways of adding performance, shelter and meeting areas to your landscape. A full range of styles is available ranging from traditional to Far Eastern to suit many different schemes.

Shelters are simple ways to create rest and meeting points within landscapes. They can be combined with various models of Ollerton seating to create a coordinated aesthetic. A wide range of options is available including wind break panels.

Ollerton Bandstands are ideal for parks, city centre squares and other public areas. Each has their own style and come with a number of options ranging from steel or timber roofs to electrical supply points. Both Burnham and Monmouth are predominantly constructed from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before finally being coated in a colour of your choice. Imperial is manufactured from cast aluminium and mild steel. Both are treated against rust before being coated in a colour of your choice. Imperial features cast aluminium embellishments which can be personalised with motifs.

Gazebos and pavilions are focused around users rather than creating sheltered performance spaces. Available in a range of styles they are suited to almost any landscape. All are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then coated in a colour of your choice. Structures can be personalised with motifs as well as specified with an array of options, including seating and lighting. Some models have cast aluminium embellishments to add finishing touches.

The Ollerton Spa Performing Arts Bandstand is a modern, versatile design with functional areas. Fixtures and fittings can be easily added to create an ideal venue for civic performances.

315

Marshalls Street Furniture also offer two types of bower which have been designed to allow climbing foliage to house itself around the lattices. They can be combined with seating to create colourful additions to garden areas. Both are manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being coated in a colour of your choice.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP01

Bandstands

Q50 264

Bandstands Burnham

n T he Burnham is an attractive bandstand that has an octagonal footprint which features circular detailing. It is ideal for adding a sheltered performance area to your landscape. n I t consists of various parts including a galvanised steel roof, supported by eight 168mm diameter columns made from galvanised steel, which is coated in a colour of your choice. n B urnham is available in a wide range of colours. Contrasting colours are also available to further enhance aesthetic appeal. n Burnham is available in three sizes, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. n T he following options are available; – Simple Lattice Balustrade – Full Lattice Balustrade – Timber Ceiling – Steel Ceiling – Lighting – Electrical Access Panels (two per structure) – Hanging Basket Brackets – Plaques – Motifs – Demountable/Hinged Balustrade – Other finials are available.

Burnham Bandstand

BURNHAM

ACROSS FRAME

G C E

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Burnham Bandstand

10FT

3970

3240

895

2345

2450

3100

2635

14FT

4615

4300

1315

2540

2640

4300

3680

21FT

5500

6430

2175

2650

2750

6500

5750

316

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP02

Bandstands

Q50 264

Bandstands Imperial

n T he Imperial is a traditionally styled bandstand with an octagonal footprint and featuring cast embellishments which has been designed to fit in with more Victorian style landscapes. n I t consists of various parts including a galvanised steel roof, supported by eight 168mm diameter columns made from galvanised steel, which is coated in a colour of your choice. n Three sizes are available, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. n I mperial is available in a wide range of colours. Contrasting colours are also available to highlight casting detail. n T he following options are available: – Simple Lattice Balustrade – Full Lattice Balustrade – Timber Ceiling – Steel Ceiling – Lighting – Electrical Access Panels (two per structure) – Hanging Basket Brackets – Plaques – Motifs – Other Finials available.

Imperial Bandstand

IMPERIAL

B A

ACROSS FRAME

D H C

317

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Imperial Bandstand

10FT

4070

3240

820

2220

2550

3100

2635

1000

14FT

4775

4300

1250

2470

2800

4300

3655

1000

21FT

5715

6430

2110

2470

2800

6500

5275

1000

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP03

Bandstands

Q50 264

Bandstands Monmouth

n M onmouth is a highly versatile bandstand which can change in appearance and personality by choice of colour. It has an octagonal footprint. The roof and columns can be coated in colours of your choice. n I t consists of various parts including a steel roof, supported by lattice infill columns made from galvanised steel, which is coated in a colour of your choice. n A lternative columns are also available and in-fills can be customised to individual requirements. n Monmouth is available in three sizes, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. n T he following options are available: – Simple Lattice Balustrade – Full Lattice Balustrade – Lighting – Hanging Basket Brackets – Plaques – Motifs – Other Finials available.

Monmouth Bandstand, Ilfracombe

MONMOUTH

ACROSS FRAME

G D

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Monmouth Bandstand

10FT

3920

3240

720

2275

2400

3100

2635

14FT

4400

4300

1135

2230

2400

4300

3650

21FT

5390

6430

1695

2315

2475

6500

5720

318

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP04

Bandstands

Q50 264

Bandstands Spa Performing Arts

n T he Ollerton Spa Performing Arts Bandstand provides the perfect venue for organised or impromptu events. It has been specially designed with fixtures so that curtains, props and staging can easily be added. n T he cantilevered roof is supported by 168mm diameter columns, braced by intermediate arch panels. n T he following options are available: – Simple Lattice Balustrade – Full Lattice Balustrade – Lighting – Electrical Access Panels (two per structure) – Hanging Basket Brackets – Side Awning Mountings – Plaques – Demountable/Hinged Balustrade – Guttering – Stage Curtain Rail Mounting Points – Roof Eve Friezes – Flag/Banner Poles.

Spa Performing Arts Bandstand

PERFORMING ARTS

A C

ACROSS FRAME

PLAN SHOWS BALUSTRADES DEMOUNTED

319

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Spa Performing Arts Bandstand

3035

6500

5755

21FT

6070

6430

5845

3150

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP05

Shelters

Q50 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123

Shelters Burnham

n T he Burnham is a highly functional octagonal shelter which can be used to create covered spaces within your landscape. It is ideal for protecting seating areas from the weather. n B urnham is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before finally being coated in a colour of your choice. n It is available in 10ft, 14ft and 21ft sizes. n T he following options are available: – Simple Lattice Balustrade – Full Lattice Balustrade – Timber Ceiling – Steel Ceiling – Lighting – Electrical Access Panels (two per structure) – Hanging Basket Brackets – Plaques – Motifs – Seating – Space Heaters – Wind Break Panels. Burnham Shelter

BURNHAM SHELTER

B ACROSS FRAME G

A C E

Motifs

Seating

Timber Ceilings

Hanging Basket Bracket

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Burnham Shelter

10FT

3970

3240

895

2345

2450

3100

2635

14FT

4615

4300

1315

2540

2640

4300

3680

21FT

5500

6430

2175

2650

2750

6500

5750

320

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP06

Shelters

Q50 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123

Shelters Imperial

n T he Imperial is a traditionally styled octagonal shelter which can be used to enhance seating areas and provide cover from the elements. n I mperial is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before finally being coated in a colour of your choice. Imperial also features castembellishments which are manufactured from aluminium. n It is available in 10ft, 14ft and 21ft sizes. n T he following options are available: – Simple Lattice Balustrade – Full Lattice Balustrade – Timber Ceiling – Steel Ceiling – Lighting – Electrical Access Panels (two per structure) – Hanging Basket Brackets – Plaques – Motifs – Seating – Space Heaters – Wind Break Panels. Imperial Shelter

IMPERIAL SHELTER

B A

ACROSS FRAME

D H C

321

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Imperial Shelter

10FT

4070

3240

820

2220

2550

3100

2635

1000

14FT

4775

4300

1250

2470

2800

4300

3655

1000

21FT

5715

6430

2110

2470

2800

6500

5725

1000

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP07

Shelters

Q50 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123

Shelters Isis

n T he Isis is a uniquely styled shelter which can incorporate curved or straight seating. n I sis is formed in mild steel with cast roof eave corner rosettes, hot dip galvanised and coated in two colours of your choice. n T he following options are available: – Seating – Side, Central or Rear Wind Break Panels.

Isis Shelter

ISIS SHELTER B

TYP

Product A B C D Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) E F

Isis Shelter

2150

1200

750

800

1725

1700

3400

3750

1850

2000

3750

322

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP08

Shelters

Q50 292

Gazebos Ollerton

n O llerton and Campbell Park Gazebos are ideal ways to create sheltered spaces within gardens, parks and public areas. Their modular design means that columns, balustrade panels and even colours can be customised for total individuality. n O llerton Gazebo is an octagonal structure formed in mild steel which is hot dip galvanised and then coated in a colour of your choice. It comes in three sizes, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. n C ampbell Park is also an octagonal structure and can incorporate cast motifs within rings, different columns, arches and balustrade panels. Two sizes are available, 10ft and 14ft. n T he following options are available: – Simple Balustrade Panel – Plaques – Motifs – Dragon Chaser – Full Lattice Balustrade – Railing Balustrade – Seating – Lighting – Other Column Designs. Ollerton Gazebo

Customised Options

OLLERTON GAZEBO

n A rch Decoration: These can be altered to your specification.

n L attice Column: Other designs are possible.

ACROSS FRAME G

n S eating: A Bleasdale fitted bench can be mounted in the gazebo.

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Ollerton Gazebo

10FT

3920

3240

720

2275

2400

3100

2635

14FT

4400

4300

1135

2230

2400

4300

3650

21FT

5390

6430

1695

2315

2475

6500

5720

N.B For the 10ft gazebo base pads 500mm square by 300mm deep can be used instead of the base slab, subject to satisfactory ground conditions.

323

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP09

Shelters

Q50 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123

Gazebos Campbell Park

Campbell Park Gazebo

CAMPBELL PARK

ACROSS FRAME

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Campbell Park Gazebo

10FT

4150

3240

765

2320

2630

3100

2620

14FT

4600

4300

1180

2320

2630

4300

3745

324

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP10

Shelters

Q50 292

Pavilions South Hampton

n W est and South Hampton Pavilions can help add a touch of charm to gardens, parks or public areas. We offer a choice of styles, heights, decorative features and colours to allow you to create a truly unique pavilion. n S outh Hampton Pavilion is octagonal in shape and is manufactured from mild steel which is galvanised and finished with a colour of your choice. n South Hampton is available in 9ft and 12ft sizes. n T he following options are available: – Plaques – Windbreak Panels – Seating. n C ast Maple Leaf: Allows rain water to issue forth from roof eave corners.

n C ast Oak Leaf: An alternative roof eave corner detail.

South Hampton Pavilion

B A

ACROSS FRAME

G D

E C

325

D C

Min. across flats of concrete base slab

SOUTH HAMPTON

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

South Hampton Pavilion

9FT

4300

2720

825

2375

2400

3000

2720

12FT

5350

3660

1215

2765

2790

4150

3660

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP11

Shelters

Q50 292

Pavilions West Hampton

n W est Hampton Pavilion is octagonal in shape and is manufactured from mild steel which is galvanised and finished with a colour of your choice. n West Hampton is available as a 9ft Pavilion. n T he following options are available: – Plaques – Windbreak Panels – Seating.

West Hampton Pavilion

ACROSS FRAME

G D

Min. across flats of concrete base slab

SOUTH HAMPTON

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

West Hampton Pavilion

2375

3000

2720

9FT

3800

2720

825

2400

326

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP12

Shelters

Q50 292

Pavilions Oriental

n O riental is an exquisite pavilion which has a beautiful Far Eastern aesthetic. It features a unique shaped roof which has contrasting colour detailing. Roof eaves are also embellished with castings to further enhance aesthetic appeal. n T he Oriental is manufactured from mild steel which is galvanised and coated in a colour of your choice. It is available in 9ft or 12ft sizes. n T he following options are available: – Plaques – Windbreak Panels – Seating.

Oriental Pavilion

ORIENTAL PAVILION

B B

ACROSS FRAME

327

Product Size A B C Description

DIMENSIONS (mm) D E

Oriental Pavilion

9FT

5200

3150

885

2240

2450

3100

2845

12FT

6350

4050

1180

2525

2990

4300

3745

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

BGAP13

Shelters

Q50 292

Seating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 131

Planters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 224

Bowers

Chelsea and Bleasdale

n T he Chelsea and Bleasdale Bowers are available with square lattice framework, with or without a bench, in standard form with 25mm x 5mm lattice and 30mm x 30mm frame. n I f required they can be manufactured with extra heavy duty 30mm x 5mm lattice and 40mm x 40mm frame. A heavy duty bench made with 40mm x 40mm frame can also be supplied. n C helsea Bower is bolted down using four expansion bolts through its base, the Bleasdale uses six. n Both bowers can be coated in a colour of your choice. n T he following options are available: – Spigot Mounting using four or six Long Ground Fixings – Extra Heavy Bower – 180 degree Bench – Finial (Bleasdale only).

Chelsea Bower

CHELSEA BOWER

BLEASDALE BOWER

2600

2500

900

1800 1250

2500

328

329

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Traffic Calming and Management Systems Traffic Calming and Management Systems

331

S-Ramp

333

Speed Cushions Plateau Domed

335

Traffic Ramps Planar Sinusoidal

337

Speedcheck

339

Keycheck

340

Traffic Islands Satellite Island Refuge Island

341

Interlocking Traffic Block

342

Safety Barrier Systems Delta Bloc 80

343

â&#x20AC;š Natural S-Ramp, Crossways Business Park, Dartford

330

331

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Traffic Calming and Management Systems Marshalls range of traffic calming systems are designed to improve environments for vehicular and pedestrian traffic through proactive traffic management. Designed to improve the livability of trafficked environments, Marshalls products provide a safe and secure traffic management solution for all users. Marshalls traffic calming products are aesthetically pleasing and proven in use for a variety of applications ranging from Homezones, adoptable estate roads to highways either new or existing. The accurate preformed shapes and profiles of Marshalls traffic management products, produced by quality controlled manufacturing processes, ensure compliance to standards and specifications. Legislation n A ll products illustrated are designed to be installed in the highway giving due regard to the appropriate legislation and standards. n 1 999 No 1025: Highways, England and Wales. The Highways (Road Hump) Regulations 1999. n 1 999 No 1026: Highways, England and Wales. The Highways (Traffic Calming) Regulations 1999. In addition to Marshalls traditional range of concrete traffic calming products, architects and specifiers are beginning to look at the use of street furniture, such as bollards, barriers and planters to influence the speed and flow of traffic, particularly with the introduction of the Homezones. Manual Handling n T he recommendations of the Manual Handling Operation Regulations 1992 should be complied with.

â&#x20AC;š FerrocastÂŽ Swansea Bollard, High Street, London

332

333

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

TMCO04

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

S-Ramp

Pre-Cast Reinforced Concrete Road Hump

Colours

n S -Ramp is a pre-formed segmental sinusoidal profiled ramp system acknowledged as giving the best ride-over quality for all vehicles including buses and emergency vehicles, which cannot be achieved using in-situ methods.

Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

Pimple

n Enables road humps or table tops of 75mm high to be constructed. n P rovides a highly effective, speed reducing transition from the carriageway to the surface of the road hump table top, compatible with Concrete Block Paving and black top. n Alternatively S-Ramp units can be installed back to back to form a road hump.

Red

n Units can be laid kerb-to-kerb using standard pieces only.

Textured

Buff

Marigold

Natural*

n A lternatively a free-standing table can be achieved by the inclusion of corner and side units. n D urable construction makes the system low maintenance reducing whole life costings.

Red

n O ptimised thickness allows for haunching of the unit to aid stability, coupled with keyed base profile improving the resistance to imposed vehicle loads. n S-Ramp is suitable for use in all forms of carriageway construction. Note: The joint between the adjacent units needs to be sealed with M-Flex or alternative material approved by an engineer.

Reference

Length (mm)

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Red (Ref No.)

Buff (Ref No.)

Marigold (Ref No.)

Natural (Ref No.)

Pimple S-Ramp Standard

914

200

180-255

RK9701500

RK9701000

RK9702000

RK9700500

S-Ramp Corner – high, right hand

914

200

180-255

RK9761510

RK9761010

RK9762010

RK9760510

S-Ramp Corner – low, right hand

914

200

180-217.5

RK9781510

RK9781010

RK9782010

RK9780510

S-Ramp Corner – high, left hand

914

200

180-255

RK9761500

RK9761000

RK9762000

RK9760500

S-Ramp Corner – low, left hand

914

200

180-217.5

RK9781500

RK9781000

RK9782000

RK9780500

S-Ramp Side – high

914

200

217.5-260

105

RK9721500

RK9721000

RK9722000

RK9720500

S-Ramp Side – low

914

200

180-217.5

RK9741500

RK9741000

RK9742000

RK9740500

Textured S-Ramp Standard

914

200

180-255

RK9811500

RK9812000

RK9810500

S-Ramp Corner – high, right hand

914

200

180-255

RK9841510

RK9842010

RK9840510

S-Ramp Corner – low, right hand

914

200

180-217.5

RK9851510

RK9852010

RK9850510

S-Ramp Corner – high, left hand

914

200

180-255

RK9841500

RK9842000

RK9840500

S-Ramp Corner – low, left hand

914

200

180-217.5

RK9851500

RK9852000

RK9850500

S-Ramp Side – high

914

200

217.5-260

105

RK9821500

RK9822000

RK9820500

S-Ramp Side – low

914

200

180-217.5

RK9831500

RK9832000

RK9830500

S-Ramps with reference numbers indicated in bold black are available ex-stock. S-Ramps with reference numbers indicated in light black are manufactured to order. Contact our sales office to discuss your requirements. *Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible. ‹ Natural S Ramp, Leeds Valley Business Park, West Yorkshire

334

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Coordinating items TMCO05

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Speed Cushions Reinforced Concrete Cushion

Speed Cushions, Southowram Junior and Infant School, Halifax

Colours n T wo Speed Cushion designs are offered to reduce speeds of traffic with differing characteristics to different levels.

Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

n T he cushions comply with the Traffic Advisory Leaflet issued by the DfT, October 1994. n One piece structural units designed to withstand all traffic loadings. n Easy installations and low maintenance reduces whole life costings. n Dimensional accuracy ensures compliance to design standard.

Red

Black

Buff

Natural*

n Coloured concrete contrasts with road surface increasing visibility to road users. Plateau Speed Cushion n A reinforced concrete cushion with a plateau top of 70mm. n A range of widths is available to suit different traffic management and vehicle requirements. n A pproach/exit ramp of 1:8:6 and side slope of 1:4:3 optimised for effective performance. n Available in red although other colours can be made to order. Domed n A reinforced concrete cushion with a dome of 65mm high. n Rewards drivers travelling at an appropriate speed with a smoother crossing. n A more suitable solution than the Plateau for areas with numerous bus movements.

*Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible.

335

Plateau Speed Cushion

Domed Speed Cushion

Speed Cushion

Length (mm)

Width* (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Red (Ref No.)

Black (Ref No.)

Buff (Ref No.)

Natural (Ref No.)

SP1 Plateau

1900

205

1450

TCSP10000

SP1-TCSP11000

SP1-TCSP12000

SP1-TCSP13000

SP2 Plateau

1900

1600

205

1245

TCSP20000

SP2-TCSP21000

SP2-TCSP23000

SP2-TCSP22000

SP3 Plateau

1900

1750

205

1365

TCSP30000

SP3-TCSP31000

SP3-TCSP32000

SP3-TCSP33000

SP1-TCSP12100

SP1-TCSP13100

Plateau

Lifting Loops M20 Swivel (pk 4)

RELIF0001

Domed SP1 Domed

1900

200

1470

TCSP10100

Lifting Loops M20 Swivel (pk 4)

SP1-TCSP11100 RELIF0001

Speed cushions available ex-stock.

336

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Coordinating items TMCO03

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Traffic Ramps

Pre-Cast Reinforced Concrete Road Hump

Pedestrian Crossing, Ridgeway, Arnold

n T raffic ramps are reinforced pre-cast concrete ramp units that form part of a road hump installation. n T he central plateau section of the road hump can be constructed from material to suit the application from concrete block paving to black top. n T he substantial size and weight of the units ensures suitability in locations such as arterial routes where traffic is heavy and faster moving. n Across a horizontal distance of 1 metre the profile creates a ramp 70mm high. n Ease of installation technique ensures right-first-time construction. n Low maintenance reduces whole life costings. n C ompared with in-situ construction techniques, pre-formed profiles require less skilled workmanship to achieve the correct profile. n Available in two profiles, Planar and Sinusoidal.

Sinusoidal n S inusoidal has a textured finish and Sinusoidal ramp profile is acknowledged to give the best ride quality. n Rewards drivers travelling at the appropriate speed with a smooth ride. n More suited to areas with numerous bus movements. n Available in three colours as standard with other colours to special order.

Colours Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations. Planar

Planar Traffic Ramp n Planar has a concrete block paving style finish. n Ramp profile being in one plane. n Robust structure with proven capability to withstand normal highway loading.

Red

Black

Sinusoidal

n Range of widths allows kerb-to-kerb installation to within 100mm. n The Planar profile rewards a slower speed of traverse and is suited to areas where a greater reduction in speed is required. n Available in two colours as standard with other colours to special order. Red

Natural*

*Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible.

337

Planar

Traffic Ramp

Length (mm)

Sinusoidal

Width* (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Red (Ref No.)

Black (Ref No.)

Planar

1200

1500

200-270

1120

TRSR30000

TRSR30002

1200

1400

200-270

960

TRSR31400

TRSR31402

1200

1300

200-270

890

TRSR31300

TRSR31302

1200

200-270

820

TRSR31200

TRSR31202

1200

1100

200-270

750

TRSR31100

TRSR31102

1200

1000

200-270

680

TRSR31000

TRSR31002 TRSR30902

Natural (Ref No.)

1200

900

200-270

610

TRSR30900

Sinusoidal

1210

1500

200-270

1030

TSRB01500

1210

1400

200-270

960

TSRB21400

1210

1300

200-270

890

TSRB01300

TSRB21300

1210

1200

200-270

820

TSRB01200

1210

1100

200-270

750

TSRB01100

1210

1000

200-270

680

TSRB01000

TSRB21000

1210

900

200-270

610

TSRB00900

TSRB20900

RELIF0001

Lifting Loops M20 Swivel (pk 4)

*Other sizes to special order. Traffic ramps with reference numbers indicated in bold black are available ex-stock. Traffic ramps with reference numbers indicated in light black are manufactured to order. Contact our Sales Office to discuss your requirements.

338

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Coordinating items TMCO01

Q25 215 Q25 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Speedcheck Concrete Road Hump

Housing development, Castleford, West Yorkshire

Colours n U nique product acts as a restraint and starter block for 1:10 ramp slopes to be constructed in block paving, however, ramps of 1:15 can also be constructed.

Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

n A cubic shape intended for use with flexibly laid concrete block paving, although other materials can be used. n S ize and finish complements concrete block paving allowing aesthetic consideration in road hump design for conservation or residential areas.

Red

Charcoal

Natural*

n Ramp lengths of 1000mm will create a height of 100mm (maximum advised). n I nstallation causes minimum disruption to carriageway, as excavation is only required beneath the ramp areas. n Units easily cut on site. n Available in three colours.

Length Width Height (mm) (mm) (mm)

Unit Weight (kg)

Red (Ref No.)

Charcoal (Ref No.)

Natural (Ref No.)

Speedcheck

19.3

PV8401500

PV8400500

PV8400250

200/220/200

200

Approximate number of units per metre width = 5. Speedcheck available ex-stock. *Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible.

339

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Coordinating items TMCO02

Q25 215 Q25 225

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Keycheck

Rumble Strip and Deterrent Paving

Car park, office facility, West Yorkshire

Colours n Installed in a line forming a rumble strip across the carriageway.

Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather than photographic representations.

n I deal for use with concrete block paving although can be used with other surfacing materials. n W hen installed in alternating directions forms vehicular and pedestrian deterrent paving.

Red

Charcoal

Natural*

n T he small plan size allows complicated or irregular areas to be installed relatively easily. 15

n Available in three colours.

200

Length Width Height (mm) (mm) (mm)

Unit Weight (kg)

Red (Ref No.)

Charcoal (Ref No.)

Natural (Ref No.)

Keycheck Rumble Strip

6.6

PV8351500

PV8350500

PV8350250

200

60/75

Approximate number of units per metre width = 5. Keycheck available ex-stock. *Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible.

340

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

TMCO06

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Traffic Islands One Piece Concrete Traffic Islands

Satellite n A Satellite Island is a one piece reinforced concrete pre-formed traffic island for discrete islands, including a circular aperture for a bollard.

– One piece construction ensures ease of installation with fewer operations on-site resulting in a speedier installation reducing road closure time.

– Pre-formed in factory controlled conditions to ensure accuracy.

– Offered in a half battered kerb profile as BS EN 1340:2003

– Speed of installation and low maintenance reduces whole life costings.

– 2 x M16 lifting sockets cast into product.

– Central aperture of 350mm diameter for installation of bollard.

Refuge n A Refuge Island is a one piece reinforced concrete pre-formed traffic island including an aperture for an illuminated ‘keep left’ bollard.

– One piece construction ensures ease of installation with fewer operations on-site resulting in a speedier installation reducing road closure time.

– Pre-formed in factory controlled conditions to ensure accuracy.

– Offered in a half battered kerb profile as BS EN 1340:2003

– 3 x M16 lifting sockets cast into product.

– 400-450mm aperture for ‘keep left’ bollard.

Length (mm)

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Satellite Islands

1500

610

170

670

M16 Lifting Loops

TDSAT0000 RELIF0002

Refuge Islands

1800

260

1587

TIMEA1800

1500

260

959

TIMEA1500

1200

260

581

M16 Lifting Loops

Islands available ex-stock.

341

Natural (Ref No.)

TIMEA1200 RELIF0002

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement

Coordinating items

Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

TMCO07

Q41 135

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Ref No.

Interlocking Traffic Block Temporary Concrete Traffic Blocks

n C ircular concrete blocks connected by means of a galvanised bar attached to a central bolt. n U sed for the construction of temporary traffic islands and junctions allowing trials to be undertaken without the costs of excavation. n F lexible and versatile to allow any size or shape of traffic island to be constructed. n Units can be reused time and time again ensuring cost-effectiveness. n Ease of handling and connection results in a speedy installation.

Temporary junction, Braintree

Length (mm)

Width (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Grey (Ref No.)

White (Ref No.)

Black Paint (Ref No.)

Yellow Paint (Ref No.)

Interlocking Traffic Block

225

300

150

21.5

FM7500100

FM7500200

FM7500300

FM7500400

Locking Bar for Traffic Block

FM7505000

Traffic Block Stanchions

FM7505100

930

Traffic blocks available ex-stock.

342

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement Sales Office: 0845 3040708 Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk

Coordinating items TMCO08

Q41 135

Bollards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

Protective Barriers.. . . . . page 283

Safety Barrier Systems Delta Block 80

n A s our roads and highways become more congested each year, accidents are inevitably on the increase. n D elta Bloc 80 is a unique concrete safety barrier system, designed specifically to control the impact of a crash. n D esigned and tested to BS EN 1317 – 1 & 2: 1998 and BS 8110, the elements can be placed unfixed to the road surface. n T he interaction of its weight, additional displacement space and patented tension bar and coupling make it possible to absorb high energy levels. n T he risk to passengers in the vehicle is much lower than that of rigid systems. Crash tests have clearly shown that the additional displacement space in the event of an accident results in considerable reduction of the Acceleration Severity Index (ASI). n A t the heart of the system is a special coupling that links the barriers and the integrated tension bars together. n D elta Bloc 80 is a pre-cast concrete rigid safety barrier system that offers protection for containment levels N1 and H1 and means that the forces produced in any impact are absorbed throughout the entire length of the barrier. n The system’s flexibility allows it to be used permanently or temporarily. n M arshalls offer the Delta Bloc 80 system on a supply and fit basis, installed by our own operatives using Moffett Fork Lift off-loading to industry best health and safety practices.

Performance n D elta Bloc 80 is tested and used extensively throughout Europe in containment level H1, and is manufactured under licence from Delta Bloc Europa GmbH. n A pproved by the Highways Agency to containment level N1, requiring a working width of only 1.09 metres. n C omplies with Interim Requirements for Road Restraint Systems (IRRRS) and Interim Advice Note 44/02: Appendix 2 documents. n M arshalls manufacturing and installation team have gained Sector Scheme SS2B certification. n C haracteristic profile ensures that there is no vehicle body contact if the impact occurs at a shallow angle – ensuring the vehicle is left manoeuvrable and the barrier undamaged.

Vehicle guidance safety barrier, Blackpool

n W ith direct collisions, the front wheel impacting the barrier is generally destroyed. This increases the rolling resistance dragging the vehicle along the face of the barrier and preventing it from being dragged onto the carriageway – reducing the risk of secondary collisions.

n S imple to install, the installation requires only positioning of the barrier and placement of the coupling.

n V ehicles are prevented from ‘breaking through’ the barrier by the patented tension bar and coupling arrangement. The tension bar has a precise tensile force that absorbs the impact energy.

343

n D elta Bloc 80 units are not ‘handed’ therefore they do not require turning from verge to central reserve installation. n M 24 x 400mm anchor bolts for the termination units and self-adhesive reflectors are available.

n T he coupling is designed by optimising the acceptable deflection with the reduction of ASI and the associated injury to the vehicle occupants.

Alternative Use

n Drainage apertures cast in the base allow for surface water drainage.

n D elta Bloc 80 can be used for many non-highway applications such as perimeter security, lane segregation, temporary flood defences and entrance barriers.

Baffle plate The Baffle Plate lifts the vehicle, transforming the impact energy and diminishing the overturning moment. Most impacts occur at small angles up to 2ยบ and/or at low speeds. In this instance, the vehicle is redirected off the repellent plate into its proper course

Tension Bar and Coupling

Repellent Plate In the event of heavy impact at high speeds and wide angles, the Repellent Plate prevents break through, providing optimum safety by interacting with the continuous bar

Base Plate The base plate is designed to give stability to the system and allows drainage to the kerb-side

Delta Bloc 80

Termination Unit

Unit

Length (mm)

Width* (mm)

Height (mm)

Weight (kg)

Ref No.

Intermediate

4000

600

800

2240

DB0804000

Termination

4000

300-600

170-800

1690

DB0804001

Coupling

REDEL0001

Reflectors Red

DB0000001

Delta Bloc 80 available ex-stock.

344

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS01

Materials Specification

Concrete Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

Monoscape

Colours and Finishes

Two types of concrete are used in the manufacture of Monoscape products; standard concrete and self compacting concrete. Standard concrete is a simple mix of cement and aggregate, such as gravel, with water. Self compacting concrete has additional strength and does not require vibrating, which makes the manufacturing process more efficient.

Marshalls Concrete Products are available in four finishes and a number of different colours which can be matched to coordinate with our ranges of paving. Finishes available are ground, exposed, etched and polished. Patterned finishes are also available. Stencils are placed over the product and then sandblasted. The result is a patterned effect on the surface of the product. Marshalls also offer a silver grey colour which makes use of waste from the china clay industry. Small pieces of granite found in the clay are removed and normally disposed of. The granite particles are used by Marshalls as aggregate for products made in silver granite colour. This not only gives a unique finish but also offers environmental benefits by reducing waste.

Marshalls Street Furniture uses a number of grades of concrete in our products. Each type is of the highest quality and always fit for purpose. Marshalls test quality control cubes of concrete to ensure that they reach a minimum specification of 30 N/mmÂ˛ at 28 days old. This ensures that products are of the highest quality. All concrete is tested in accordance with EN 12390-3:2001. Concrete in general offers many benefits when used as a material for street furniture products. Some of these benefits include: Durability Concrete street furniture products are strong and extremely robust which means they can withstand many forms of physical attack. Concrete products are also reinforced with steel to add further structural strength. Resistance to Corrosion Concrete will not rust or corrode and as a result can be a consideration for coastal locations. This ensures longevity of products and ultimately value for investment.

Smooth Grey

Smooth White

Exposed Silver Grey Exposed Cream

Exposed White

Exposed Black

Exposed Brown

Exposed Black/White Exposed River Gravel Etched Silver Grey

Etched Pale Buff

Beadalite

New mixes to coordinate with Marshalls Paving Conservation

Harvest Buff

Charcoal

Silver Grey

Buff

Charcoal

Red

Marigold

Ground

Exposed

Etched

Patterned

Saxon

Natural

Finishes

Polished

Maintenance Concrete street furniture requires little or no maintenance. Should products become soiled, which is normal over time, they can be cleaned using the appropriate equipment. Where soiling occurs cleaning with a sweeping brush, water and mild detergent/non-acidic detergent can remove surface dirt and discoloration.

345

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS01

Materials Specification

Concrete Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

Bellitalia Concrete Products

Polished Concrete

Bellitalia Concrete Products are manufactured using Pozzolanic concrete. Pozzolanic concrete contains pozzolans which are siliceous and aluminous materials with little or no cementing properties. When added to cement, pozzolans will, in the presence of moisture, react with calcium hydroxide at normal temperatures to form a compound with cementitious properties. Commonly used pozzolans are fly ash and volcanic ash.

Bellitalia also offer a range of polished concrete products in which pieces of marble are added to the pozzolanic mix to create a unique aesthetic. This is then put through a unique polishing process before being coated in a clear varnish to give a fine, lustrous, polished finish.

Pozzolanic concrete offers the following benefits when used in street furniture applications:

Polished concrete products are available in seven different colours.

Increased Strength As concrete cures free lime is formed, with pozzolanic filler in the concrete the resultant reaction, when water is present, will fill the voids in the concrete. The pozzolanic reaction will occur whilst the concrete is still plastic thus preventing any expansive failure. The benefit of this is a more durable and stronger concrete. Increased Durability The reduced volume of pores in pozzolanic concrete help to prevent the ingress of water born chemicals such as sulphates and chlorides. This reduces the risk of failure from ground sulphates, acids and sea water, making these products suitable for use in all environments.

Colours

Rosso

Bianco

Nero

Porfido

Giallo

Veneziano

Verde

Colours Concrete products are available in two colours, silver grey and dark grey as standard. Black is available as a special order.

346

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS02

Materials Specification

Natural Stone Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

Granite is formed from the cooling of molten rock; this violent elemental process combined with the presence of different proportions of minerals in each deposit produces striking crystalline structures in a wide range of subtle colours. No two pieces of granite are identical. Each piece is custom made enabling you to choose the colours and textures of your individual piece or suite of furniture. Natural stone offers the following benefits: Quality Control Only first grade granite is used in our street furniture products. This means that they are free from veining and spots which can often lower the overall aesthetic appeal of the stone. Our supplier is externally accredited with ISO9001 QA system. Marshalls also have a dedicated quality control team member who inspects the quality of the granite before manufacture. Ethically Sourced Marshalls was the first hard landscape manufacturer to become a member of the Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI). Our granite is sourced from an ETI audited supplier to ensure compliance with the ETI Base Code. Durability Granite is an extremely strong material and is ideal for use in street furniture applications. It is resistant to staining and non-permeable which ensures a product with a long life. Granite is also resistant to scratching.

Maintenance As granite is virtually inert it requires very little maintenance and can be cleaned using a power washer.

Colours Geoform Furniture is available in six different colourways. Silver Grey

Polished

Mid Grey

Fine Picked

Black

Polished

347

Fine Picked

Light Beige

Fine Picked

Pink

Polished

Fine Picked

Dark Green

Fine Picked

Polished

Fine Picked

Finishes The range is available in a choice of two finishes: Polished Enhancing the natural beauty of the stone, providing an elegant lustrous finish with enhanced aesthetic qualities. Fine Picked Yielding a natural looking matt, textured finish that possesses superior slip resistant properties.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS03

Materials Specification

Cast Iron and Aluminium Material Specifications, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

The two most common forms of iron used today are grey iron, commonly known as cast iron, and ductile iron. Marshalls Street Furniture uses only ductile iron in its cast iron products. The main difference between the two types of iron is their chemical make-up. Grey iron is made up of elongated flakes of graphite where as ductile iron has spherical graphite particles. During the manufacturing process of ductile iron graphite is formed, this solidifies and causes an internal expansion. This eliminates defects caused by shrinkage that other cast iron types are prone to, and gives ductile iron an increased strength to weight ratio when compared with grey iron. Ductile iron is therefore less prone to fracturing in usage. Ductile iron also uses less energy and resources in its manufacture; it may be cast either without the use of additional feeders or with a smaller quantity than those used for other types of iron. This reduced requirement for feed metal increases the productivity of ductile iron and reduces its material and energy requirements. All Marshalls Street Furniture cast iron products are manufactured to BS EN 1563:1997. The main benefits of using cast iron are as follows: Durability Cracking is eliminated due to the spherical formation of the graphite particles, increasing the ductility of the iron, and making it less brittle. Greater Impact Resistance Due to the extra strength and ductility of cast iron, when compared to grey iron, it has a higher resistance to impact. This makes ductile cast iron an ideal material for bollards as they will not fracture on impact. Corrosion Resistance Ductile iron offers greater corrosion resistance when compared with grey iron. Also, each piece of street furniture is protected against rust with a rust inhibited primer before being painted with a gloss paint finish. This ensures longevity of the product.

Aluminium Marshalls Street Furniture also use cast aluminium in some of its products. Cast aluminium has similar properties to cast iron such as durability and high impact resistance. However it is much lighter, this is particularly useful for demountable bollards. Cast aluminium will not rust and as a result requires less maintenance when compared with cast iron.

348

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS04

Materials Specification

Stainless Steel Material Specification and Maintenance Recommendations

Grades of Stainless Steel

Cleaning and Maintenance

Stainless steel from the Austenitic range are selected for use in street furniture fabrication. There are two main grades of Austenitic stainless steel used in our street furniture; grades 304 (1.4301 EN classification) and 316 (1.4401 EN classification). Each grade of stainless steel is suited to different locations. Grade 316 (1.4401) is suited to all areas, especially marine locations where high sodium chloride levels in the air can degrade other types of stainless steel. Grade 304 (1.4301) is more suited to urban locations where there is less risk of sodium chlorides contaminating the surface of the steel. Our products are of the highest quality and will perform their purpose whilst remaining aesthetically pleasing throughout their lifetime provided the correct grade of stainless steel is specified and maintenance is carried out when necessary.

Stainless steel requires relatively low maintenance. However its corrosion resistant and aesthetic properties can be compromised if its surface is not kept clean. Regular cleaning schedules will enhance the performance of the product and result in a long service life.

The main differences between the two grades are as follows:

The cleaning frequency is dependent on the application, however cleaning is recommended when the metal is soiled. In doing so, the original appearance can be restored.

• G rade 316 (1.4401) has a greater chromium and nickel content and includes molybdenum. This increases its corrosion resistant properties and makes it less susceptible, when compared to grade 304 (1.4301), to surface pitting and staining. • R ecommended maintenance schedules for the two grades differ slightly due to the differences in their chemical make-up. The table below shows the recommended cleaning frequencies for the two grades of stainless steel in each type of atmosphere. Location

304 (1.4301)

316 (1.4401)

Internal

As required to maintain appearance or design

Suburban or rural

6-12 month intervals (as appropriate to location and design)

Industrial or urban

3-6 months

6-12 months

Coastal or marine

Not recommended

6-12 months

Stainless steel has the following advantages: Durability Austenitic stainless steel is very durable making it ideal for use in street furniture applications. High Corrosion Resistance Increased amounts of chromium and the addition of nickel increase austenitic stainless steel’s resistance to corrosion. This lessens the risks of surface pitting occurring, lowering the overall aesthetic quality of the material’s finish. Resistant to Staining Austenitic stainless steel is highly resistant to staining. This ensures that products remain looking their best for longer. Furthermore, it requires very low maintenance, lowering costs in the longer term. 100% Recyclable Stainless steel is one of the most environmentally friendly metals used by man today. If selected and maintained correctly it will remain attractive over its required life cycle. Once it is no longer needed it can be recycled. Around 90% of stainless steel is made from recycled scrap. It is stainless steel’s corrosion resistant property that makes it a “green” material. If well maintained corrosion is highly unlikely, as a result the metal can be fully recycled when no longer essential. Stainless steel has no down cycling no matter how many times the steel has been recycled. For architects that are looking for “green” materials to use in their designs, stainless steel should be a definite consideration.

349

Surface contamination is the main cause of staining. This can be down to minute particles of detritus or iron settling on the surface of the steel during installation. Common problems occur when iron particles from the surrounding environment, for example stone cutting equipment, gather on the surface of the metal. These particles then rust and give the appearance of staining. In addition, naturally occurring atmospheric conditions can produce deposits which may be corrosive, e.g. salt deposits from marine atmospheres, or highway gritting in winter.

Stainless steel is very easy to clean. Washing with soap or mild detergent and warm water followed by a clear water rinse is usually adequate. Where stainless steel has become extremely dirty alternative methods of cleaning can be used, as shown in the table. Marshalls Street Furniture offer a stainless steel cleaning pack, for further information contact our Sales Order Office.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS04

Materials Specification

Stainless Steel Material Specification and Maintenance Recommendations

Requirement

Suggested Method 1,2

Soap, detergent or dilute (1%) ammonia solution in warm clean Routine cleaning of light soiling water. Apply with a clean sponge, soft cloth or soft-fibre brush then rinse in clean water and dry6 Fingerprints

Detergent and warm water, alternatively, hydrocarbon solvent

Oil and grease marks

Hydrocarbon solvents (methylated spirit, isopropyl alcohol or acetone) 2

Stubborn spots, stains and light discoloration. Water marking. Light rust staining

Mild, non-scratching creams and polishes. Apply with soft cloth or soft sponge and rinse off residues with clean water and dry6,7

Localised rust stains caused by carbon steel contamination

Proprietary gels, or 10% phosphoric acid solution (followed by ammonia and water rinses), or oxalic acid solution (followed by water rinse)6

10-15 volume % solution of phosphoric acid. Use warm, neutralise with dilute ammonia solution, rinse with clean water and dry6. Alternatively soak in a 25% vinegar solution and use a nylon brush to remove deposits a) Non-scratching cream or polish Heating or heavy discolouration e.g. Solvol Auto Chrome Metal Polish 1,9

Adherent hard water scales and mortar/cement splashes

b) Nylon-type pad, e.g. ‘Scotchbrite’ 3,4,5 Badly neglected surfaces with accumulated grime deposits Paint, graffiti

Comments Satisfactory on most surfaces Proprietary spray-applied polishes available to clean and minimise remarking Alkaline formulations are also available with surfactant additions e.g. D7 Polish1 Avoid cleaning pastes with abrasive additions3. Suitable cream cleansers are available with soft calcium carbonate additions, e.g. ‘Cif’, or with the addition of citric acid, e.g. Shiny Sinks1. Do not use chloride solutions8,9 Small areas may be treated with a rubbing block comprising fine abrasive in a hard rubber or plastic filler. Carbon steel wool should not be used, nor should pads that have previously been used on carbon steel. A test should be carried out to ensure that the original surface finish is not damaged Proprietary formulations available with surfactant additions. Take special care when using hydrochloric acid based mortar removers 8,9 a) C reams are suitable for most finishes, but only use ‘Solvol’ on bright polished surfaces. Some slight scratching can be left. b) Use on brushed and polished finishes along the grain

A fine, abrasive paste as used for car body refinishing, May brighten dull finishes. To avoid a patchy appearance, e.g. ‘T-cut’ rinsed clean to remove all paste material and dried1 the whole surface may need to be treated Proprietary alkaline or solvent paint strippers, depending upon paint Apply as directed by manufacturer type. Use soft nylon or bristle brush on patterned surfaces

Notes 1. The products referenced in this information sheet are understood to be suitable for stainless steels. However, no endorsement of the products or their manufacturers is implied and it is acknowledged that other manufacturing companies may provide products of equal or better quality. The following companies manufacture proprietary names mentioned: – ‘Cif’ – Lever Brothers Ltd, ‘Shiny Sinks’ – Home Products Ltd, ‘Ajax’ – Colgate Palmolive Ltd, ‘D7 Stainless Steel Polish’ – Diversey Ltd, ‘T-Cut’ – Automotive Chemicals Ltd and ‘Solvol Auto Chrome Metal Polish’ - Hammerite Products Ltd 2. Cleaning agents should be approved for use under the relevant national environmental regulations and, in addition, prepared and used in accordance with the manufacturers’ or suppliers’ health and safety instructions. Solvents should not be used in enclosed areas. 3. Nylon abrasive pads should be adequate for dealing with most deposits. If a more severe treatment is needed to mask coarse scratches or physical damage on a surface, use the finest abrasive medium consistent with covering the damage marks. With directional brushed and polished finishes, align and blend the new “scratch pattern” with the original finish, checking that the resulting finish is aesthetically acceptable. Silicon carbide media may be used, especially for the final stages of finishing. Avoid using hard objects such as knife blades and certain abrasive/scouring agents as it is possible to introduce surface scuffs and scratches. Scratching is particularly noticeable on sink drainer areas. These are usually superficial and can be removed with proprietary stainless steel cleaners or, alternatively, with a car paint restorer, such as ‘T-cut’. 4. If wire brushes are used, these should be made of a similar or better grade of stainless steel. Ensure that all abrasive media used are free from sources of contamination, especially iron and chlorides. 5. When cleaning a surface with any chemical preparation or abrasive medium, a trial should be done on a small, unobtrusive hidden or non-critical area of the surface, to check that the resulting finish matches with the original. 6. To avoid water marks, use clean rinsing water, such as reasonable quality potable (tap) water. Drying marks may be avoided using an air blower or wiping with clean disposable wipes. 7. Rust marks or staining on stainless steels is unlikely to be the result of corrosion to the stainless steel itself. These marks are likely to result from small particles of carbon steel from wire wool or scouring pads becoming attached or embedded in the surface. In the damp environment of a sink, these iron particles rust and cause staining. Rust marks may be removed using non-scratching creams or alternatively using an oxalic acid solution, where iron particles have been embedded in the surface. Special precautions are necesary with oxalic acid, as, although it may not ‘burn’ unprotected skin, it is poisonous, if ingested. 8. Chloride-containing solutions, including hydrochloric acid-based cleaning agents and hypochlorite bleaches can cause unacceptable surface staining and pitting, and should not be used in contact with stainless steels. Under no circumstances should concentrated bleaches contact decorative stainless steel surfaces. Hydrochloric acid based solutions, such as silver cleaners, building mortar removal solutions must not be used in contact with stainless steels. Hypochlorite containing bleaches must be used in the dilutions suggested in the manufacturers’ instructions and contact times kept to a minimum. Thorough rinsing after use is very important. A frequent cause of staining and micropitting of stainless steels is splashing with undiluted bleach solutions and mortar cleaners. 9. After a repair or fire damage it may be necessary to clean products using nitric acid-hydrofluoric acid pickling pastes or nitric acid passivation solution. Changes in surface appearance usually result when cleaning with these acids. Strong acids should only be used for on-site cleaning when all other methods have proved unsatisfactory. Nitric and phosphoric acids can be used with care for cleaning and maintenance on stainless steel items. Citric acid cleaners are less potentially hazardous. Rubber gloves should be used when handling strong acids and care taken to avoid spillage over adjacent areas (see note 2). 10. If all the suggestions and actions in the table have been attempted unsuccessfully, it is worth bearing in mind that stainless steel can be mechanically polished or electropolished by specialists on site. Stainless steel is homogenous and does not rely on surface pitting for its corrosion resistance. If in difficulty please contact our Sales Office for assistance. This information has been provided by the British Stainless Steel Association (BSSA) and should be considered as current best practice only. Should you be unsure as to the suitability of any commercially available cleaner always check with the product manufacturers.

350

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS05

Materials Specification

Steel Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

Carbon steel or mild steel as it is more commonly known is a highly functional material when used in street furniture applications. It can withstand high impacts which is particularly useful when used as a bollard material. The main features and benefits of steel are as follows: Durability Steel is an exceptionally strong material and has a high strength to weight ratio. This makes it an ideal material for use in street furniture applications as it can withstand high impact without becoming severely damaged. Resistance to Corrosion All our steel products are hot dip galvanised to coat them in a 40-60 micron zinc covering. Hot dipping is a process whereby the steel is submerged in a bath of molten zinc for around 4-5 minutes. This forms a thin layer of zinc which helps protect the steel from corrosion. The process complies with the BS EN ISO 1461 standard for hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel. In addition to galvanising, polyester powder coating increases steel’s weathering characteristics making it even more resistant to corrosion. Resistant to Chips and Abrasions In addition to the galvanising process, some steel products have a polyester powder coating. Polyester powder has excellent colour and gloss retention in outdoor exposure. It also has good wear resistant properties which gives our products more resistance to chips and abrasions.

Colours Polyester powder coating is available in full range of RAL colours.

Maintenance of Polyester Powder Coated Steel Products Once steel has been effectively treated against corrosion it will require very little maintenance. Polyester powder coated steel is extremely easy to clean and has a long life span. In order to retain the aesthetic qualities of polyester powder coated steel products, it is important that they are cleaned regularly. The frequency of cleaning depends upon the environment in which the product is situated. In urban environments we recommend a maximum of 18 months between cleaning operations, unless undue soiling is apparent on the coating. In this case, cleaning should be done more frequently. In areas of high pollution, marine and swimming pool environments cleaning should be carried out every three months. Polyester powder coating can be cleaned using a solution of mild detergent in warm water. All surfaces should be cleaned using a soft cloth, sponge or natural bristle brush. Use of abrasive materials should be avoided as this will damage the coating, lowering the aesthetic of the product. If the product is heavily soiled then repeated cleaning may be required. In order to assist with this problem the following products have been tested: • Ajax Cream • Liquid Gumption • Flash in water • Ajax Liquid in water

351

While tests show that products of this type may be used to successfully remove heavy surface deposits, extra care must be taken to avoid any scuffing of the powder coating film. It is recommended that in all cases, such products are reserved for heavy soiled coatings only. Cleaning products should be tested on a small area first to assess their efficiency. After application all detergents and cleaners must be thoroughly rinsed away with clean water, ensuring there is no risk of pollution to the surrounding area. The information contained should be considered as best practice only. Should you be unsure as to the suitability of any commercially available cleaner always check with the product manufacturers.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS06

Materials Specification

Polyurethane Materials Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

FerrocastÂŽ is created from a polyurethane compound which comprises two components. When both parts are mixed together they create a thermal reaction, known as polymerisation, which hardens the compound, creating a thermo set material. The Ferrocast polyurethane compound can be cast into very complex shapes, making Ferrocast extremely versatile. To increase the strength of some Ferrocast products, they are set around a steel core.

Colours

The main benefits of Ferrocast are as follows:

Due to its non-ferrous and high chip and abrasion resistant properties, Ferrocast requires only minimal maintenance which means that life time costs of the product are low. Generally, cleaning regimens can be infrequent if dirt and grime build up is minimal. Products can be cleaned using a mild detergent, water and a soft cloth.

Resistance to Corrosion As Ferrocast is a non-ferrous material it is completely resistant to rust and corrosion. This makes Ferrocast an ideal material for use in coastal areas where high saline content in the atmosphere can cause other materials, such as cast iron, to corrode. Ferrocast is a highly suitable replacement for degraded cast iron which is often used in post and rail systems in harbours.

Ferrocast products can be supplied in most RAL colours and come with a range of options including gold banding and ballotini rings. For a full colour list please see page 356.

Maintenance

High Abrasion and Chip Resistance The polyurethane cast product is coated with a two part polymer paint which chemically bonds itself to the surface. This increases resistance to chips and abrasions. Furthermore, the Ferrocast polyurethane is pigmented to the same RAL colour as the polymer paint finish. This ensures that the aesthetic of the product is not compromised should any damage occur to the paint. Durability Ferrocast was developed for use in mining, quarrying and North Sea oil industries. This means it can perform in the toughest of environments. Non-Freezing Ferrocast will not freeze which makes it a suitable material with which to coat rails with as it will not be cold to the touch. This contributes towards some of the requirements for D.D.A. compliance for Post and Rail systems. Versatility Ferrocast can be shaped into almost any style. A simple moulding process is all that is required to create a finished product. Standard or bespoke products can be easily made giving the designer absolute freedom in creating whatever piece of street furniture they require. Fully coordinating ranges of bespoke street furniture can also be created. Reproductions Original cast iron street furniture which has become degraded can be replicated easily, ensuring the landscapeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s aesthetics are not affected. Low Cost Tooling Tooling costs for bespoke items of street furniture can be expensive. When compared with other processes, Ferrocast has low tooling costs offering solutions for all budgets.

352

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS07

Materials Specification Sineu Graff Timber Material Specification

Hardwood and Softwood used in Sineu Graff products is sourced exclusively from sustainable plantation forests, some of which are certified by the FSC. Each type of timber is rigorously checked at each stage of their transformation as they are put through a process of drying, planing and machining before being treated prior to final assembly.

Hardwood Hardwood is Grappa timber from sustainable plantation forests, some of which is processed and then treated with solvent free, natural coloured emulsion which protects against ingress of water, fungus and insects. This is applied in two stages. The first stage is a flow-coat application to 20 microns. The wood is then coated using a fully automated electrostatic process to 100 microns. This not only protects the hardwood but also gives a high quality finish. Various colours are available depending on product type. Please refer to individual product pages for details.

Softwood Softwood is a specially selected high quality timber from sustainable local sources which are closely situated to Sineu Graff in the Alsace region of France. Softwood is pressure treated and sealed with a â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;green tintâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; protective stain which is free from arsenic and chrome. Timber is immersed in a liquid preservative and placed in an autoclave forcing the chemical deep into the wood fibres. This approach ensures that the chemical makes it to the core of each piece of wood making it much more effective than simply soaking the wood in a treatment chemical.

353

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS08

Materials Specification

Moulded Polyethylene Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations

Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE) is a highly versatile plastic material ideal for moulding, and is used in a number of different street furniture products. Plastic street furniture can be used in an array of different landscapes and is even suited to harsh coastal areas where atmospheric conditions can degrade other materials rapidly. The benefits of using MDPE are as follows: Durability MDPE is extremely durable with outstanding impact, fracture and shatter resistance properties. These mechanical properties are tested to BS 2782. Weathering Properties MDPE is ideal for external applications. Materials used are UV stabilised to meet the demands of Northern Hemisphere weather conditions. Chemical Resistance The material is resistant to most acids, salts and solvents. Environmental elements such as acid rain, soot, diesel fumes, salt and seawater will not corrode MDPE. Manufacturing Standards (as applicable) All Marshalls Street Furniture MDPE products are manufactured to BS EN ISO 9002. Plastic materials: Mechanical properties tested to BS 2782. Hot dip galvanised: BS 729 Powder coating: BS 3900

Recyclable MDPE is an environmentally friendly material and is 100% recyclable. Some of Marshalls Street Furniture plastic products can be manufactured using recycled materials where appropriate. The recycled plastic is made using a combination of 50% chipped bottles and 50% regular polymer. Making use of recycled plastic bottles at the chipped bottle stage ensures that re-processing is kept to a minimum. Bottles are collected, washed, chipped and then mixed with the polymer.

Colours Our full range of colours can be found below. We also offer a range of personalisation options including corporate colouring and branding.

Maintenance The solid body colour is permanently moulded-in, eliminating the need for maintenance painting. Units are wear resistant, scratches and parking nudges being less evident. Products can be flushed with clean water and then washed with a mild detergent solution using a bristle brush or sponge. Care should be taken not to apply undue pressure that may damage labels. Flush clean with water after washing.

Standard Colours

Black PMS BLACK

Onyx PMS BLACK 7

Heritage Green PMS 5605

Burgundy PMS 5115

Admiralty Grey PMS 425

Grey White Kwiksave Grey PMS cool grey 1 PMS 423

Bluebell White

Boat Blue PMS 3005

Ultramarine Blue PMS 288

Trafalgar Blue PMS 2955

Golden Yellow PMS 116

Pallet Orange PMS 165

Dark Green PMS 553

RSJ Green PMS 349

Racing Green PMS 5467

Tile Grey PMS 7540

Dark Brown PMS 4975

Heritage Green PMS 5605

Burgundy PMS 5115

Classic Navy PMS 533

Racing Green PMS 5605

Admiralty Grey PMS 425

Kwiksave Grey PMS 423

Tile Grey Pms 7540

Classic Navy PMS 533

Red Signal PMS 485

Reflex Colours

Black PMS BLACK

Bluebell White

Heritage Colours

Black PMS BLACK

Onyx PMS BLACK 7

Modern Colours

Black PMS BLACK

Onyx PMS BLACK 7

354

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS09

Materials Specification

Recycled Plastic Composite Material Specification and Maintenance Recommendation

Marshalls Street Furniture has an exclusive partnership agreement with Intruplas, a recycled plastic composite (RPC) manufacturer, to work together to develop and distribute street furniture made from recycled plastic and other recyclable materials. Intruplas have a very strong environmental ethos and contribute to helping develop a sustainable environment. Their core belief is that what is good for business can be good for the environment. In keeping with their ethos, Intruplas ensure that all electricity used on their site comes from renewable resources. Furthermore, they are accredited by the Environment Agency as recyclers of plastic waste. All of Intruplasâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s hard work and commitment to the environment has not gone unnoticed as they have received awards for excellence including an award from former Prime Minister, Tony Blair. The award was presented to them for achieving all the targets set out in Agenda 21. Additionally, Intruplas were awarded with the Eco Design for Profit award from the Environmental Business Network. RPC products are manufactured from waste material and are therefore made from 100% recycled plastic. No paint, preservation or surface treatments are added to the mix. Intruplas are also unique in the fact that they can process many forms of waste plastic including plastic which is deemed to be contaminated. The manufacturing process starts with the arrival of plastic waste which comes in an array of sizes and formats. Intruplas clean and granulate waste on site to make it easier to handle. Different types of plastic are blended together to ensure the correct mix is achieved. The mix is melted and this process, combined with the special blend of plastics, creates a new material which has a high tensile strength making it ideal for use in street furniture applications. The material is then extruded into profiles, each one of which is hand-finished and assembled as required. The main benefits of using RPC in street furniture applications are as follows: Durability RPC is extremely strong meaning it can perform its purpose even in the toughest of urban environments. Due to the robustness of the material it has increased resistance to physical attack. Each piece of RPC street furniture is free from cracking and splintering and will not chip. This offers improved safety in public areas. Increased Strength Sagging can sometimes be a problem in recycled plastic seating when only one type of plastic is used in the mix. Because Intruplas use a number of plastics the material has a much higher strength and products are not prone to sagging.

355

Long Lifespan RPC is impervious to water, insect and fungal ingress and as a result will not rot. This ensures that the product has a long life and means that repair and replacement costs can be kept to a minimum. Whole life costs of the RPC products can be up to a third of the costs of a traditional solution. Consistent Quality As an extruded product, every piece of recycled plastic has consistent characteristics unlike timber. Environmentally Friendly Using RPC in street furniture not only offers the customer a low cost product but also helps to reduce the amount of plastic waste which goes to landfill or incineration. Recycling a plastic bottle can conserve enough energy to light a 60W bulb for up to 6 hours. As RPC is used as replacement for timber it also reduces the amount of trees that need to be felled. Official figures state that for every ton of recycled plastic used, 1.66 tons of CO2 output is saved. 100% Recyclable Each piece of RPC street furniture can be completely recycled at the end of its useful life.

Maintenance No painting or treatment of the material is required, which not only minimises general maintenance but also lowers costs and environmental impact. The surface of the product can be wiped clean easily. Paint or marker pen can be easily removed with thinners without damaging the product.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

MATS10

Materials Specification RAL standard colour list for paint and powder

Standard Colour Chart Standard RAL colours for each brand are listed below. Products are listed with a gloss finish as standard. Ferrocast® is available in three finishes, matt, semi gloss and gloss. Other RAL colours are available to order Sineu Graff Ollerton Ferrocast Sineu Graff Gloss Gloss Gloss S. Gloss Matt Gloss CREAM/YELLOW GREEN RAL 1001 RAL 6000 ● ● RAL 1003 RAL 6002 ● ● RAL 1006 RAL 6004 ● ● ● RAL 1011 RAL 6005 ● ● RAL 1013 RAL 6009 ● ● ● ● RAL 1015 RAL 6010 ● ● ● ● RAL 1016 RAL 6011 ● RAL 1018 RAL 6012 ● ● ● ● RAL 1021 RAL 6013 ● ● RAL 1023 RAL 6014 ● ● RAL 1028 RAL 6018 ● ● ● ● BS10E53 RAL 6019 ● ● RAL 6021 ORANGE RAL 6024 ● RAL 2000 RAL 6025 ● ● ● RAL 2002 RAL 6026 ● ● ● ● RAL 2004 RAL 6028 ● ● ● RAL 2011 RAL 6029 ● RAL 6034 RED BS12B29 RAL 3000 BS14C39 ● ● ● ● RAL 3002 ● RAL 3003 GREY ● ● ● ● ● RAL 3004 RAL 7000 ● ● ● RAL 3005 RAL 7001 ● RAL 3009 RAL 7005 ● ● RAL 3011 RAL 7011 ● RAL 3016 RAL 7012 ● ● RAL 3018 RAL 7016 ● ● RAL 3020 RAL 7021 ● ● ● ● ● ● BS04E53 RAL 7023 ● RAL 7024 ● PURPLE RAL 7031 RAL 4002 RAL 7032 ● RAL 4003 RAL 7035 ● ● RAL 4004 RAL 7040 ● RAL 4008 RAL 7042 ● ● ● BS00A05 BLUE RAL 5000 BROWN ● RAL 5002 RAL 8001 ● ● ● ● ● ● RAL 5003 RAL 8007 ● ● ● ● RAL 5004 RAL 8011 ● RAL 5005 RAL 8014 ● RAL 5010 RAL 8016 ● ● ● ● RAL 5011 RAL 8019 ● ● RAL 5013 RAL 8028 ● ● ● ● RAL 5015 BS08B29 ● ● ● ● ● RAL 5019 ● RAL 5021 SILVER ● RAL 5022 RAL 9006 ● ● ● ● BS20C40 RAL 9007 ● ● ●

SINEU GRAFF SABLE COLOURS Grey 900 sable Green 500 sable Blue 700 sable Black 100 sable Brown 650 sable

BLACK RAL 9005 RAL 9017

●

WHITE RAL 9010 RAL 9016

● ●

Ollerton Gloss

Gloss

●

● ●

●

Ferrocast S. Gloss

Matt ● ●

●

● ●

●

● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

●

● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

●

● ●

●

● ●

356

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST01

Installation Details Bollards

Standard Ground (Root) Fixing Bollard Installation

Lift Out and Lockable Bollard Installation

Root depth varies across our range of static bollards from 200mm-500mm depending on model. For details on root depths please refer to individual product pages.

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated.

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated. 2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling. 3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. For example, a bollard with a 300mm root depth will require a cube to be excavated measuring 300mm x 300mm, fixed on the post centre, by 300mm deep.

3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. For example, Lift Out and Lockable bollards require a cube no less than 400mm x 400mm, fixed on the post centre, by 400mm deep. 4. Where applicable, ensure the root cross bar is inserted through the core of the socket.

4. Locate the bollard centrally into the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required.

5. Locate the socket centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required.

5. Ensure the bollard is vertical in all planes.

6. Ensure the socket is vertical in all planes.

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard.

7. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off any residue concrete from base of bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard.

7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured.

8. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured.

Anti-Ram Bollard Installation

Base Plate Bollard Installation

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated.

Fix the post to a suitable homogeneous substrate using a suitable bolting system used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. If the base material is concrete then a chemical or drop in type anchor may be suitable. Anchors such as these are available through the local builder’s merchants or direct from the manufacturer. Marshalls Street Furniture would be happy to assist in suitable bolt selection if required.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling. 3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. For example, anti-ram bollards require a cube no less than 500mm x 500mm fixed on the post centre, by 600mm deep. 4. Where applicable, ensure the root cross bar is inserted through the core. 5. Locate the bollard centrally into the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 6. Ensure the bollard is vertical in all planes. 7. Where applicable, infill bollard with concrete and attach top T cap.* 8. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 9. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured. * Only applicable for Reinforced Steel Bollards.

357

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST01

Installation Details Bollards

Rhino Telescopic Bollard Installation

Bellitalia Alto 33 Copper Bollard Installation Details

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated.

The bollard may be fixed directly into the ground.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling.

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated.

3. Excavate a cube in the substrate approximately 300mm x 300mm and 200mm deeper than the ground socket to be installed. 4. Put approximately 200mm of minimum 15mm clean loose stone into the hole for drainage purposes. 5. Lower the ground socket into the hole and check the top of ground socket is approximately 5mm above ground level. 6. Locate the ground socket centrally in the hole and ensure socket is vertical in all planes. 7. Add approximately 200mm of clean loose stone. 8. Back fill the hole, tamping down until approximately 300mm from the surface. 9. Raise telescopic bollard and check for alignment (if more than one post is to be installed). 10. Then fill the hole with grade C30 concrete, medium slump and smooth off the area around the lid to allow fall away. 11. Lower the telescopic bollard into the ground socket. Please ensure the bollard and lid are kept clear of debris during installation. 12. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured.

Rhino Telescopic Bollard Operating Instructions To Lock 1. Lift lid, draw up inner post to full extension. Rotate handle clockwise a quarter turn. Press down push button lock. To Unlock 1. Release push button lock with key. 2. Return key to original position by depressing slightly and remove key. Rotate handle a quarter turn clockwise.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling. 3. Drill a 100mm wide hole in the ground, 300mm deep with an appropriate core borer. 4. Fix the bollardâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s base with grade C30 concrete, medium slump including a rapid hardening agent if required. 5. Ensure the socket is vertical in all planes. 6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured. This bollard may be specified with a removable system using a Floor Socket and a key to open and close the locking system. 1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated. 2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling. 3. Drill a 120mm wide hole in the ground, 350mm deep with an appropriate core borer. 4. Fix the Floor Socket with grade C30 concrete, medium slump including a rapid hardening agent if required. Ensure the socket is vertical in all planes. 5. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the socket. Where necessary, rinse off any residue concrete from the Floor Socket using a soft cloth and water. 6. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured.

3. Lower the post slowly and in a controlled manner. Do not allow it to free-fall into base. 4. To lock repeat step 1 from â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;To Lockâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; instructions above. Weekly Maintenance 1. Ensure sliding post is kept clean and free from debris. 2. Clean and lubricate lock using a lubricant similar to WD40. 3. Installations with high water tables or adverse conditions should be checked daily. 4. Always ensure that the cover plate is closed when bollard is not in use. 5. Clear any debris from around hinge and cover plate.

358

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST01

Installation Details Sineu Graff Bollards

Sineu Graff Cast Iron Bollard Ground Post Fixing (Style and Classic Models)

Sineu Graff Timber Bollards with Ground Anchor Fixing

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling. 3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollardâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specification. For example, a bollard 800 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 1000mm high will require a 350mm root, hence a cube measuring 350mm x 350mm, fixed on the post centre, by 350mm deep. Shorter bollards only require a root depth of 300mm. 4. Locate the post centrally in to the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 5. Ensure the post is vertical in all planes. 6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off any residue concrete from base of bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured. 8. Attach the bollard to the ground post using a fixing bolt.

359

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated.

3. Excavate a cube in the substrate measuring 350mm x 350mm, fixed on the post centre, by 350mm deep. 4. Locate the ground anchor centrally in to the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 5. Ensure the post is vertical in all planes. 6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured. 8. Attach the bollard to the ground anchor using two fixing bolts.

All necessary protective equipment is to be used during the installation process. Care should be taken to avoid damage to surrounding areas.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST01

Installation Details Plastic Bollards

Four ground fixing options are available as options on our plastic bollards to suit all likely applications. This ensures that a uniform appearance is achieved whilst allowing the bollards to perform a number of different functions.

SOCKETED FIXING

For permanent fixing, the bollard base is concreted in below ground. The moulded return at the base ensures that the bollard cannot be removed. Permanent fixing features a 400mm root depth.

456mm

400mm

PERMANENT (GROUND) FIXING

This form of fixing is ideal for use in applications where the occasional replacement or removal of a bollard may be required. This new socket system ensures secure fixing by rotating the bollard through 90Ë&#x161; interlocking the bollard and socket. Socketed fixing features a 456mm root depth

SURFACE FIXING

645mm

ANTI-RAM FIXING

A robust steel core, permanently concreted into the ground, provides a rigid and effective deterrent to ram-raiding. Anti-Ram fixing features a 645mm root depth

A fixing system for use in multi-storey car parks, bridges or any application where below ground services or surface membranes may be vulnerable. The bollard base is fixed directly to a shallow concrete substrate using 95mm expanding bolts

360

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST02

Installation Details Seating Fixing Details

Litter Bin Fixing Details

Free standing

Free standing seats can be situated directly into place on site using the correct lifting equipment. The large weight of the products means that fixing to the ground is unnecessary.

Generally the weight of the litter bin will deter unauthorised movement, for example Bellitalia concrete litter bins. Additionally some products are available with a weighted self stabilising base plate which provides additional security.

Ground (Root) Fixed

Plastic litter bins may also be specified with integral ballast cartridge which also provides additional security.

The seat legs are designed to be situated directly into a concrete mix. Root depths vary depending on product.

Base Plate/Surface Mounting A positive bolting system should be selected by the installer based on the type and condition of the substrate taking into account any applicable close edges and thicknesses.

Sub-Surface This is similar to surface mounting, however seat legs are bolted to a concrete substrate and then a surface material, such as paving, is laid on top. The seat legs are extended to ensure the same seat height above ground as surface mounting.

Sineu Graff Seating Fixing Types and Installation Details Sineu Graff seating is available with various types of fixing. Fixing methods are dependent on model. Please refer to individual product pages for specific details on which types of fixing are available for each model. Type T – Bolt Fixing. Seat is bolted into the in situ concrete. Type P – Anchor fixing. This type of fixing is designed for seats with either hardwood or softwood feet. Type DT – Bolt fixing through mounting block which is supplied as an additional item.

Ground Fixed Part of the litter bin body or supporting post is permanently set into a C30, medium slump grade concrete mix. Some Sineu Graff models are supplied with a concrete mounting block. The bin can be fixed to the block once it has been situated at the correct level in an in situ mix. This allows the litter bin to be permanently installed. Please refer to individual product pages for details on which Sineu Graff litter bins are available with this type of fixing.

Base Plate/Surface Mounted Base plate is secured to suitable substrate, for example concrete, using rag bolts via a base plate or fitting/drainage holes at the base of the bin. Some models have holes for the rag bolts incorporated in their feet avoiding the need for base plates.

Bellitalia Self Levelling Litter Bins Bellitalia Litter bins are supplied as standard with a patented self levelling system which allows litter bins to be installed level on slopes of up to 5% - 6.5% from horizontal (depending on model). 1. Ensure area is totally clean. 2. Place base element and lift main body into position using appropriate lifting equipment. 3. Level main body and ‘lock’ adjustment bolts level in position.

Type DE – Bolt fixing through mounting block supplied which is supplied as an additional item. An additional angle bracket is also supplied.

4. Litter bin is now level and ready to use.

Type DT and DE fixing methods provide additional anchorage where ground conditions are less stable.

Fixing Methods for Sineu Graff Seats

200 180

250

180

250

In situ concrete 180

In situ concrete

Type T – Bolt fixing

Type P – Anchor fixing (seats with either hardwood or softwood feet).

Type DE – Bolt fixing through mounting block supplied as additional item.

Type DT and DE provide addition anchorage where ground conditions are less stable.

361

180

Type DT – Bolt fixing through mounting block supplied as additional item. Additional angle bracket also supplied.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST03

Installation Details Cycle Stand Fixing Details

Ground (Root) Fixing Cycle Stand Installation Root depth varies across our range of cycle stands from 200mm-350mm depending on model. 1. Determine where the cycle stand is to be situated.

Generally, planters can be installed by lifting them into position using appropriate lifting equipment. Certain models of planters can be specified with sub-channels, which allow for movement by fork lift truck. Additionally, steel lifting hooks may be specified which can be used to move planters even when they have been fully planted.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling.

Classica Planters, Ginevra Planters, Litterbins with Self-levelling System

3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the cycle stand’s specification. For example, a cycle with a 300mm root depth will require a cube to be excavated measuring 300mm x 300mm, fixed on the post centre, by 350mm deep.

1. Place base elements and adjust level. ‘Lock’ adjustment bolts in the level position.

4. Locate the cycle stand centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 5. Ensure the cycle stand is vertical in all planes.

2. Manoeuvre top elements into position. 3. Completed planter is now ready for planting. (The planter is equipped with hotgalvanised steel eyes to make it easier to lift and move even when fully planted)

Cosmoarredo Planters

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the cycle stand. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the cycle stand with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the product.

1. Use a level to locate the upper part to the ground.

3. Place a layer of Geo-textile to prevent ‘flushing’ of top soil.

2. Carefully lock the two parts of the planter with some rounded stones, as shown in the picture.

4. Fill the water reservoir area with some loose gravel. 5. Fill with top soil and planting media.

Base Plate Cycle Stand Installation Fix the cycle stand to a suitable homogeneous substrate using a suitable bolting system used in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions. If the base material is concrete then a chemical or drop in type anchor may be suitable. Anchors such as these are available through the local builders’ merchants or direct from the manufacturer. Marshalls Street Furniture would be happy to assist in suitable bolt selection if required.

Classica Planters, Ginevra Planters, Litter Bins with Self Levelling System

1. Place base elements and adjust level.

2. Secure level and place top elements in position.

3. Completed Planter ready for planting.

Cosmoarredo Planter 1.

4. MAX

P=10%

362

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST04

Installation Details Notice Board and Signage Board Fixing Details

FerrocastÂŽ Notice Board Ground (Root) Fixed Installation

Ferrocast Fingerpost Ground (Root) Fixing Installation

Root depth varies across our range of notice boards from 150mm-400mm depending on model. Please refer to individual product pages for details or contact our Sales Office.

Root depth varies across our range of Fingerposts from 150mm-500mm depending on model. Please refer to individual product pages for details or contact our Sales Office.

1. Determine where the notice board is to be situated.

1. Determine where the fingerpost is to be situated.

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling.

3. Excavate either one or two cubes in the substrate; the number depends on how many posts the notice board has. When two cubes are required, the distance between them will be determined by the width of the notice board. For example, a single post notice board with a 150mm root depth will require a cube to be excavated measuring 150mm x 150mm, fixed on the post centre, by 200mm deep.

3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the fingerpostâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specification. For example, a fingerpost with a 400mm root depth will require a cube to be excavated measuring 400mm x 400mm, fixed on the post centre, by 450mm deep.

4. Locate the notice board centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required.

5. Ensure the fingerpost is vertical in all planes.

5. Ensure the notice board is vertical in all planes. 6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the notice board. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the notice board with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the product. 7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured.

Ollerton and Imperial Fingerpost and Notice Board Installation Posts are bolted to a concrete substrate and then a surface material, such as paving is laid on top

363

4. Locate the fingerpost centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required.

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the fingerpost. Where necessary, rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the fingerpost with a soft cloth and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the product. 7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should not be used until the concrete has cured. 8. Once the concrete has cured add the fingers to the post in the correct positions.

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST05

Installation Details Traffic Management Installation Guidelines

General These guidelines are for use with Marshalls Traffic Calming products and should be used in conjunction with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice. Marshalls are unable to accept any responsibility for the quality of workmanship or design criteria employed in the placement and fixing of Marshalls Traffic Calming products. This does not affect the normal statutory rights of our customers.

Health and Safety All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) should be worn on site, as the site rules dictate. The recommendations of the Manual Handling Operation Regulations 1992 should be complied with, and where necessary, suitable lifting equipment utilised.

Inclement Weather Laying operations should be discontinued (and any open work face covered) if weather conditions are such that the performance of the construction may be jeopardised. Construction operations should not be undertaken when the temperature is below 3 degrees on a falling thermometer and below 1 degree on a rising thermometer. All unfinished areas and stockpiles of materials should be covered in the advent of inclement weather to prevent saturation.

Contact To ensure that the most current edition of these guidelines is obtained please telephone 0845 30 40 708.

TRAFFIC RAMP, SPEED CUSHION AND REFUGE ISLAND UNITS Scope These guidelines are for the construction of Traffic Ramp, Speed Cushion and Refuge Island Units only.

Foundation The Units should be placed within the carriageway structure, the excavation should leave at least 200mm clear around the periphery of the Unit. 40mm of wearing course should be planed from the pavement, to be replaced upon completion of the installation. The underlying construction should be excavated to the correct depth to accommodate the Unit and the concrete base. The base of the excavation should be inspected by the Engineer for approval and then well compacted to level. Dependent on the carriageway construction it may be necessary to install a concrete foundation such as minimum thickness 150mm and C30 concrete, to the Engineerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s approval.

Laying The Units should be lowered into position and packed at each corner with Class B engineering bricks to bring up to the desired line and level. Note: Threaded lifting sockets are incorporated in the Units to facilitate lifting and handling. Alternatively, Marshalls are able to supply lifting loops if required. CDM regulations must be adhered to with regards the mechanical handling of heavy concrete products. In order to protect the edges of the Units, they should be laid so that they do not stand proud of the final carriageway surface.

CONCRETE BASE Materials The Units should be laid securely onto a concrete base that is a minimum of 150mm thick and extends at least 100mm beyond the edge of the Unit. The concrete used to form the base should have a minimum strength of 40N/mm2 and a maximum aggregate size of 20mm. It is imperative that the concrete has sufficient workability to flow under the Unit.

Construction The concrete should be vibrated into place under the Units completely filling the void and supporting the Unit. No voids shall exist between the Unit and the base. Note: The concrete must have gained adequate strength before any trafficking of the Unit is permitted.

Reinstatement of Carriageway The wearing course should be reinstated as directed by the Engineer. All joints between new and existing surfaces should be saw cut to a depth of 40mm and sealed with a hot bituminous binder to prevent moisture ingress. 400 40

400

Traffic Calming Unit (Speed Cushion Plateau shown)

100

135 150

Existing carriageway Typical installation detail

Typical installation detail

Engineering bricks All dimensions mm (nom.) Not to scale

All dimensions mm (nom.) Not to scale

SATELLITE ISLANDS Satellite Islands are bonded onto the base course using modified mortar. The upstand required to the kerb face will dictate the depth of planing or excavation required, e.g. with an upstand of 125mm, a product height of 170mm and a bonding layer of 20mm, a foundation 65mm from the finished surface level would be required. It is recommended that Units are placed in position using lifting loops secured to the M16 sockets cast into the product. The wearing course should be reinstated as directed by the Engineer. All joints between new and existing surfaces should be saw cut to a depth of 40mm and sealed with a bituminous binder to prevent moisture ingress.

GUIDELINES FOR THE INSTALLATION OF MARSHALLS S-RAMP AND SPEEDCHECK TRAFFIC CALMING SYSTEMS Scope These guidelines cover the installation of S-Ramp and Speed check Units. The design and installation of other aspects of the traffic calming measure, i.e. table top construction should follow the recommendations of the appropriate code of practice and are not covered under these guidelines.

Foundation The foundation should consist of C30 concrete with a minimum thickness of 150mm, designed in accordance with the relevant code of practice and DfT specifications. The addition of mesh reinforcement may be considered, depending on the application and existing pavement construction. The concrete should be allowed to reach sufficient strength before any trafficking is permitted. 364

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

INST05

Installation Details Traffic Management Installation Guidelines

Haunching

Maintenance of Concrete Block Paved Humps

Units should be haunched at the front and rear with a minimum C30 concrete, of sufficient size and strength to prevent lateral movement during trafficking. An indication of appropriate haunching details is illustrated in the cross-sectional views. The Units must gain sufficient bond to the haunching concrete.

A full reference manual may be obtained from Marshalls Advisory Services, highlighting the necessary maintenance routines to be undertaken for the ensured longevity of the pavement.

For heavily trafficked areas, dowel bars may be used to further increase the joint strength between the haunching and foundation. Dowel bars should be 10mm diameter typically, placed at 200mm centres, centralised behind the Units. Where flexibly laid block paving is used in conjunction with the Units, the concrete haunching must not encroach into the laying course layer. Note: For S-Ramp the haunching should be placed to a level of at least half the height of the S-Ramp Unit, and extend past the Unit by a minimum of 150mm.

Laying Lay Units to line and level using a paviors maul, ensuring that the foundation concrete is sufficiently workable to produce an effective bond. Note: All castellations on the underside of each S-Ramp Unit should be completely filled to achieve the necessary compaction. Where early trafficking is required or heavy vehicle use is anticipated, the use of modified bedding materials may be considered to increase bond strength between the foundation and the Units.

The use of mechanical pavement cleaning machinery should be avoided during the initial life to avoid loss of jointing material until such time as the joints have stabilised naturally or chemically. If the natural method is adopted, the time period to abstain from the use of these machines will be dependent upon the location of the area and the volume of traffic that the area is to receive, although a 3 to 4 month period is typically recommended.

Sealants Proprietary sealing agents are commonly used on paved surfaces, to reduce moisture penetration of the laying course material, and minimise staining from spillages. Whilst such products may offer certain short-term advantages, Marshalls do not recommend the use of such systems on its paving products. Further advice may be sought from Marshalls Advisory Services.

Existing roadway surfacing

Joint between S-Ramp and surfacing sealed with hot bituminous binder

Table-top construction formed with flexibly laid block paving or reinstated roadway surfacing S-Ramp unit Bead of M-Flex

C30 concrete haunch/anchored to base with dowel bars (where required) (Typically 10mm dia. @ 200mm centres centralised behind S-Ramp units)

Jointing Units must not be butt jointed; they should be close jointed, leaving gaps between 2mm to 5mm. These joints should be sand filled and then sealed with a bead of Marshallsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; M-Flex; the bead should be square in profile i.e. 5mm wide x 5mm deep.

Reinforcing mesh (where required)

M-Flex is a grey polyurethane sealant, supplied in 600cc sausages; this is theorectically sufficient for 16 joints, at 6mm each. Note: It is recommended where possible, to eliminate or reduce the road camber in the vicinity of the Road Hump to enable a consistency of joint width to be achieved. This is particularly important with S-Ramp. The vertical joints between Units, where abutting concrete block paving, must be sealed to avoid migration of the laying course material. All joints between new and existing surfaces should be saw cut to a depth of 40mm and sealed with a hot bituminous binder to prevent moisture ingress.

Cutting Wherever possible cutting of Units should be avoided, however, if Units have to be cut the latest Health & Safety guidance must be followed. Units can be cut using a powered disk cutter with suitable blade. It is recommended that the width of highway be measured prior to construction, with the observed dimension being divided by 200mm to ascertain the number of full Units required

365

Speedcheck reversible unit 60 or 65mm thick block paving

1000 Existing road construction

100mm existing road construction

100 40 or 35mm thick laying course

Concrete base and haunch Speedcheck reversible unit

Typical S-Ramp and Speedcheck installations within existing road. All dimensions mm (nom.) Not to scale

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture Sales Office: 0870 600 2425

Quality Policy Statement Please Note

Application

Marshalls is committed to innovative product development and manufacture.

Should customers be in doubt as to the suitability of any Marshalls product for a given application, guidance from our Technical Team should be sought. The colours shown in this literature are as exact as photographic and printing processes will allow. We strongly recommend that colours are judged and chosen from actual materials rather than photographic representation depicted herein. Although every effort is made to ensure consistency of product colour, variations between production batches can occur. We therefore recommend that products are thoroughly mixed on site by drawing, if possible, from a minimum of three packs.

The evolution of new product design is continuous and information is subject to change without notice. Customers should check with the supplier to ensure that they have the latest details. All Marshalls products are manufactured to the appropriate British Standard where applicable. Where products, (or intended usage), lie outside the scope of a British (or intended European) standard or no appropriate standard exists, Marshalls own standard will be employed. All products are supplied subject to Marshalls Standard Conditions of Sale, a copy of which is available on request. Liability in respect of any statements, conditions, warranties and representations made on behalf of the Company is limited in accordance with the terms set out in the Standard Conditions of Sale.

Marshalls is committed to providing a customer oriented service and would welcome feedback on our products and services.

Maintenance Routine cleaning and maintenance is required to keep the overall appearance of the product.

366